Bizhub Pro c6500e User Manual

7/23/2019 Bizhub Pro c6500e User Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bizhub-pro-c6500e-user-manual 1/1027

C6500/C6500e

User Manual

loaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

http://www.manualslib.com/



http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bizhub-pro-c6500e-user-manual 3/1027bizhub PRO C6500 / bizhub PRO C6500e Contents-1

Contents

1 Introduction/Safety information

1.1 Energy Star®..................................................................................... 1-5

1.2 License .............................................................................................. 1-6

1.3 Available features ........................................................................... 1-27

1.4 Explanation of manual conventions.............................................. 1-33

1.5 Legal restrictions on copying........................................................ 1-35

1.6 For EU member states only ........................................................... 1-36

1.7 Safety information .......................................................................... 1-37

1.8 Regulation notices.......................................................................... 1-461.9 Laser safety..................................................................................... 1-48

1.10 Ozone release ................................................................................. 1-51

1.11 Acoustic noise (For European users only).................................... 1-51

1.12 Caution notations and labels......................................................... 1-52

1.13 Space requirements ....................................................................... 1-55

1.14 Operation precautions ................................................................... 1-61

2 Preparation for use2.1 Machine configuration ..................................................................... 2-3

2.2 Turning on/off the power ............................................................... 2-23

2.3 Automatically returning to the default settings: Auto Reset ...... 2-26

2.4 To use machine when Power Save LED lights............................. 2-27

2.5 Making user authentication........................................................... 2-33

3 Paper and original information

3.1 Paper information............................................................................. 3-33.2 Original information........................................................................ 3-14





http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bizhub-pro-c6500e-user-manual 4/1027Contents-2 bizhub PRO C6500 / bizhub PRO C6500e

4 Supplies & handling

4.1 Loading paper.................................................................................... 4-3

4.2 Loading tabbed sheets ................................................................... 4-20

4.3 Adding toner .................................................................................... 4-25

4.4 Exchanging toner recovery box ..................................................... 4-304.5 Replenishing staples....................................................................... 4-33

4.6 Disposing punch waste................................................................... 4-41

4.7 Disposing trimmings ....................................................................... 4-45

4.8 Removing finished sets from large capacity stacker LS-501...... 4-48

5 Before making copies

5.1 Control panel and basic screens ..................................................... 5-3

5.1.1 Control panel .................................................................................. 5-35.1.2 Copy screen.................................................................................... 5-6

5.1.3 Machine Status screen ................................................................... 5-8

5.2 General copy operation .................................................................. 5-10

5.3 Positioning the original ................................................................... 5-15

5.3.1 Positioning originals into the ADF................................................. 5-15

5.3.2 Positioning the original on original glass ...................................... 5-19

5.4 Setting print quantity....................................................................... 5-20

5.5 Setting job during warmup............................................................. 5-22

5.6 To stop scanning/printing............................................................... 5-26

6 Basic job settings

6.1 Original setting .................................................................................. 6-3

6.1.1 Selecting binding direction of the original: Bind Direction.............. 6-3

6.1.2 Specifying orientation of the original: Direction .............................. 6-5

6.1.3 Specifying original type: Image/Type.............................................. 6-7

6.1.4 Copying mixed size originals: Mixed ............................................ 6-11

6.1.5 Copying Z-folded original: Z-Folded............................................. 6-13

6.1.6 Specifying original thickness: Thickness ...................................... 6-14

6.1.7 Copying non-standard size original: Custom ............................... 6-15

6.1.8 Copying tabbed originals: Tab Paper ........................................... 6-21






6.2 Separate Scan mode...................................................................... 6-23

6.3 Selecting color mode ..................................................................... 6-26

6.4 Zoom................................................................................................ 6-28

6.4.1 Copying in 1.000 magnification mode ......................................... 6-28

6.4.2 Changing magnification ratio ....................................................... 6-29

6.4.3 Setting magnification ratio automatically: Auto Zoom................. 6-32

6.5 Simplex/Duplex setting .................................................................. 6-33

6.5.1 Making double-sided copies using ADF...................................... 6-33

6.5.2 Making double-sided copies using original glass........................ 6-37

6.5.3 Making single-sided copies from double-sided originals ............ 6-41

6.6 Paper setting................................................................................... 6-43

6.6.1 Selecting paper size automatically: Auto Paper Select ............... 6-44

6.6.2 Turning on/off the rotation ........................................................... 6-466.6.3 Using paper not specified to any tray: Paper Setting .................. 6-48

6.6.4 Adjusting fixing pressure of fixing unit ......................................... 6-61

6.7 Setting reserve job ......................................................................... 6-63

6.8 Copy conditions incompatible with basic job settings ............... 6-65

7 Color adjustment

7.1 About colors...................................................................................... 7-3

7.2 Color copy quality............................................................................. 7-67.3 Adjusting density level ................................................................... 7-15

7.4 Changing colors using RGB values .............................................. 7-23

7.5 Changing colors using HSB values............................................... 7-26

7.6 Adjusting sharpness....................................................................... 7-34

7.7 Adjusting contrast .......................................................................... 7-36

7.8 Setting image distinction level ...................................................... 7-38

7.9 Selecting screen type or compression......................................... 7-41

7.10 Changing colors using CMYK value ............................................. 7-44

7.11 Selecting glossy.............................................................................. 7-46

7.12 Copy conditions incompatible with color adjustment ................ 7-48






8 Application functions

8.1 To use application function .............................................................. 8-3

8.2 Inserting sheets and covers: Insert Sheet ...................................... 8-6

8.3 Locating title pages on the right side: Chapters .......................... 8-14

8.4 Lay out several pages onto one sheet: Combine Originals......... 8-188.5 Making a multiple page signature booklet:

Booklet Pagination .......................................................................... 8-22

8.6 Inserting different original images into printed sets:Insert Image ..................................................................................... 8-25

8.7 Dividing spread image into right and left pages: Book Copy...... 8-29

8.8 Programming different settings for an output job:Program Job .................................................................................... 8-35

8.9 Dividing an image for enlarged copy:

Multi-Page Enlargement ................................................................. 8-398.10 Erasing outside area of original: Non-Image Area Erase ............ 8-42

8.11 Reversing color in image: Neg./Positive Reverse ........................ 8-44

8.12 Repeating original image on one sheet: Image Repeat............... 8-46

8.12.1 Setting repeat times automatically ............................................... 8-46

8.12.2 Specifying repeat times: Repeat................................................... 8-51

8.13 Eliminating copy marks along borders: Frame Center Erase ..... 8-54

8.14 Copying image in the center of copy paper: Image Centering ... 8-59

8.15 Adjusting position of copy image: Page Margin - Shift ............... 8-61

8.16 Reducing images to create binding margin:Page Margin - Reduce & Shift ........................................................ 8-66

8.17 Printing additional information: Stamp/Image Overlay................ 8-69

8.17.1 Printing stamp onto copies: Built-in Stamp.................................. 8-71

8.17.2 Printing distribution number: Set Numbering ............................... 8-73

8.17.3 Printing page number: Page No. .................................................. 8-75

8.17.4 Printing date/time: Date/Time....................................................... 8-77

8.17.5 Printing watermark onto copies: Watermark ................................ 8-79

8.17.6 Printing distribution number as watermark: Set Numbering......... 8-81

8.17.7 Detailed setting in "Stamp/Watermark"........................................ 8-83

8.18 Overlaying image onto printed pages: Image Overlay................. 8-89

8.19 Storing overlay image in HDD/ overlaying imagestored in HDD: Program Overlay.................................................... 8-91

8.20 Copy conditions incompatible with application functions .......... 8-97






9 Output applications

9.1 Selecting an output tray................................................................... 9-3

9.2 Setting binding direction for duplex copies................................... 9-7

9.3 Sorting/stapling copies (Finisher FS-503) ...................................... 9-9

9.3.1 Non-sort/collate/uncollate output to the primary (main) tray....... 9-119.3.2 Stapling output to the primary (main) tray ................................... 9-13

9.3.3 Collate/uncollate output to the secondary (sub) tray................... 9-16

9.4 Output modes using folding unit FD-501...................................... 9-18

9.4.1 Punching file holes in copies ....................................................... 9-19

9.4.2 Folding copies.............................................................................. 9-22

9.4.3 Attaching cover sheet (Post inserter on FD-501)......................... 9-24

9.5 Output modes using saddle stitcher SD-501............................... 9-27

9.5.1 Making folded booklet ................................................................. 9-27

9.5.2 Folding copies.............................................................................. 9-30

9.6 Using folder/finisher functions manually...................................... 9-33

9.7 Using Finisher FS-607 .................................................................... 9-36

9.7.1 Non-sort/ Collate/ Uncollate output to the primary (main) tray.... 9-38

9.7.2 Stapling output to the primary (main) tray ................................... 9-40

9.7.3 Collate/ Uncollate output to the secondary (sub) tray ................. 9-43

9.7.4 Making folded booklet (Multi Half Fold / Fold&Staple) ................ 9-45

9.7.5 Folding copies in three (Multi tri-fold) .......................................... 9-47

9.7.6 Punching file holes in copies (Punch) .......................................... 9-49

9.8 Cover sheet feeding (Paper inserter) ............................................ 9-52

9.9 Using Finisher FS-607 manually.................................................... 9-54

9.10 Loading/sorting a volume of copies(Large capacity stacker LS-501) ................................................... 9-56

9.11 Copy conditions incompatible with output applications ............ 9-58






10 Advanced information

10.1 Checking feature selections before copying: Mode Check ........ 10-3

10.2 Making sample set for checking results: Proof Copy.................. 10-7

10.3 Interrupting job in progress: Interrupt mode................................ 10-9

10.4 Storing and recalling job conditions: Mode Memory................. 10-1110.4.1 Storing job conditions................................................................. 10-11

10.4.2 Recalling stored job settings ...................................................... 10-14

10.5 Recalling previous job settings.................................................... 10-16

10.6 Displaying screen for operation guide: Help mode.................... 10-18

10.7 Adjusting response time of touch keys: Accessibility ............... 10-20

10.8 Controlling copier from browser: Remote Panel........................ 10-21

11 Job management11.1 Overview of job list screen ............................................................. 11-3

11.2 Job operation on job list screen .................................................... 11-4

11.2.1 To check/control reserved jobs .................................................... 11-4

11.2.2 To display output history .............................................................. 11-7

11.2.3 To display send history ................................................................. 11-8

11.2.4 To check incomplete jobs............................................................. 11-9

11.2.5 To check/operate suspended jobs............................................. 11-10

12 Screen setting outlines

12.1 Machine status screen setting outlines ........................................ 12-3

12.2 Utility screen setting outlines......................................................... 12-8

13 Paper setting

13.1 Paper setting outlines..................................................................... 13-3

13.1.1 Setting items in paper setting ....................................................... 13-4

13.1.2 Paper type specifications ............................................................. 13-6

13.2 Register paper type/weight .......................................................... 13-10

13.3 Delete paper setting...................................................................... 13-18






14 Machine adjustment

14.1 01 Machine Adjustment ................................................................. 14-3

14.1.1 01 Printer Adjustment \ 01 Restart Timing Adjustment ............... 14-3

14.1.2 01 Printer Adjustment \ 02 Centering Adjustment ....................... 14-6

14.1.3 01 Printer Adjustment \ 03 FD-Mag. Adjustment......................... 14-814.1.4 01 Printer Adjustment \ 04 CD-Mag. Adjustment ...................... 14-11

14.1.5 02 Scanner Adjustment \ 01 Restart Timing Adjustment........... 14-14

14.1.6 02 Scanner Adjustment \ 02 Centering Adjustment .................. 14-16

14.1.7 02 Scanner Adjustment \ 03 FD-Mag. Adjustment.................... 14-18

14.2 02 Image Quality Stability ............................................................ 14-21

14.3 03 Execute Adjust Operation....................................................... 14-22

14.4 04 Finisher Adjustment (FS-503) ................................................. 14-23

14.4.1 01 Stapler Position Adj. \ 01 Staple Center Position ................. 14-23

14.4.2 01 Stapler Position Adj. \ 02 Paper Width (Staple) .................... 14-26

14.4.3 01 Stapler Position Adj. \ 03 Paper Width (Straight) .................. 14-29

14.5 04 Finisher Adjustment (FD-501) ................................................. 14-32

14.5.1 02 Multi Folder (Punch) Adj. \ 01 Paper Width Adjustment ....... 14-32

14.5.2 02 Multi Folder (Punch) Adj. \ 02 Hole-Punch Vertical Pos. ...... 14-35

14.5.3 03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj. \ 01 Half Fold Position Adj. .............. 14-38

14.5.4 03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj. \ 02 Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj................... 14-40

14.5.5 03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj. \ 03 Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj. ............... 14-43

14.5.6 03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj. \ 04 Double Parallel Pos. Adj. .......... 14-46

14.5.7 03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj. \ 05 Z-Fold Position Adj. .................. 14-49

14.5.8 03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj. \ 06 Gate Fold Position Adj.............. 14-52

14.6 04 Finisher Adjustment (LS-501) ................................................. 14-55

14.6.1 05 Stacker Adjustment \ 01 Paper Width Adjustment ............... 14-55

14.6.2 05 Stacker Adjustment \ 02 Paper Length Adjustment ............. 14-57

14.7 04 Finisher Adjustment (SD-501)................................................. 14-5914.7.1 06 Saddle Stitcher Adj. \ 01 Staple Center Adj.......................... 14-59

14.7.2 06 Saddle Stitcher Adj. \ 02 Staple Paper Width Adj................. 14-62

14.7.3 06 Saddle Stitcher Adj. \ 03 Staple Pitch Adjustment ............... 14-65

14.7.4 06 Saddle Stitcher Adj. \ 04 Half Fold Position Adj. .................. 14-68

14.7.5 06 Saddle Stitcher Adj. \ 05 Tri-Fold Position Adj. .................... 14-70

14.7.6 06 Saddle Stitcher Adj. \ 06 Fold Paper Width Adj. ................... 14-73






14.7.7 06 Saddle Stitcher Adj. \ 07 Trimming Adjustment .................... 14-75

14.7.8 06 Saddle Stitcher Adj. \ 08 Trimming Receiver Adj................... 14-77

14.8 04 Finisher Adjustment (RU-503/RU-504) ................................... 14-79

14.8.1 07 RU Adjustment \ 01 Curl Reform Direction............................ 14-79

14.9 Finisher Adjustment (FS-607) ....................................................... 14-81

14.9.1 01 Saddle Stitcher Stopper Adj. ................................................. 14-81

14.9.2 02 Half Fold Stopper Adjustment ............................................... 14-84

14.9.3 03 Punch Adjustment \ 01 Vertical Position Adj. ........................ 14-86

14.9.4 03 Punch Adjustment \ 02 Horizontcal Position Adj................... 14-88

14.9.5 03 Punch Adjustment \ 03 Registration Adjustment................... 14-91

14.9.6 03 Punch Adjustment \ 04 Paper Edge Detect Sensor Adj. ....... 14-94

14.9.7 04 Tri-Fold Adjustment ............................................................... 14-95

14.9.8 05 2 Position Staple Pitch Adjustment ....................................... 14-9814.9.9 06 Paper Inserter Tray Size Adj. ............................................... 14-100

14.9.10 07 Output Quantity Limit........................................................... 14-102

15 Utility screen outlines

15.1 Chart of setting items on Utility screen......................................... 15-3

15.2 Function list of user setting.......................................................... 15-14

15.3 Function list of machine administrator setting........................... 15-21

16 User setting

16.1 User setting outlines ....................................................................... 16-3

16.2 01 System Setting............................................................................ 16-6

16.3 02 Initial Setting ............................................................................. 16-39

16.4 03 Common Setting....................................................................... 16-43

16.5 04 Copy Setting ............................................................................. 16-45

16.6 05 Scan Setting.............................................................................. 16-48

16.7 06 Printer Setting........................................................................... 16-50

16.8 07 Image Quality Setting............................................................... 16-55

16.9 08 Change Password .................................................................... 16-63






17 Machine administrator setting

17.1 Machine administrator setting outlines........................................ 17-3

17.2 01 System Setting........................................................................... 17-7

17.3 02 Administrator Register ............................................................ 17-78

17.4 03 Scanner Send Address............................................................ 17-8017.5 04 User Auth./Account Track ...................................................... 17-98

17.6 05 Network Setting..................................................................... 17-128

17.7 06 Common Setting.................................................................... 17-132

17.8 07 Copy Setting........................................................................... 17-134

17.9 08 Scan Setting........................................................................... 17-137

17.10 09 System Connection ............................................................... 17-139

17.11 10 Security Setting...................................................................... 17-141

18 Touch Screen adjustment

19 Web Utilities setting

19.1 Web Utilities outlines...................................................................... 19-3

19.2 Setting account track data ............................................................ 19-5

19.2.1 Adding account track................................................................... 19-5

19.2.2 Editing account track data......................................................... 19-10

19.3 Remote panel setting ................................................................... 19-2119.4 Setting scan transmission function ............................................ 19-24

19.5 Transmitting machine setting file................................................ 19-30

20 Security functions

20.1 Security modes............................................................................... 20-4

21 Security strengthen mode

21.1 Description of security strengthen mode..................................... 21-321.2 Data protected by security strengthen mode.............................. 21-4






22 Machine administrator security functions

22.1 Turn security strengthen mode on/off........................................... 22-4

22.2 HDD lock password ........................................................................ 22-8

22.3 Print audit log................................................................................. 22-12

22.4 Analyze audit log ........................................................................... 22-1522.5 Table of items saved in audit log ................................................. 22-17

23 Troubleshooting

23.1 If “Please Call Service C-####” message is displayed ................ 23-3

23.2 Clearing mishandled paper ............................................................ 23-6

23.3 If [MACHINE] tab blinks in orange ................................................. 23-9

23.4 If “Memory Full” message is displayed: Memory overflow ....... 23-13

23.5 If Power off/on screen is displayed ............................................. 23-1523.6 Troubleshooting tips ..................................................................... 23-16

24 Maintenance

24.1 Cleaning the machine ..................................................................... 24-3

24.2 Checking copy count ...................................................................... 24-6

24.3 Cleaning conveyance belt of saddle stitcher tray ........................ 24-9

24.4 If “Trim receiver exchange” message is displayed.................... 24-12

24.5 Preventive maintenance ............................................................... 24-13

25 Specifications

25.1 Main body specifications................................................................ 25-3

25.2 Option specifications ...................................................................... 25-5

26 Appendix

26.1 How to input characters ................................................................. 26-3

26.2 Index ................................................................................................. 26-5






1Introduction/Safety

information






Introduction/Safety information 1

bizhub PRO C6500 / bizhub PRO C6500e 1-3


Thank you for choosing this machine.

This manual contains details on the operation of the various functions of themachine, precautions on its use, and basic troubleshooting procedures. Inorder to ensure that this machine is used correctly and efficiently, carefullyread this manual before using the machine. After reading the manual, store

it in the designated holder so that it can easily be referred to when questionsor problems arise during operation.

The illustrations used in this manual may appear slightly different from views

of the actual equipment.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS:

- KONICA MINOLTA, KONICA MINOLTA Logo, and The essentials ofimaging are registered trademarks or trademarks of KONICA MINOLTAHOLDINGS, INC.

- bizhub is registered trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESSTECHNOLOGIES, Inc.

- Microsoft, MS, Windows and MS-DOS are registered trademarks ortrademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and / or othercountries.

- IBM is a registered trademarks of the IBM Corporation.

- Macintosh and PowerMac are registered trademarks or trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. in the United States and / or other countries.

- Adobe, Adobe Logo, Acrobat, Acrobat Logo, PostScript and PostScriptLogo are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems, Inc.

- RC4® is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. in theUnited States and/or other countries.

- Other company names and product names used in this manual are theregistered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies.

Copyright © 2006 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, Inc.

Copyright © 2006 GoAhead Software, Inc. All rights reserved.







1-4 bizhub PRO C6500 / bizhub PRO C6500e

EXEMPTION

- No part of this manual may be used or duplicated without permission.- Manufacturer and Sales Company will have no liability for any influences

caused by using the printing system and this user manual.

- The information written in this user manual is subject to change withoutprior notice.








1.1 Energy Star®

The ENERGY STAR® Program has been established to encourage thewidespread and voluntary use of energy efficient technologies that reduce

energy consumption and prevent pollution.

As an ENERGY STAR Partner, we have determined that this product meetsthe ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency, based on the followingfeatures.








1.2 License

For Information on Incorporated Softwares

The softwares installed in this product comprise various independentsoftware modules and components. Each software module or component is

copyrighted by the author, i.e. the one we wrote will be copywrited by us, andothers will also be copywrited by each author.

This product uses some free softwares as a part of software components.

The following is information on the end user license agreement provided tothe software components included in this product.

Using TimeSys Linux

As an operating system, this machine uses TimeSys Linux 4.0 distributed byTimeSys Corporation in the Unite States. For details of the OS, please

contact directly to TimeSys Corporation or their sales representative.http://www.timesys.com/

About License Granted to Each Software Component

The GPL, LGPL, or OpenSSL license is granted to some of the softwarecomponents included in this product. Grateful acknowledgements are due to

the authors of those softwares, and to members of the community beingengaged in data management and other activities concerning the softwares.

The GPL/LGPL is, as mentioned below, designed to guarantee (or even

responsible for) the users that they can receive the source code wheneverthey want. For details, please refer to our homepage.

http://konicaminolta.com/opensource/

As for our software components, we hope you understand that the sourcecode cannot be provided because they need not be open.

Here is a copy of the original text of the GPL, LGPL, and Open SSL licencegranted to the software components included in this product.








GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE (Version 2, June 1991)

Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA

Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this licensedocument, but changing it is not allowed.

Preamble

The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom toshare and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is

intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--tomake sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public Licenseapplies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any otherprogram whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free SoftwareFoundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public Licenseinstead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.

When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. OurGeneral Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have thefreedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service ifyou wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that youcan change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that

you know you can do these things.

To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone todeny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.

These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute

copies of the software, or if you modify it.For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or fora fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must

make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you mustshow them these terms so they know their rights.

We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer

you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/ormodify the software.

Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that

everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If thesoftware is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients

to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problemsintroduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations.

Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. Wewish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individuallyobtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent

this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone'sfree use or not licensed at all.








The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modificationfollow.

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND

MODIFICATION

0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a noticeplaced by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the termsof this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to any suchprogram or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the

Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a workcontaining the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or withmodifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter,translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) Eachlicensee is addressed as "you".

Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered

by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program isnot restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contentsconstitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been madeby running the Program).Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.

1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's sourcecode as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuouslyand appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice

and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to thisLicense and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients

of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program.You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and youmay at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.

2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it,thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such

modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided thatyou also meet all of these conditions:a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices statingthat you changed the files and the date of any change.

b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole

or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, tobe licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms ofthis License.

c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively whenrun, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use inthe most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including anappropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or

else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute








the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view acopy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive butdoes not normally print such an announcement, your work based on theProgram is not required to print an announcement.)

These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable

sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can bereasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves,then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you

distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the samesections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, thedistribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whosepermissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus toeach and every part regardless of who wrote it.Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest yourrights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the

right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based onthe Program.In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Programwith the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume ofa storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under thescope of this License.

3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under

Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readablesource code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1

and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,

b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give

any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physicallyperforming source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of thecorresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms ofSections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for softwareinterchange; or,

c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to

distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only fornoncommercial distribution and only if you received the program inobject code or executable form with such an offer, in accord withSubsection b above.)

The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for

making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete sourcecode means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus anyassociated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control








compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a specialexception, the source code distributed need not include anything that isnormally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the majorcomponents (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system onwhich the executable runs, unless that component itself accompaniesthe executable.

If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access tocopy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copythe source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source

code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the sourcealong with the object code.

4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program exceptas expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy,modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and willautomatically terminate your rights under this License. However, partieswho have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not

have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in fullcompliance.

5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it.However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute theProgram or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law ifyou do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributingthe Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your

acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions forcopying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.

6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the

Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the originallicensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these termsand conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on therecipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this

License.

7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patentinfringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement orotherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do notexcuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute

so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License andany other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may notdistribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would notpermit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receivecopies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you couldsatisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely fromdistribution of the Program.








If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under anyparticular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to applyand the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.

It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patentsor other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims;

this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the freesoftware distribution system, which is implemented by public licensepractices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide

range of software distributed through that system in reliance onconsistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor todecide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any othersystem and a licensee cannot impose that choice.

This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to bea consequence of the rest of this License.

8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certaincountries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the originalcopyright holder who places the Program under this License may add anexplicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, sothat distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thusexcluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as ifwritten in the body of this License.

9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versionsof the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions willbe similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail toaddress new problems or concerns.

Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Programspecifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "anylater version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions

either of that version or of any later version published by the FreeSoftware Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version numberof this License, you may choose any version ever published by the FreeSoftware Foundation.

10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programswhose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for

permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free SoftwareFoundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes makeexceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals ofpreserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and ofpromoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.

NO WARRANTY








11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE ISNO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY

APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITINGTHE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THEPROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHEREXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR APARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY ANDPERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE

PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALLNECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.

12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREEDTO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHERPARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM

AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE ORINABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TOLOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE ORLOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OFTHE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVENIF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THEPOSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS








GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE (Version 2.1, February 1999)

Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA

Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this licensedocument, but changing it is not allowed.

[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as thesuccessor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the versionnumber 2.1.]

Preamble

The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to

share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses areintended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--tomake sure the software is free for all its users.

This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially

designated software packages--typically libraries--of the Free SoftwareFoundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, butwe suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinaryGeneral Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case,based on the explanations below.

When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, notprice. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you havethe freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this serviceif you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that youcan change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that

you are informed that you can do these things.To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributorsto deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. Theserestrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copiesof the library or if you modify it.

For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee,you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must makesure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other codewith the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, sothat they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library

and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know theirrights.

We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library,and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy,distribute and/or modify the library.








To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is nowarranty for the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone elseand passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not theoriginal version, so that the original author's reputation will not be affectedby problems that might be introduced by others.

Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free

program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrictthe users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patentholder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version ofthe library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in thislicense.

Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinaryGNU General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General PublicLicense, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from theordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries inorder to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs.

When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a sharedlibrary, the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, aderivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public Licensetherefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria offreedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria forlinking other code with the library.

We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it doesLess to protect the user's freedom than the ordinary General Public License.It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over

competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we usethe ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser

license provides advantages in certain special circumstances.

For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encouragethe widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-factostandard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use thelibrary. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widelyused non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the freelibrary to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.

In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs

enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software. Forexample, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enablesmany more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as itsvariant, the GNU/Linux operating system.

Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users'

freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with theLibrary has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using amodified version of the Library.








The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modificationfollow. Pay close attention to the difference between a "work based on thelibrary" and a "work that uses the library". The former contains code derivedfrom the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in orderto run.

GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION ANDMODIFICATION

0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program

which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorizedparty saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser GeneralPublic License (also called "this License"). Each licensee is addressed as"you".

A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared soas to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of

those functions and data) to form executables.The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which hasbeen distributed under these terms. A "work based on the Library" meanseither the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, awork containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or withmodifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language.(Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term

"modification".)"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for makingmodifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the sourcecode for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files,plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library.

Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not coveredby this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a programusing the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered

only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of theuse of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on whatthe Library does and what the program that uses the Library does.

1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's completesource code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that youconspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate

copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the noticesthat refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; anddistribute a copy of this License along with the Library.

You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and youmay at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.








2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it,thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute suchmodifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided thatyou also meet all of these conditions:

a) The modified work must itself be a software library.

b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices statingthat you changed the files and the date of any change.

c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge toall third parties under the terms of this License.

d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of datato be supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other thanas an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make

a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does notsupply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performswhatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.

(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has apurpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the application.

Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied functionor table used by this function must be optional: if the application does notsupply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.)

These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable

sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can bereasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves,then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you

distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the samesections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, thedistribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whosepermissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus toeach and every part regardless of who wrote it.

Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your

rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise theright to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based onthe Library.

In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Librarywith the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a

storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under thescope of this License.








3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General PublicLicense instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this,you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they referto the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to thisLicense. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU GeneralPublic License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if

you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices.

Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy,

so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequentcopies and derivative works made from that copy.

This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Libraryinto a program that is not a library.

4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it,under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of

Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with thecomplete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must bedistributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a mediumcustomarily used for software interchange.

If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from adesignated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source

code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute thesource code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy thesource along with the object code.

5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but isdesigned to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, iscalled a "work that uses the Library". Such a work, in isolation, is not aderivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of thisLicense.

However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library createsan executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it containsportions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". Theexecutable is therefore covered by this License.

Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.

When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file thatis part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivativework of the Library even though the source code is not.

Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked

without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for thisto be true is not precisely defined by law.








If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structurelayouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (tenlines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted,regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executablescontaining this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under

Section 6.)

Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the

object code for the work under the terms of Section 6.

Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whetheror not they are linked directly with the Library itself.

6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a"work that uses the Library" with the Library to produce a work containingportions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your

choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for thecustomer's own use and reverse engineering for debugging suchmodifications.

You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that theLibrary is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by thisLicense. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during

execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyrightnotice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing theuser to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things:a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-

readable source code for the Library including whatever changes wereused in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the

complete machine-readable "work that uses the Library", as object codeand/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and thenrelink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library.(It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitionsfiles in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the applicationto use the modified definitions.)

b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. Asuitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the libraryalready present on the user's computer system, rather than copyinglibrary functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with amodified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as themodified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work

was made with.








c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years,to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, fora charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution.

d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from adesignated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified

materials from the same place.

e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or

that you have already sent this user a copy.

For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library"must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing theexecutable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to bedistributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in eithersource or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and

so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless thatcomponent itself accompanies the executable.

It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions ofother proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operatingsystem. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the

Library together in an executable that you distribute.

7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library facilities not coveredby this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that theseparate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other

library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do thesetwo things:

a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work basedon the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must bedistributed under the terms of the Sections above.

b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part ofit is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the

accompanying uncombined form of the same work.

8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Libraryexcept as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwiseto copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, andwill automatically terminate your rights under this License. However,parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this Licensewill not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain infull compliance.








9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it.However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute theLibrary or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if youdo not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing theLibrary (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptanceof this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying,

distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it.10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library),

the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to

copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms andconditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients'exercise of the rights granted herein.

You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties withthis License.

11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent

infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement orotherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do notexcuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distributeso as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License andany other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may notdistribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not

permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receivecopies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you couldsatisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely fromdistribution of the Library.

If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under anyparticular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply,and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.

It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patentsor other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims;this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the freesoftware distribution system which is implemented by public license

practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide

range of software distributed through that system in reliance onconsistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor todecide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any othersystem and a licensee cannot impose that choice.

This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to bea consequence of the rest of this License.








12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certaincountries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the originalcopyright holder who places the Library under this License may add anexplicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, sothat distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thusexcluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if

written in the body of this License.13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions

of the Lesser General Public License from time to time.

Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but maydiffer in detail to address new problems or concerns.

Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Libraryspecifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "anylater version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions

either of that version or of any later version published by the FreeSoftware Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license versionnumber, you may choose any version ever published by the FreeSoftware Foundation.

14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programswhose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to theauthor to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the

Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; wesometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by thetwo goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our freesoftware and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.

NO WARRANTY

15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE ISNO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY

APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITINGTHE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THELIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHEREXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THEIMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR APARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND

PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THELIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALLNECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.








16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREEDTO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHERPARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY ASPERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING

ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIALDAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE

LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATABEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU ORTHIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH

ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTYHAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS








How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries

If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possibleuse to the public, we recommend making it free software that everyone canredistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution underthese terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General PublicLicense).

To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safestto attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey theexclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" lineand a pointer to where the full notice is found.

<one line to give the library's name and a brief idea of what it does.>Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>

This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under theterms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free

Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any

later version.

This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY

WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY orFITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser GeneralPublic License for more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public Licensealong with this library; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59

Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA

Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.

You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your

school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the library, if necessary.Here is a sample; alter the names:

Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library `Frob' (alibrary for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker.

<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990

Ty Coon, President of Vice

That's all there is to it!








License issues

The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions ofthe OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit.

See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-styleOpen Source licenses. In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL

please contact [email protected].

OpenSSL Statement

OpenSSL License

Copyright © 1998-2000 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or withoutmodification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyrightnotice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in thedocumentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software mustdisplay the following acknowledgment:"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project foruse in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"

4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used

to endorse or promote products derived from this software without priorwritten permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-

[email protected]. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor

may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permissionof the OpenSSL Project.

6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the followingacknowledgment:

"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project foruse in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY ANDFITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENTSHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR

ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, ORCONSEQENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED

AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICTLIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING








IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OFTHE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young([email protected]). This product includes software written by TimHudson ([email protected]).

Original SSLeay License

Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]) All rights reserved.This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young([email protected]).

The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as thefollowing conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to allcode found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, Ihash, DES, etc., code;not just the SSL code.The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the

same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson([email protected]).Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in thecode are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Youngshould be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. Thiscan be in the form of a textual message at program startup or indocumentation (online or textual) provided with the package.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or withoutmodification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list

of conditions and the following disclaimer.2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright

notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in thedocumentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software mustdisplay the following acknowledgement:

"This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young([email protected])"The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the librarybeing used are not cryptographic related.

4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) fromthe apps directory (application code) you must include an

acknowledgement:"This product includes software written by Tin Hudson([email protected])"








THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANYEXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR APARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE

AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTEGOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESSINTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF

LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUTOF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITYOF SUCH DAMAGE.

The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or

derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply becopied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public

Licence.]








1.3 Available features

Auto low power

Automatically lowers the power after a specified period of copier inactivity

Auto paper select Automatically selects copy paper size to match the original documents.

Auto reset

Automatically resets to the default settings after a specified period of copierinactivity.

Automatic shut-off

Automatically shuts off the power after a specified period of copier inactivity.

Auto zoom

Automatically selects an appropriate magnification ratio when paper size isselected manually. Automatically selected when [Auto Zoom] is touched.

Book copy

Copies both pages of an open book or book-size sheet separately onto twoletter sheets in 1-1 mode or separately onto each side of one letter sheet in1-2 mode. You can use the Book Copy mode with the Front or Front/Backcover mode. The cover page(s) will be scanned and copied normally before

image division is performed on the other pages.

Booklet pagination

Creates a multiple page signature booklet copied on both sides of paper in1-2 or 2-2 copy mode.

Chapters

Starts chapter pages on the right side (front pages) of the finished document.Only duplex mode (1-2) is compatible with this feature.

Color mode

Copies full-colored originals or makes single-colored copies, and alsoadjusts image quality of the copies.

Combine originals

Copies a fixed number (2, 4, or 8) of pages onto one sheet of copy paper tocreate a draft copy of a multi-page report at the same time as saving paper.








Copy density

Manually selects up to 9 density levels.

Custom size in original setting

Identifies the special original size which the machine cannot detect, in order

to select the optimal paper size for copying or printing.

Frame center erase

Erases border and/or fold image area using Frame (1 - 300 mm), Center (1 -99 mm), or Frame & Center.

Image centering

The original image on the original glass or in the document feeder is copiedand centered on a sheet.

Image overlay

Scans an original image and overlays it on the pages of another document.For example, you may want to incorporate a page heading, graphic designor logo into the pages of your document.

Image repeat

Selects the horizontal image area across the page, and repeats it down thepage as many times as the repeat width setting (10 ~ 150mm) permits inmanual or auto.

Insert image

Stores pages in memory from the original glass, and inserts the pages into adocument copied from the document feeder.

Insert sheet

Insert up to 26 blank or copied sheets from any tray, or inserts blank orcopied front and back covers from any tray to enhance the presentation of

multi-page documents.

Interrupt copying

Interrupts copying-in-progress to perform an urgent copy, using any of thecopier features for the interrupt job.








Job list

Displays the Job List screen to view the current machine status, changes theoperation order of reserve jobs, deletes the unused reserve job, or displays

the previous job list.

Manual shut-off

Shuts off the machine’ power when pressing [Power Save] on the controlpanel.

Mixed in original setting

Copies mixed size originals from the document feeder in Auto Paper Selector Auto Zoom mode. Auto Paper Select automatically selects the paper sizeof each original. Auto Zoom mode allows you to select one paper size for all

originals.

Mode memory

Programs up to 30 jobs and recalls each job by job number, as needed. Allcompatible original glass functions can be programmed into Mode Memorydirectly after they are selected.

Multi-page enlargement

Makes an enlarged copy of an original by dividing to several page.

Neg./ pos. reverse

Reverses the image from black-on-white to white-on-black or vice versa.

Non-image area erase

When copying from the original glass when the document cover is open,copies only the image area and not the exposed area of glass, which wouldotherwise copy as black.

Output for Finisher FS-607 with Paper Inserter PI-502

Cover sheet feeding

Off Line Finisher mode

Output for machine with finisher FS-503 installed

Non-Sort, Collate, Uncollate, and Staple modes using the primary (main) trayCollated and Uncollate modes using the secondary (sub) traySelects an output tray and output mode on the Output Application screen.








Output for machine with Finisher FS-607 installed

Non-Sort, Collate, Uncollate, and Staple modes using the primary (main) trayCollated and Uncollate modes using the secondary (sub) tray

Selects an output tray and output mode on the Output Application screen.

Output for machine with large capacity stacker LS-501 installed

Non-Sort, Collate, and Uncollate modes using the stackerCollated and Uncollate modes using the stacker secondary (sub) traySelects an output tray and output mode on the Output Application screen.

Output for FS-503 finisher with folding unit FD-501 installed

PunchFolding (Z-fold, Tri Fold-in, Tri Fold-out, Double Parallel, Gate, Folding)

Cover sheet feeding

Output for machine with SD-501 saddle stitcher installed

Fold & Staple, TrimmingFolding (Multi Half Fold, Multi Tri-Fold)

Page margin

Creates or removes a binding margin at the top, bottom, right and left edges(shift amount from 0 ~ 250mm, in 1mm increments); reduces image to

prevent image loss (reduce & shift amount from 0 ~ 250mm, in 1mmincrements).

Program overlay

Same as for Image Overlay except the overlay image is stored in memory.

Power save

Automatically turns off all but nominal power supply after a specified periodof copier inactivity, for optimal efficiency. Power is returned after a briefwarm up period by pressing [Power Save] on the control panel.

Program job

Scans documents into memory while designating different copy conditionsfor each original, then prints all the documents collectively.

Proof copy

To ensure correct output before running multiple copies, run a proof copy bypressing [Proof Copy] on the control panel or touching Proof Copy on theCheck screen.








Reserve

Scans in subsequent copy jobs while the machine is busy printing orcopying.

Rotation

Rotates the image before copying when the portrait/landscape orientation ofthe original is different from the orientation of the copy paper.

Separate scan mode

Scans documents into memory from the original glass and/or the documentfeeder and inserts the pages into another document copied from thedocument feeder. If an incompatible function is selected in this mode, thelatter function will not be selected, and an Error message will be displayed.

Simplex/Duplex

Selects the desired simplex mode (1-1 or 2-1); or duplex mode (1-2 or 2-2).

Stamp

Prints watermark, regular stamp, date/time, page number, and numberingonto the output copies to enhance the presentation and usefulness of thecopies.

Staple

Selects the stapling position and number of staples.

Tab paper

Copies onto tabbed sheets from tabbed originals, allowing the image on thetab part of the original to be printed on the same part of the tabbed copypaper.

Weekly timer

Can be set according to the needs of each work environment. Turns main

body power Off/On daily or weekly, during lunch time, on holidays, and also

enables the Timer Interrupt mode, which allows temporary use of themachine even when the machine is in the daily, weekly, or holiday Off mode.

Z-folded in original setting

This feature sets the ADF to accept Z-folded originals.








Zoom

Selects fixed ratios, four reduction, four enlargement, and three user-setratios. Zoom ratios can be selected from 25% ~ 400% in 0.1% increments.








1.4 Explanation of manual conventions

The marks and text formats used in this manual are described below.

Safety advices

6 DANGERFailure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result infatal or critical injuries in fact of electrical power.% Observe all dangers in order to prevent injuries.

7 WARNINGFailure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in

serious injuries or property damage.% Observe all warnings in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use

of the machine.

7 CAUTIONFailure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result inslight injuries or property damage.% Observe all cautions in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use

of the machine.

Sequence of action

1 The number 1 as formatted hereindicates the first step of a sequence

of actions.

2 Subsequent numbers as formatted

here indicate subsequent steps of asequence of actions.

? Text formatted in this styleprovides additional assistance.

% Text formatted in this style describes the action that will ensure thedesired results are achieved.

An illustration insertedhere shows what operations

must be performed.








Tips

2

NoteText highlighted in this manner contains useful information and tips to

ensure safe use of the machine.

2

ReminderText highlighted in this manner contains information that should be

reminded.

!Detail

Text highlighted in this manner contains references for more detailedinformation.

Special text markings

[Stop] keyThe names of keys on the control panel are written as shown above.

MACHINE SETTINGDisplay texts are written as shown above.








1.5 Legal restrictions on copying

Certain types of original must never be copied with the purpose or intent topass copies of such documents off as the originals.

The following is not a complete list, but is meant to be used as a guide to

responsible copying.

Financial instruments

- Personal checks- Traveler’s checks

- Money orders

- Certificates of deposit- Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness

- Stock certificates

Legal documents

- Food stamps

- Postage stamps (canceled or uncanceled)- Checks or drafts drawn by government agencies

- Internal revenue stamps (canceled or uncanceled)

- Passports- Immigration papers

- Motor vehicle licenses and titles.

- House and property titles and deeds

General

- Identification cards, badges, or insignias- Copyrighted works without permission of the copyright owner

In addition, it is prohibited under any circumstances to copy domestic orforeign currencies, or works of art without permission of the copyright owner.

When in doubt about the nature of a document, consult with legal counsel.

This machine provides the section management function to forbid the useroperating the machine without entering a pre-established password, in orderto prevent any misapplication of the machine.

Also, this section management function can limit the machine operationdepending on the section, using the setting to permit/prohibit copying,printing, or scanning.

This machine also provides the forgery prevention function in order toprevent financial instruments from being copied illegally.

We appreciate your understanding that the copied image may have somenoise due to this forgery prevention function.








1.6 For EU member states only

This symbol means: Do not dispose of thisproduct together with your householdwaste!

Please refer to the information of your local

community or contact our dealersregarding the proper handling of end-of-life electric and electronic equipment.Recycling of this product will help toconserve natural resources and prevent potential negative consequences forthe environment and human health caused by inappropriate waste handling.








1.7 Safety information

This section contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenanceof this machine. To achieve optimum utility of this device, all operatorsshould carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual.

Please read the following section before connecting the machine to the

supply. It contains important information related to user safety andpreventing equipment problems.

Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.

Make sure you observe all of the precautions appear in each section of thismanual.

2

NoteSome parts of the contents of this section may not correspond with the

purchased product.

Warning and precaution symbols

The following indicators are used on the warning labels or in this manual tocategorize the level of safety warnings.

7 WARNINGIgnoring this warnings could cause serious injury or even death.

% Do not ignore this safety advices.

7 CAUTIONIgnoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property.% Do not ignore this safety advices.






1

Introduction/Safety information


Meaning of symbols

Disassemble and modification

7 WARNINGIgnoring this warnings could cause serious injury or even death.% Do not ignore this safety advices.

Symbol Meaning Example Meaning

A triangle indicates a dangeragainst which you should takeprecaution.

This symbol warns against pos-sible causes of burns.

A diagonal line indicates a pro-hibited course of action.

This symbol warns against dis-mantling the device.

A black circle indicates an im-perative course of action.

This symbol indicates you mustunplug the device.

Warning Symbol

• Do not attempt to remove the covers and panels which havebeen fixed to the product. Some products have a high-volt-age part or a laser beam source inside that could cause anelectrical shock or blindness.

• Do not modify this product, as a fire, electrical shock, orbreakdown could result. If the product employs a laser, thelaser beam source could cause blindness.








Power cord



Warning Symbol

• Use only the power cord supplied in the package. If a powercord is not supplied, only use the power cord and plug thatis specified in POWER CORD INSTRUCTION. Failure to usethis cord could result in a fire or electrical shock.

• Use the power cord supplied in the package only for this ma-chine and NEVER use it for any other product. Failure to ob-serve this precaution could result in a fire or electrical shock.

• Do not scratch, abrade, place a heavy object on, heat, twist,bend, pull on, or damage the power cord. Use of a damagedpower cord (exposed core wire, broken wire, etc.) could re-sult in a fire or breakdown.Should any of these conditions be found, immediately turnOFF the power switch, unplug the power cord from the pow-er outlet, and then call your authorized service representa-tive.








Power source




Warning Symbol

• Use only the specified power source voltage. Failure to dothat could result in a fire or electrical shock.

• Connect power plug directly into wall outlet having the sameconfiguration as the plug. Use of an adapter leads to theproduct connecting to inadequate power supply (voltage,current capacity, grounding), and may result in fire or shock.

If proper wall outlet is not available, the customer shall askqualified electrician for the installation.

• Do not use a multiple outlet adapter nor an extension cord inprinciple. Use of an adapter or an extension cord could causea fire or electrical shock.Contact your authorized service representative if an exten-sion cord is required.

• Consult your authorized service representative before con-necting other equipment on the same wall outlet. Overloadcould result in a fire.

Caution Symbol

• The outlet must be near the equipment and easily accessible.Otherwise you can not pull out the power plug when an emer-gency occurs.








Power plug




Grounding


Warning Symbol

• Do not unplug and plug in the power cord with a wet hand,as an electrical shock could result.

• Plug the power cord all the way into the power outlet. Failureto do this could result in a fire or electrical shock.

Caution Symbol

• Do not tug the power cord when unplugging. Pulling on thepower cord could damage the cord, resulting in a fire or elec-trical shock.

• Remove the power plug from the outlet more than one time ayear and clean the area between the plug terminals. Dust thataccumulates between the plug terminals may cause a fire.

Warning Symbol

• Connect the power cord to an electrical outlet that isequipped with a grounding terminal.








Installation




Warning Symbol

• Do not place a flower vase or other container that containswater, or metal clips or other small metallic objects on thisproduct. Spilled water or metallic objects dropped inside theproduct could result in a fire, electrical shock, or breakdown.Should a piece of metal, water, or any other similar foreignmatter get inside the product, immediately turn OFF the pow-er switch, unplug the power cord from the power outlet, andthen call your authorized service representative.

Caution Symbol

• After installing this product, mount it on a secure base. If theunit moves or falls, it may cause personal injury.

• Do not place the product in a dusty place, or a site exposedto soot or steam, near a kitchen table, bath, or a humidifier. A fire, electrical shock, or breakdown could result.

• Do not place this product on an unstable or tilted bench, orin a location subject to a lot of vibration and shock. It coulddrop or fall, causing personal injury or mechanical break-down.

• Do not let any object plug the ventilation holes of this prod-uct. Heat could accumulate inside the product, resulting in afire or malfunction.

• Do not use flammable sprays, liquids, or gases near thisproduct, as a fire could result.








Ventilation

7 CAUTIONIgnoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property.


Actions in response to troubles


Caution Symbol

• Always use this product in a well ventilated location. Operat-ing the product in a poorly ventilated room for an extendedperiod of time could injure your health. Ventilate the room atregular intervals.

Warning Symbol

• Do not keep using this product, if this product becomes inor-dinately hot or emits smoke, or unusual odor or noise. Imme-

diately turn OFF the power switch, unplug the power cordfrom the power outlet, and then call your authorized servicerepresentative. If you keep on using it as is, a fire or electricalshock could result.

• Do not keep using this product, if this product has beendropped or its cover damaged. Immediately turn OFF thepower switch, unplug the power cord from the power outlet,and then call your authorized service representative. If youkeep on using it as is, a fire or electrical shock could result.









Consumables



Caution Symbol

• The inside of this product has areas subject to high temper-ature, which may cause burns.When checking the inside of the unit for malfunctions such asa paper misfeed, do not touch the locations (around the fus-ing unit, etc.) which are indicated by a "Caution HOT" cautionlabel.

Warning Symbol

• Do not throw the toner cartridge or toner into an open flame.The hot toner may scatter and cause burns or other damage.

Caution Symbol

• Do not leave a toner unit or drum unit in a place within easyreach of children. Licking or ingesting any of these thingscould injure your health.

• Do not store toner units and PC drum units near a floppy diskor watch that are susceptible to magnetism. They couldcause these products to malfunction.








When moving the machine

7 CAUTIONIgnoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property.


Before successive holidays


Caution Symbol

• Whenever moving this product, be sure to disconnect thepower cord and other cables. Failure to do this could damagethe cord or cable, resulting in a fire, electrical shock, orbreakdown.

• When moving this product, always hold it by the locationsspecified in the user manual or other documents. If the unitfalls it may cause severe personal injury. The product mayalso be damaged or malfunction.

Caution Symbol

• Unplug the product when you will not use the product forlong periods of time.








1.8 Regulation notices

CE Marking (Declaration of Conformity) for Users of the European Union

(EU)

This product complies with the following EU directives:

89/336/EEC, 73/23/EEC and 93/68/EEC directives.This declaration is valid for the area of the European Union.

This device must be used with a shielded network (10 Base-T/100 Base-TX)cable and a shielded parallel cable. The use of non-shielded cables is likelyto result in interference with radio communications and is prohibited under

CISPR rules and local rules.

USER INSTRUCTIONS FCC PART 15 - RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICES

(For U.S.A. Users)

NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limitsfor a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmfulinterference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and,if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, maycause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this

equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in whichcase the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

7 WARNINGThe design and production of this unit conform to FCC regulations, andany changes or modifications must be registered with the FCC and aresubject to FCC control.

Any changes made by the purchaser or user without first contacting themanufacturer will be subject to penalty under FCC regulations.

% This device must be used with a shielded network (10 Base-T/100Base-TX) cable and a shielded parallel cable. The use of non-shieldedcables is likely to result in interference with radio communications and

is prohibited under FCC rules.








INTERFERENCE-CAUSING EQUIPMENT STANDARD (ICES-003

ISSUE 4) (For Canada Users)

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du

Canada.

For users in countries not subject to Class B regulations

7 WARNINGInterference with radio communications:% This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may

cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to takeadequate measures.

% This device must be used with a shielded network (10 Base-T/100Base-TX) cable and a shielded parallel cable. The use of non-shieldedcables is likely to result in interference with radio communications andis prohibited under CISPR rules and local rules.








1.9 Laser safety

This product employs a Class 3B laser diode having maximum power of15 mW and wavelength of 775 - 800 nm.This product is certified as a Class 1 laser product. Since the laser beam isconcealed by protective housings, the product does not emit hazardous

laser radiation as long as the product is operated according to theinstructions in this manual.

For Denmark users

7 ADVARSELUsynlig laserstråling ved åbning, når sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude affunktion.% Undgå udsættelse for sråling.

% Klasse 1 laser produkt der opfylder IEC 60825-1 sikkerheds kravene.Dansk: Dette er en halvlederlaser. Laserdiodens højeste styrke er15 mW og bølgelængden er 775- 800 nm.

Dette er en halvlederlaser. Laserdiodens højeste styrke er 15 mW ogbølgelængden er 775-800 nm.

For Norway users

7 ADVARSEL!Dette en halvleder laser.% Dersom apparatet brukes på annen måte enn spesifisert i denne

bruksanvisning, kan brukeren utsettes for unsynlig laserstråling somoverskrider grensen for laser klass 1.

Dette en halvleder laser. Maksimal effekt till laserdiode er 10 mW ogbølgelengde er 775-800 nm.








For Finland, Sweden users

LOUKAN 1 LASERLAITEKLASS 1 LASER APPARAT

7 VAROITUSTämä on puolijohdelaser.% Laitteen Käyttäminen muulla kuin tässä käyttöohjeessa mainitulla

tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävällenäkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.

Tämä on puolijohdelaser. Laserdiodin sunrin teho on 15 mW ja aallonpituuson 775-800 nm.

7 VARNINGDet här är en halvledarlaser.% Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i denna bruksanvisning

specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, somöverskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.

Det här är en halvledarlaser. Den maximala effekten för laserdioden är 15 mWoch våglängden är 775-800 nm.







1-50 bizhub PRO C6500 / bizhub PRO C6500eloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine







1.10 Ozone release

7 CAUTIONLocate the Machine in a Well Ventilated Room

% A negligible amount of ozone is generated during normal operation ofthis machine. An unpleasant odor may, however, be created in poorlyventilated rooms during extensive machine operations. For acomfortable, healthy, and safe operating environment, it isrecommended that the room well ventilated.

7 ATTENTIONUne quantité d’ozone négligable est dégagée pendant le

fonctionnement de l’appareil quand celui-ci est utilisé normalement.Cependant, une odeur désagréable peut être ressentie dans les pièces dontl’aération est insuffisante et lorsque une utilisation prolongée de l’appareilest effectuée. Pour avoir la certitude de travailler dans un environnementréunissant des conditions de confort, santé et de sécurité, il est préférable

de bien aérer la pièce ou se trouve l’appareil.

% Placer l’appareil dans une pièce largement ventilée.

1.11 Acoustic noise (For European users only)

Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung 3. GPSGV: Der höchsteSchalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB(A) oder weniger gemäss EN ISO 7779.








1.12 Caution notations and labels

Safety precaution notations and labels appear on this machine at thefollowing positions.

Be very careful that an accident does not occur when operations such as

removing paper misfeeds are performed.

The fixing unit isvery hot.To avoid getting

burned DO NOTTOUCH.

DO NOT put your hand betweenthe main body and developingfixing unit; otherwise you maybe injured.

CAUTION

CAUTION

CAUTION

CAUTION

DO NOT INSERT yourfinger into the two RADF

hinge portions; otherwise

you may be injured.

DO NOT put your hand betweenthe main body and developingfixing unit; otherwise you may beinjured.








DO NOT throw the toner

recovery box into a fire. If it

is thrown into a fire, the

toner may ignite and causea dangerous situation.

WARNING








2

ReminderDo not remove caution labels or notations. If any caution label or caution

notation is soiled, please clean to make legible. If you cannot make them

legible, or if the caution label or notation is damaged, please contact yourservice representative.

To avoid any unexpected

injury, DO NOT put your hand

into the holes (3 places) on

the bottom plate of the LU.

CAUTION

To avoid injury, DO NOT

put your hand on top of

the printed sheets.

Be sure to hold both

sides of the printed

sheets when removing

them, and DO NOT leaveyour hand on the printed

sheets while the primary

(main) tray goes up.

CAUTION

(Large Capacity Unit LU-202)

(Finisher FS-607)








1.13 Space requirements

To ensure that machine operation, consumables replenishing, partreplacement, and regular maintenance can easily be performed, adhere tothe recommended space requirements detailed below.To whole machine may weigh approx. 930kg at maximum, depending on the

combination of options. Be sure to choose a level and solid floor for theinstallation place. Combination size the main body and options may be

different for the installation environment.

unit: mm

main body + OC-506 + OT-502

main body + OC-506 + OT-502 (side view)

unit: mm








1021

1619

899950

293

1619

899

2142

1021

950 293

766

2142

unit: mm

unit: mm

main body + DF-609 + PF-601 (side-view)

main body + DF-609 + PF-601 + SD-501 (side-view)








175

760544

254

947

2997

1179

100

117

100

1619

1021

393

205

175

760400 947

2866

1231

100100

1619

1021

393

205

267

117

unit: mm

unit: mm

main body + DF-609 + PF-601 + RU-504 + FS-503

main body + DF-609 + PF-601 + RU-503 + FD-501








175

7601170 947

3252

46.4

100 100

1619

1021

393

205

175

760785 947

2867

1179

100 100

1619

1021

393

205

unit: mm

unit: mm

main body + DF-609 + PF-601 + RU-503 + SD-501

main body + DF-609 + PF-601 + RU-503 + LS-501








1619

175

760400544 947

3397

1021

393

1231

100100

205

254

117

unit: mm

main body + DF-609 + PF-601 + RU-504 + FD-501 + FS-503

main body + DF-609 + LU-202+ FS-607 + PI-502

main body + DF-609 + LU-202+ FS-607 + PI-502 (side-view)








2

ReminderBe sure to allow a clearance of 200 mm or more at the back of this

machine for the ventilation duct.








1.14 Operation precautions

To ensure the optimum performance of this machine, observe theprecautions described below.

Power source

The power source requirements are as follows.- Voltage: 230 V AC

- Frequency: 50 Hz

– Use a power source with as little voltage or frequency fluctuations aspossible.

Operating environment

The environmental requirements for correct operation of the machine are asfollows.

- Operating temperature: 10°C (50°F) to 30°C (86°F)

- Humidity: 10% to 80%

Storage of copies

To store copies, follow the recommendation listed below.- Copies that are to be kept for a long time should be stored where they

are not exposed to light or high temperature in order to prevent themfrom fading or sticking together.

- Adhesive that contains solvent (e.g., spray glue) may dissolve the toneron copies.






2Preparation for use






Preparation for use 2


2 Preparation for use

2.1 Machine configuration

External

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14








No. Name Description

1 ADF (Automatic DocumentFeeder) (option)

Automatically feeds multiple originals one at a time to theoriginal glass for copying.

2 Sub power switch Turns on/off the copying and scanning functions. Turningit off will terminate all the functions other than printing,

and then enter the sleep mode.

3 Original cover (option) Holds the original in position.

4 Touch panel Displays interactive operation screens. See page 5-3 fordetails.

5 Control panel Use to specify the various settings and perform opera-tions such as starting copying. See page 5-3 for details.

6 Work table Provides a convenient workspace for documents bothbefore and after copying.

7 Toner access door Opens to replenish the black toner and color toner.

8 Toner recovery box door Opens to replace the filled toner recovery box with new

one.

9 Multi-sheet bypass tray Opens to use copy paper of the other size or type thanthose loaded in the main body trays.Up to 250 sheets (80 g/m2 ) can be set.

10 Right side door Opens to allow removal of mishandled paper.

11 Tray 3 Holds 500 sheets of SRA3 w, SRA4 w / v, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 w, 12" e 18" w, 11" e 17" w,8.5" e 11" v, plain paper (80 g/m2 ).



14 Front door Opens to allow removal of mishandled paper.








Internal

7 CAUTIONThe internal fixing unit is very hot.% To avoid getting burned, DO NOT TOUCH.

12

3

4

5

6


1 Conveyance fixing unit Withdrawn for removal of mishandled paper. For handling

levers and knobs of this unit, follow the instruction on thescreen to be displayed when paper misfeed occurs.

2 Conveyance fixing unit lever Can be turned leftward to withdraw the conveyance fixingunit for removal of mishandled paper.

3 Fixing unit Fuses the toner onto the copy paper.

4 Main power switch Used only by service representative to turn machine pow-er on/off.

5 Total counter Indicates the total number of prints made.

6 Black print counter Indicates the total number of black prints made








Paper feeder unit PF-601

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

79

10

6

11









1 Tray 4 Hold 3,000 sheets of SRA3 w, SRA4 w / v, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 w, B6 w, 13" e 19" w, 12" e 18" w,11" e 17" w, 8.5" e 14" w, 8.5" e 11" w / v, plain paper(80g/m2 )

2 Tray 5 Hold 3,000 sheets of SRA3 w, SRA4 w / v, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w /v, B5 w / v, A5 w / v, B6 w, A6 w, 13" e 19" w,12" e 18" w, 11" e 17" w, 8.5" e 14" w, 8.5" e 11" w / v,plain paper (80 g/m2 )

3 Tray left side door Opens to allow removal of mishandled paper.

4 Paper feed roller Feeds one sheet of paper at a time into the main body.

5 Auxiliary paper guide Pulled out to load A5 w, B6 w, or A6 w paper. (A5 v and A6 w are acceptable in tray 5 only.)

6 Paper guide knobs Can be turned to move or fix the paper guide.

7 Size guides Indicate appropriate size for the paper to be loaded.

8 Front edge guide Fixes the rear end of copy paper.

9 Paper guide lock release le-ver

Pressed backward to slide the paper guides.

10 Paper guides Slide the adjustable paper guides against the side edgesof the copy paper.

11 Bottom plate lock releaseknob

Slide and turn to fix or release the bottom plate.








Finisher FS-503

1

2

3

6

5

4

8

7

9

10








Large capacity stacker LS-501

1

4 5

6

78

23

9

10

12

13

151617

14

11









1 Secondary (sub) tray Holds sets output in Non-sort mode.

2 Top cover handle (left) Opens to remove mishandled paper.

3 Top cover handle (right) Opens to remove mishandled paper.

4 Paper removal indicator Lights while the stacker goes down in order to allowtakeout of printed sheets.

5 Paper removal button Pressed to take out printed sheets from the stacker.

6 Large capacity stacker door Opens to take out printed sheets from the stacker.

7 Outlet cover lever Opens to remove mishandled paper.

8 Secondary (Sub) tray convey-ance cover handle

Opens to remove mishandled paper.

9 Stacker conveyance knob Can be turned clockwise to feed mishandled paper to thestacker.

10 Secondary (Sub) tray convey-ance knob

Can be turned clockwise to feed mishandled paper to thesecondary (sub) tray.

11 Outlet knob Can be turned clockwise to feed mishandled paper to theoutlet.

12 Inlet lever Opens downward to remove mishandled paper.

13 Stacker Holds sets output in Non-sort mode or Collate mode (off-set).

14 Outlet lever Opens downward to remove mishandled paper.

15 Carriage Carries paper together with the stacker.

16 Paper holder Mounts paper stopper for holding output paper.

17 Paper stopper Holds output paper.








Folding unit FD-501

1

2

3

4

5

67

8

12

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

9

10

8

9

11








External view

Internal view


1 Primary (main) tray Holds sets output in Non-sort mode, Punch mode, orStaple mode.

2 Secondary (sub) tray Holds sets output in Non-sort mode.

3 Lower tray Holds cover sheets.

4 Lower tray guide plates Hold cover sheets to fix the position.

5 Upper tray Holds cover sheets.

6 Upper tray guide plates Hold cover sheets to fix the position.

7 Upper cover handle Opens to allow removal of mishandled paper.

8 Folding unit door Opens to allow removal of mishandled paper or wastepaper.


1 Inlet lever Opens leftward to remove mishandled paper.

2 Post inserter conveyance le-ver (behind the inlet lever)

Opens leftward to remove mishandled paper.

3 Waste basket Holds waste paper punched out.

4 Upper/Lower conveyance le-ver

Opens rightward to remove mishandled paper.

5 Folding unit handle Withdraws the unit to allow removal of mishandled paper.

6 Conveyance knob/1 Can be turned counterclockwise to ease removal of mis-handled paper.

7 Outlet lever Opens rightward to remove mishandled paper.

8 Upper/Lower right side lever Opens upward to remove mishandled paper.

9 Upper/Middle/Lower knob Can be turned clockwise to ease removal of mishandledpaper.

10 Left side lever (right/left) Opens leftward to remove mishandled paper.

11 Upper lever Opens upward to remove mishandled paper.

12 Conveyance knob/2 Can be turned clockwise to ease removal of mishandledcover paper.








Saddle stitcher SD-501

1

2

3

4

5

67

8

12

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13








External view

Internal view


1 Secondary (sub) tray of sad-dle stitcher

Holds non-sorted sets output from saddle stitcher.

2 Multi-folding mode outletcover handle Opens the cover to remove mishandled paper when us-ing multi-folding mode.

3 Multi-folding mode tray Holds sets output in multi-folding mode.

4 Secondary (Sub) tray Holds non-sorted sets output from the machine on theright side of the Saddle stitcher.

5 Right side door of Saddlestitcher

Opens to remove mishandled paper.

6 Saddle stitcher tray Withdrawn when using Fold &Staple mode.

7 Waste basket Withdrawn to remove waste paper.

8 Left side door of Saddle

stitcher

Opens for staple supply or to remove mishandled paper.


1 Upper cover lever of Foldingunit

Opens the upper cover to remove paper misfed inside theFolding unit.

2 Secondary (Sub) tray convey-ance lever (middle)

Opens downward to remove mishandled paper.

3 Folding unit drawer handle Opens the drawer to remove paper misfed inside theFolding unit.

4 Secondary (Sub) tray convey-ance lever (right)

Opens upward to remove mishandled paper.

5 Inlet lever Opens leftward to remove mishandled paper.

6 Feeding knob Can be turned clockwise to feed mishandled paper to theFolding unit.

7 Folding unit conveyance le-ver


8 Folding unit conveyance cov-

er handle

Opens the cover to remove mishandled paper.

9 Folding unit front cover lever Opens upward to remove mishandled paper.

10 Stapling unit Staples folded sets.

11 Stapling unit knob Can be turned clockwise to feed mishandled paper.

12 Outlet lever Opens leftward to remove mishandled paper.

13 Outlet conveyance lever Opens downward to remove mishandled paper.








Finisher FS-607

3

2

4

1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

3

11

10








External View

Internal View


1 Finisher door Opens to the internal finisher to allow clearing mishandledpaper, replenishing staples, and emptying waste basketof punch kit.

2 Folding mode tray Holds sets output in Multi Half Fold mode, Fold & Staplemode, or Multi Tri-Fold mode.

3 Primary (Main) tray Holds sets output in Non-sort mode, Collate mode (off-set), or Staple mode.

4 Secondary (Sub) tray Holds sets output in Non-sort mode.


1 Secondary (Sub) tray convey-ance lever


2 Paper inserter conveyancelever

Opens leftward to remove mishandled paper.

3 Punch kit PK-512 (option) Punches file holes in the output copies.

4 Entrance lever Opens downward to remove mishandled paper.

5 Waste basket (option) Holds waste paper punched out.

6 Stacker unit Folds or folds & staples copies into booklet-styled sets,and also folds max. 3 copies in three.

7 Knob Can be turned to ease removal of mishandled paper.

8 Lower lever Opens leftward to remove mishandled paper.

9 Stacker conveyance lever Opens lower-leftward to remove mishandled paper.

10 Stacker unit handle Withdraws unit to allow removal of mishandled paper andreplacement of staple cartridge.

11 Staple cartridge Holds staple case to be replaced when supplying staples.








Paper Inserter PI-502

3 2

1

4

5

6


1 Paper inserter control panel Controls paper inserter operations.

2 Upper unit release lever Can be moved to slide the upper unit of paper inserter forremoval of mishandled paper.

3 Upper tray guide plates Hold cover sheets to fix the position.

4 Upper tray Holds cover shets for use in cover sheet mode.

5 Lower tray Holds cover sheets for use in cover sheet mode.

6 Lower tray guide plates Hold cover sheets to fix the position.








Large Capacity Unit LU-202

56

78

910

3

2

4

1


1 Tray conveyance lever Can be moved downward to ease removal of mishandledpaper.

2 Tray top door Opens to allow paper loading or removal of mishandledpaper.

3 Tray left side door Opens to allow removal of mishandled paper.

4 Paper loading button Pressed to lower the bottom plate to allow loading paper.

5 Paper feed roller Conveys copy paper to the main body.

6 Tray paper guides Hold copy paper to fix the position.

7 Tray paper guide knobs Can be turned to move or fix the tray paper guide.

8 Rear stopper Fixes the rear end of copy paper.

9 Rear stopper knobs Can be turned to move or fix the rear stopper.

10 Tray bottom plate Goes up automatically when paper supply becomes low,and goes down when the paper loading button ispressed.








Standard/optional equipment

FD-501 + LS-501

IC-408

SD-501

LS-501 + SD-501

LS-501

RU-503

IC-303

HD-506

DF-609OC-506

PF-601main body

keycounter

FD-501








LS-501 + FD-503

IC-408

FS-503

FD-501 + FS-503

RU-504

IC-303

HT-504

DF-609OC-506

PF-601main body

keycounter

HD-506








FS-607

HD-506

PK-512

PI-502

HT-503

DF-609OC-506

LU-202

keycounterPK-513

main body

IC-408

IC-303

HD-506

DF-609OC-506

key

counter

main body

IC-408

IC-303

HT-504

PF-601

LU-202

HT-503

OT-502








2.2 Turning on/off the power

This machine has two power switches: the main power switch and the subpower switch.

2

ReminderOnce the main power switch is turned on, be sure not to use it in usual

operation.

To turn on the power

1 Turn on the main power switch.

– The main power switch is locatedinside the machine.Open the front door and left side

door to reach it.

When the main power switch isturned on, the Power LED on thecontrol panel will light in red.

2 Turn on the sub power switch.

– The sub power switch is locatedat the front of the main body.

When the sub power switch is turned

on, the Power LED will turn green.

3 The Wake-up screen and Machine Status screen with warm-up imagewill be displayed.

A few seconds after the Wake-up screen appears in the touch panel,

the Machine Status screen with four types of warm-up image will bedisplayed in succession for approx. 7 minutes.

? Do you want to set reserve jobs while the machine is warming up?

% Touch the LCD screen to change the Machine Status screen withwarm-up image to the screen with the job list, then check that themessage "Ready to set reserve job" is displayed in the messagearea.








4 The Machine Status screen with the Job list will be displayed.

!Detail Administrator may have changed the screen to be displayed after the

machine power is on, so that a user should enter the user name and

password to operate the machine. See page 2-33 for details.

If a key counter or copy card is required, follow the instruction on the

screen.








To turn off the power

0 Be sure not to turn off the main power switch in usual operation.

0 When the machine is under control of the Weekly Timer function, do notturn off the sub power switch. Turning it off will deactivate the function.

1 Turn off the sub power switch.– The sub power switch is located

at the front of the main body.

The touch panel and all the LEDs onthe control panel will go out exceptfor the Power LED.

The Power LED will turn red fromgreen.

2 Turn off the main power switch.

– The main power switch is locatedinside the machine.

Open the front door and left sidedoor to reach it.

2

ReminderWhen turning the main power switch off then on, be sure to wait 10

seconds or longer before turning it on again; otherwise the machine may

not operate properly.








2.3 Automatically returning to the default settings: AutoReset

Pressing [Reset] on the control panel or a certain period of machine inactivityclears all the copy settings specified so far and restores the machine to thedefault settings.

This function is called Auto Reset.

As the factory default, Auto Reset is set to function after 1 minute of machineinactivity. The timespan for the auto reset operation can be specified in theUtility mode.

This machine provides two types of default settings; Full-auto and Initial. Thisselection can be made also in the Utility mode. Full-auto is initially selected.

!Detail

For selecting the timespan for the auto reset operation, see page 16-16.

For selecting Full-auto or Initial as the default settings, see page 16-39.

Copy settings specified as Full-auto

These settings cannot be altered except the Output Application setting.

- Original Setting: Normal

- Color: Full color- Zoom: 1.000

- Application: None

- Quality Adjustment: Standard- Output Application: Selection available in the Utility mode

- Simplex/Duplex: 1->1

- Paper Setting: Auto

!DetailTo change the selection of Output Application for Full-auto, see

page 16-39.








2.4 To use machine when Power Save LED lights

If you find the Power Save LED lit on the control panel, the machine cannotbe operated due to the Power Save or Weekly Timer function.

To activate the machine

1 Press any key on the control panel.

– If the machine makes noresponse, press [Power Save].

If Power Save has been activated,the machine will become availablefor operaions.

If Weekly Timer has been activated,the Machine Status screen will appear with the message "Timerinterrupt mode/ Enter password" displayed in the message area, and

the machine operation will be available temporarily by the TimerInterrupt function. See page 2-31 for details.

!DetailThe Power Save function has two modes: Auto Low Power and Auto

Shut-Off. See the following description for details.

This function can also be activated manually. For details, see page 2-30.








Automatically conserving energy (Auto low power)

This function conserves energy by lowering the power consumption to thefollowing extent in standby mode.

170.4W

Auto Low Power activates automatically after a specified period (initially 15

minutes) of copier inactivity with the Power Save LED lit, touch panel goneoff, and all other LEDs except Start LED on the control panel turned off. TheStart LED will turn red, while the Power LED keeps green.

2

NoteIf the Auto shut-off function activates at the same time, the power will be

turned off.

The touch panel will not go off during a duplex copying job or when the

Jam Position screen is displayed.

!DetailThe Auto Low Power function can be set to 5 minutes/ 10 minutes/ 15

minutes/ 30 minutes/ 60 minutes/ 90 minutes/ 120 minutes/ 240 minutes.

See page 16-24 or page 17-7 for details.

To exit Auto low power

% Press or touch any key on the controlpanel and touch panel.








Manually conserving energy

Follow the procedure below to operate Power Save function (Low Power orShut-Off) manually.

1 Press [Power Save] for one secondor longer, then release it.

The following message will bedisplayed.

Using Auto Shut-Off:

Auto Shut Off Mode/Press any key or touch screen to exit

Using Auto Low Power:

Low Power Mode/Press any key ortouch screen to exit

2 Power Save will be activated.

The Power Save LED will be lit and the LCD screen will be turned off.

2

ReminderBe sure to press [Power Save] for one second or longer, otherwise the

following message will be displayed and the Shut-Off (Low Power) mode

will not be activated.

Press POWER SAVER more than one second, then release it for Shut off mode

Keep POWER SAVER pressed more thanone second to enter Low power mode

!DetailThe machine is initially set to activate the Shut-Off function manually.

To use Low Power instead, see page 16-24 or page 17-7.








Limiting machine usage (Weekly timer)

The Weekly Timer function turns a copier on and off at the time specified bythe administrator.

When a machine is in OFF condition under control of Weekly Timer, thePower Save LED is lit and machine operation is unavailable.

!DetailFor details of the Weekly Timer function, see page 17-10.

To use the machine temporarily

The following procedure temporarily enables the machine operation. (TimerInterrupt)

0 The Timer Interrupt password is to be specified in the administrator

setting. Ask your administrator for the password.0 You cannot specify the copy time shorter than 5 minutes; entering 0 for

hour and a number smaller than 5 for minute will set the minute at 5. Also, a number larger than 60 is unavailable for minute.

1 Press [Power Save] on the control

panel.

The Machine Status screen will bedisplayed along with the messageshown below.

Timer interrupt modeEnter password $###

The machine power will be turned offautomatically after 5 minutes from this state if a password is notentered.Or, if the following message is displayed, proceed to step 3.

Input desired copy time

$ hour(s) $# minute(s)

2 Enter the Timer Interrupt password, then press [Start].

– Enter a 4-digit Timer Interrupt password using the control panelkeypad, then press [Start].

? Do you want to correct an invalid password?

% Continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.








3 Set the hour for the interrupt use, then press [Start].

– Enter a 1-digit hour (ex. 3 for 3 hours) using the control panelkeypad (0 ~ 9), then press [Start].

Input desired copy time3 hour(s) $# minute(s)

4 Set the minute for the interrupt use, then press [Start].

– Enter a 2-digit minute (ex. 07 for 7 minutes) using the control panelkeypad (00 ~ 59), then press [Start].

Input desired copy time3 hour(s) 07 minute(s)

Copying is available until the set time is up.

5 When the machine operation is finished, press [Power Save] for onesecond or longer, then release it.

The machine returns to OFF condition.








2.5 Making user authentication

This machine can prohibit its operation until the user name, user password,section name, and/or section password specified by the administrator areverified. Copy quantity limit for each section can also be set.

When the machine is turned on, one of the following user authentication

screen will be displayed according to the authentication setting.

Copying will be available by the following procedure.








To enter user name and password

1 Enter the user name, user password, section name, and/or sectionpassword, as required.

– Touch the desired item key to display the keypad screen.Enter your user name (max. 64 characters), user password (max. 64

characters), section name (max. 8 characters) and/or 8-digitsection password.

2 Touch [OK].

Check that the screen message changes to "Ready for copy."

3 Start machine operation.

Normal copying/printing/scanning job is available on the machine.

4 When machine operation is completed, press [Access].The initial state will be restored, with the User Authentication screendisplayed on the touch panel.

2

NoteIf the message "Copy limit reached" is displayed and machine operation

becomes unavailable, contact your administrator.






3Paper and original

information






Paper and original information 3



3.1 Paper information

This machine is equipped with the following trays for loading copy paper.

- Tray 1, 2 and 3 (main body trays)- Bypass tray

- Tray 4 and 5 (paper feeder unit PF-601)

- Tray 4 (Large Capacity Unit LU-202)

Also, the following equipment is provided for conveying/delivering copies.

- ADU (Automatic Duplex Unit) (built in to the main body)- Finisher FS-503 (built-in Staple Unit)

- Folding unit FD-501- Post inserter (attached to folding unit FD-501)

- Saddle stitcher SD-501

- Large capacity Stacker LS-501

- Finisher FS-607- Paper Inserter PI-502 (option for Finisher FS-607)

- Punch kit PK-512/PK-513 (option for Finisher FS-607)

- Output tray OT-502 (for the machine without finisher)

Refer to the following information on paper capacity for each.








Paper weight

Paper trays Paper weight

Tray 1, 2 and 3 (Main bodytrays)

A4, 8.5" e 11" or larger: 64 to 256g/m2

Smaller than A4, 8.5" e 11": 64 to 209 g/m2

Bypass Tray 64 to 300 g/m2

Tray 4 and 5 (Paper Feed UnitPF-601)

Tray 4 (Upper tray): 64 to 256g/m2

Tray 5 (Lower tray): 64 to 300g/m2

Tray 4 (Large Capacity UnitLU-202)

64 to 300 g/m2

Equipment Paper weight

Automatic Duplex Unit 64 to 256 g/m2

Finisher FS-503 Primary (main) tray: 50 to 300g/m2

Secondary (sub) tray: 50 to 300g/m2

Staple: 50 to 244g/m2

Folding Unit FD-501 Primary (main) tray: 50 to 244g/m2


Punch: 50 to 209 g/m2

Z-Fold, Tri-Fold-in, Tri-Fold-out, Half Fold: 50 to 130g/m2

Double Parallel, Gate Fold: 50 to 91 g/m2

Post Inserter (attached toFolding Unit FD-501)

50 to 300 g/m2

Large Capacity StackerLS-501

Stacker: 50 to 244g/m2


Saddle Stitcher SD-501 Fold & Staple, Trimming: 50 to 244 g/m2

Multi Half Fold of 5 sheets: 50 to 81g/m

2

Multi Half Fold of 3 sheets: 82 to 130g/m2


Multi Tri-Fold of 5 sheets: 50 to 81g/m2

Multi Tri-Fold of 3 sheets: 82 to 91g/m2


Finisher FS-607 Primary (main) tray: 60 to 300 g/m2


Staple: 60 to 105g/m2

Fold & Staple: 60 to 105g/m2

Half Fold: 60 to 105g/m2


Multi Half Fold of 1 sheet: 81 to 105g/m2

Paper Inserter PI-502 (optionfor Finisher FS-607) 50 to 200 g/m2

Punch Kit PK-512/PK-513 60 to 128g/m2

Output tray OT-502 64 to 300 g/m2








2

ReminderBe sure to use paper only of the weight specified for the tray; otherwise

copy quality may be deteriorated or machine trouble may occur.

!DetailThe paper weight setting for trays 1 to 5 is described on page 13-10.

The paper weight specified for each tray can be changed for temporary

use. See page 6-48 for details.








Paper tray/ exit tray capacity

Paper trays Capacity

Tray 1, 2 and 3 (Main bodytrays)

500 sheets (80 g/m2 )

Bypass Tray 250 sheets (80 g/m2 )

Tray 4 and 5 (PF-601 trays) 3,000 sheets (80 g/m2 )

Tray 4 (Large Capacity UnitLU-202)

3,000 sheets (80 g/m2 )

Equipment Capacity

Automatic Duplex Unit Unlimited

Output tray OT-502 150 sheets

Finisher

FS-503

Secondary

(sub) tray

Max. 200 sheets

Primary(main) tray(normal)

500 sheets (80 g/m2 ) (A5 w / v, B6 w, 5.5" e8.5" w / v )3,000 sheets (80 g/m2 ) (A4 w / v, B5 w / v, 16K w / v, 8.5" e11"w / v )1,500 sheets (80 g/m2 ) (SRA3 w, SRA4 w / v, A3 w, B4 w, F4w, 8K w, 13" e19" w, 12"e 18" w, 11" e17" w, 8.5"e 14" w )

Primary(main) tray(Staple)

Max. 100 sheets (80 g/m2 ) per set2-9 sheets stapled: 150 sets10-20 sheets stapled: 50 sets21-30 sheets stapled: 30 sets31-40 sheets stapled: 25 sets41-50 sheets stapled: 20 sets51-60 sheets stapled: 15 sets

61-100 sheets stapled: 10 sets

Folding unitFD-501

Secondary(sub) tray

Max. 200 sheets

Primary(main) tray(nor-mal/punch)

500 sheets (80 g/m2 ) (A5 w / v, B6 w, 5.5" e8.5" w / v )2,500 sheets (80 g/m2 ) (A4 w / v, B5 w / v, 16K w, 8.5"e11"w / v )1,500 sheets (80 g/m2 ) (SRA3 w, SRA4 w / v, A3 w, B4 w, F4w, 8K w, 13" e19" w, 12"e 18" w, 11" e17" w, 8.5"e 14" w )

Primary(main) tray(fold)

30 sheets

Post InserterUpper/Low-er tray

500 sheets (80 g/m

2

)








2NoteIf the Saddle stitcher tray is not fully withdrawn, the machine will detect

that the tray is filled up, even with less number of finished sets than that

specified in specifications.

!DetailHeight of the folded and stapled booklet

The following table shows the standard height of folded and stapled

booklet according to the number of sheets and paper size.

FinisherFS-607

Booklet tray Max. folded & stapled sheets: 20 sheets (80 g/m2 ) / 16 sheets(81 to 105 g/m2 colored or coated paper)Half Fold: 33 sets for 3-sheet-folded booklet (99 sheets, 396pages) (25 sets for A4 w, 8.5" e 11" w )Fold & Staple: 20 sets for 5-sheet-folded booklet (100 sheets,400 pages) (15 sets for A4 w, 8.5" e 11" w )

Fold & Staple: 5 sets for 20-sheet-folded booklet (100 sheets,400 pages)Max. folded sheets in Multi Tri-Fold: 3 sheets (60 to 80 g/m2 ) / 1sheet (81 to 105 g/m2 )Multi Tri-Fold: 50 sets for 1-sheet-folded set

Paper Insert-er PI-502Upper/Low-er tray

Max. 200 sheets (50 to 200 g/m2 )

Punch KitPK-512

Unlimited

Equipment Capacity

Number ofsheets(1 set)

Paper size

A3 w, 12" e 18"w, 11" e 17" w (401 mm or more)

B4 w, 8Kw, 8.5"e 14" w (301 to400 mm)

A4w, 16Kw, 8.5"e 11"w (261 to300 mm)

B5 w (260 mm orless)

2 to 5 35 mm 40 mm 45 mm Not specified

6 to 15 45 mm 50 mm Not specified Not specified










Paper size

Paper Trays Available size

Tray 1 to 3 (Main body trays) Standard Size:SRA3 w, SRA4 w/v, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 w,12"e 18" w, 11" e17" w, 8.5" e11" v

Available to detect 8.5" e 14" w, 8.5" e 11" v instead of SRA4w, A4 w or 8“e13" w / 8.12"e 13.2" w / 8.25" e13" w /8.5" e13" w. Available to detect 13" e 19" w instead of SRA3 w. Available to detect 5.5" e 8.5" w instead of A5 w.Custom Size:Max. 330 mm e487 mm to Min. 140 mm e 182 mmTab Paper: A4 v, 8.5" e 11" v

Bypass Tray Standard Size:SRA3 w, SRA4 w/v, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 w,12"e 18" w, 11" e17" w, 8.5" e14" w, 8.5"e 11" vCustom Size:Max. 330.2 mme 487.7 mm to Min. 100 mm e 148 mmTab Paper: A4 v, 8.5" e 11" v

Tray 4 to 5 (Paper Feeder Unittrays)

Standard Size:SRA3 w, SRA4 w / v, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 w / v*,B6 w, A6 w*, 13" e 19" w, 12" e18" w, 11" e17" w, 8.5" e14"w, 8.5"e 11" w / v*: A5 v and A6 w are available in tray 5 (lower tray) only.Custom Size:Tray 4 (Upper tray) Max. 330.2 mme487.7 mm to Min. 100 mme 182 mmTray 5 (Lower tray) Max. 330.2 mm e487.7 mm to Min. 100 mme 148 mmTab Paper:

A4 v, 8.5" e 11" vTray 4 (Large Capacity UnitLU-202)

Standard Size:SRA3 w, SRA4 w / v, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w / v, B5 v, 13" e19" w,11"e 17" w, 8.5" e 11" vCustom Size:Max. 330.2 mme 487.7 mm to Min. 210 mm e 182 mmTab Paper: A4 v, 8.5" e 11" v








Folding unitFD-501

Punch(4 holes)

Standard Size: A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 v, 8K w, 16K v, 12" e 18" w, 11" e17"w, 8.5"e14" w, 8.5" e11" vTab Paper: A4 v, 8.5" e 11" v

Fold Standard Size:SRA4 w, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, 8K w, 12" e 18" w, 11"e 17" w,8.5" e14" w, 8.5"e 11" wCustom Size:Max. 305 mm e 458 mm to Min. 210 mm e 297 mm

Post Inserter Standard Size:SRA3 w, SRA4 w / v, A3 w, B4 w, F4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w / v, A5v, 8K w, 16K w / v, 13"e19" w, 12" e18" w, 11"e17" w,8.5" e14" w, 8.5"e 11" w / v, 5.5" e 8.5" vCustom Size:Max. 331 mm e 483 mm to Min. 182 mm e 139 mmTab Paper: A4 v, 8.5" e 11" v

Large ca-pacitystackerLS-501

Stacker Standard Size:SRA3 w, SRA4 w / v, A3 w, B4 w, F4 w, A4 w / v, B5 v, A5 v,8K w, 16K v, 13" e 19" w, 12"e 18" w, 11" e17" w, 8.5" e14"w, 8.5"e11" w / vCustom Size:Max. 331 mm e 483 mm to Min. 210 mm e 148 mm

Secondary(sub) tray

Standard Size:SRA3 w, SRA4 w / v, A3 w, B4 w, F4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5w / v, B6 w, A6 w, 8K w, 16K w / v, 13" e19" w, 12" e18" w,11" e17" w, 8.5" e14" w, 8.5" e11" w / v, 5.5" e 8.5" w / vCustom Size:Max. 331 mm e 488 mm to Min. 100 mm e 139 mmTab Paper: A4 v, 8.5" e 11" v

SaddlestitcherSD-501

Secondary(sub) tray

Standard Size:SRA3 w, SRA4 w / v, A3 w, B4 w, F4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5w / v, B6 w, A6 w, 8K w, 16K w / v, 13" e19" w, 12" e18" w,11" e17" w, 8.5" e14" w, 8.5" e11" w / v, 5.5" e 8.5" w / vCustom Size:Max. 331 mm e488 mm to Min. 100 mm e 139 mmTab Paper: A4 v, 8.5" e 11" v

Multi fold tray Standard Size:SRA3 w, SRA4 w / v, A3 w, B4 w, F4 w, A4 w, B5 w, 8K w,16K w, 12" e 18" w, 11" e17" w, 8.5"e 14" w, 8.5" e11" wCustom Size:Max. 324 mm e460 mm to Min. 182 mm e 257 mm

Multi tri-foldtray

Standard Size:SRA3 w, SRA4 w / v, A3 w, B4 w, F4 w, A4 w, B5 w, 8K w,16K w, 12" e 18" w, 11" e17" w, 8.5"e 14" w, 8.5" e11" wCustom Size:Max. 324 mm e460 mm to Min. 182 mm e 257 mm

Equipment Available Size








FinisherFS-607

Secondary(sub) tray

Standard Size:SRA3 w, SRA4 w / v, A3 w, B4 w, F4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5w / v, B6 w, A6 w, 8K w, 16K w / v, 13" e19" w, 12"e18" w,11" e17" w, 8.5"e14" w, 8.5" e11" w / v, 5.5" e8.5"w / vCustom Size:Max. 331 mm e488 mm to Min. 100 mm e 139 mm

Tab Paper: A4 v, 8.5" e 11" v

Primary (main)tay (Normal)

Standard Size:SRA4 w, A3 w, B4 w, F4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 w*1 / v, B6w*1, 8K w, 16K w / v, 12"e18" w, 11" e17" w, 8.5"e14" w,8.5" e11" w / v, 5.5" e8.5" w*1 / v*1: 5.5" e8.5" w, A5 w and B6 w are available for straight out-put only.Custom Size*2:Max. 314 mm e458 mm to Min. 182 mm e 148 mm*2: Max. 314 mm e458 mm to Min. 128 mm e 139 mm forstraight output only.Tab Paper: A4 v, 8.5" e 11" v

Primary (main)tray (Staple)

Standard Size:SRA4 w, A3 w, B4 w, F4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 v, 8K w,16K w / v, 12" e18" w, 11"e17" w, 8.5" e14" w, 8.5"e11"w / v, 5.5"e 8.5" vCustom Size:Max. 324 mm e460 mm to Min. 210 mm e 139 mmTab Paper: A4 v, 8.5" e 11" v

Booklet tray Standard Size:SRA3 w*, SRA4 w, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, 12"e 18" w, 11" e17"w, 8.5" e14" w, 8.5"e11" w* SRA3 w is unavailable for Fold & Staple mode.

Custom Size:Max. 314 mm e 458 mm to Min. 210 mm e 297 mmTri-Fold: A4 v, 8.5" e 11" v

Paper In-serterPI-502

Upper tray Standard Size:SRA3 w, SRA4 w / v, A3 w, B4 w, F4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5w / v, B6 w, A6 w, 8K w, 16K w / v, 13" e19" w, 12"e18" w,11" e17" w, 8.5"e14" w, 8.5" e11" w / v, 5.5" e 8.5" w / vCustom Size:Max. 331 mm e 488 mm to Min. 100 mm e 139 mmTab Paper: A4 v, 8.5" e 11" v

Lower tray Standard Size:SRA3 w, SRA4 w / v, A3 w, B4 w, F4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5

w / v, B6 w, A6 w, 8K w, 16K w / v, 13" e19" w, 12"e18" w,11" e17" w, 8.5"e14" w, 8.5" e11" w / v, 5.5" e 8.5" w / vCustom Size:Max. 331 mm e 488 mm to Min. 100 mm e 139 mmTab Paper: A4 v, 8.5" e 11" v

Punch Kit 2 holes (PK-512): A3 w, B4 w, F4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 w / v, 8K w, 16K w / v,11" e17" w, 8.5"e14" w, 8.5" e11" w / v, 5.5" e 8.5" w4 holes (PK-512): A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 v, 8K w, 16K v, 11" e17" w, 8.5"e 11" vSwedish 4 holes (PK-513): A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 v

Equipment Available Size








Auto tray switch function

If the selected paper tray runs out of paper while a job is being printed and adifferent paper tray is loaded with paper meeting the following conditions,

the other paper tray is automatically selected so printing can continue. If theoptional paper feeder unit PF-601 is installed, a maximum of 7,500 copiescan be made continuously. (The paper tray is automatically switched only ifthe "ATS Permission parameter" in the utility mode is set to "Permit".)

Operating Conditions (Set the following condition at "01 System Setting\03

Feed Tray Setting" of user setting.)

- Select the paper tays to be selected automatically by "02 Feed Tray AutoSelection", if Auto paper select is functioned.Tray Priority is available.

- Select "On" at "03 ATS Permit Setting"- Select the paper type setting of the tray which is automatically selected

when ATS functions at "04 Auto Paper Type"

Load the following paper into the paper trays.- The same size in the same orientation.

- The same paper type.

To store copy paper

Observe the following precautions when storing the paper.- Store paper in a cool, dry area. Using damp paper may cause a paper

misfeed.

- Keep partially used packages tightly wrapped during storage.- Do not place paper packages vertically to store. Paper curl due to the

vertical storage may cause a paper misfeed.








3.2 Original information

When making copies, position the original into the ADF or on the originalglass.

To copy original that cannot be positioned into the ADF, position them on the

original glass.

Using original glass

Use the original glass when originals are not suitable for use with thedocument feeder, e.g.,when size is incompatible, or when originals arefolded, stapled, torn, or in generally poor condition.

Unsuitable ADF originals

The following types of original should not be positioned into the ADF,otherwise paper misfeeds, damage to the original or the machine trouble

may occur.- Wrinlked, folded, curled, or torn original

- Highly translucent or transparent original, such as overheadtransparencies or trace paper

- Coated original such as carbon-backed paper

- Original printed on paper thicker 210 g/m2 (use the Thick original modeto copy original thicker 129 g/m2 )

- Original printed on paper thinner than 35 g/m2 (use the Thin original modeto copy original thinner 49 g/m2 )

- Original printed on paper thicker than 50 g/m2 during double-sidedcopying

- Original that are bound, for example, with staples or paper clips- Original that are bound in a book or booklet

- Original that are bound together with glue

- Original pages that have been cut or contain cutouts

- Label sheets- Offset printing masters

- Original with binder holes

- Original that have just been printed with this machine








!DetailDetectable paper size can be changed from AB series to Inch series, only

A series, or AB series and Inch series mixed by the administrator. See

page 17-73.

5.5" e 8.5" w , A5 w , and B6 w , one of which can be selected. See

page 17-73.

F4 (Foolscap) includes the following 4 types (8.25" e 13" w ,

8.5" e 13.5" w , 8.5" e 13" w , and 8" e 13" w ) and 8.5" e 14" w , one of

which can be selected. See page 17-73.

Machine administrator can specify the smallest original size to be

detected from the original glass. See page 17-73.

7 CAUTIONThe original glass is fragile.% Do not place too heavy originals, or do not press strongly when thick

original is placed and is under pressure of ADF, otherwise the glassmay be broken and you may be injured.








ADF originals

Following four modes are provided when using the ADF to scan originals.- Normal mode

- Mixed mode- Z-folded mode

Specifications for each mode are described as follows.

!DetailDetectable original size can be changed from AB series to Inch series,

only A series, or AB series and Inch series mixed by the administrator. For

details, see page 17-73.

Normal mode:

Item Description

Detectable original size A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 w / v, 11" e 17" w, 8.5" e 14" w,8.5" e 11" w / v, 5.5" e 8.5" w / v

Original weight Single-sided original: 35 g/m2 to 210 g/m2

Double-sided original: 50 g/m2 to 210 g/m2

Use the Thick original mode to copy original thicker than129 g/m2

Use the Thin original mode to copy original thinner than 50 g/m2

Original size 128 mm e 139.7 mm to 297 mm e 431.8 mm

Feeder capacity 100 sheets (80 g/m2 )

Curling tolerance 10 mm or less

Original placement Face up








Mixed mode:

Use Mixed mode to copy mixed size originals. See page 6-11 for details.

2

NoteSee below for the guide width of each combination.

Item Description

Detectable original size Two types of size combination are determined by the ADF guide

width. A3 w, B4 w, A4 w / v, B5 v, and A5 v mixedB4 w, A4 w, B5 w / v, and A5 v mixed A4 w, B5 v, and A5 v mixed







Original placement Face up (see page 5-17 for details.)

A3 A4 B4B5








Z-folded original mode:

Use Z-folded original mode to scan folded originals without using the sizedetection sensor of the ADF. See page 6-13 for details.

Item Description

Detectable original size A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 w / v, 11" e 17" w, 8.5" e 14" w,8.5" e 11" w / v, 5.5" e 8.5" w / v





Original size 128 mm e 139.7 mm to 297 mm e 431.8 mm



Original placement Face up; orientation same as copy paper






4 Supplies& handling


When paper in a tray becomes empty, the indicator “ ” blinks on the traykey.

Follow the procedure below to supply the empty tray with copy paper.

2

ReminderPaper setting for each tray can be made from the Machine Status screen

or from the Copy screen using the [Paper Setting] key.

Be sure to load the specified paper; otherwise machine trouble may becaused.








4 Adjust the position of the rear stopper.

– To slide the rear stopper to the right, hold it at the upper part and

slide it while pressing down slightly.On the other hand, hold the rear stopper at the lower part to slide itto the left.

5 Place paper on the tray.

– Load paper aligning it to the right side of the tray, then align the rearstopper to the paper.

– Do not load more than 500 sheets (80 g/m2 ) or above the limit

indicated on the side guide plate, otherwise paper misfeed may becaused.

6 When paper is seated properly, close the paper feed roller.

7 Gently push in the tray until it locks into place.

– The indicator “ ” on the Machine Status screen or Copy screenwill change to “ ”.

1

2






Supplies & handling 4


2

ReminderBe sure to fix the side guide plate in position according to the size

indication on the tray bottom plate so that the machine can detect the

correct paper size.

Be sure to press down the rear stopper when moving it to the right, and

also be sure to hold at the lower part when moving it to the left. Do not

move the stopper forcibly, otherwise it may be damaged.

Be sure that the rear guide plate is securely aligned to the paper;

otherwise machine trouble may be caused.








To load paper in bypass tray

0 When using the bypass tray, specify the paper type to be loaded on thetray at the same time. See page 6-48 for details.

0 Do not use paper with staples or paper that conducts electricity (silver,carbon, etc.), otherwise an accident may occur as a result of fire.

0 To avoid machine trouble, do not use coated paper as follows:Heat-sensitive paper, silver-coated or carbon-backed paper, OHP

transparencies, ink-jet printer paper

1 Open the bypass tray located on theright side of the machine.

2 Load copy paper, and adjust thepaper guides to the paper size.

– Do not load more than 250 sheets

(80 g/m2 ) or above the limit

indicated on the paper guides,otherwise paper misfeed may becaused.

The indicator “ ” on the Machine

Status screen and Copy screen willchange to “ ”.

3 When copying is completed, close the bypass tray.








To load paper in paper feeder unit trays (tray 4 and 5)

0 Be sure that the machine is powered ON before withdrawing the tray.

0 Only one tray can be withdrawn at a time.

0 Procedure to make fine adjustment of tray 5 paper guides is explained inanother page. See page 4-14.

1 Withdraw the tray to be supplied with

paper.

– To load the same size as loadedbefore, proceed to step 4.

2 Loosen the paper guide knobs.

– Turn the four paper guide knobs

counterclockwise to loosenthem.

3 Adjust the position of the side paperguide.

– Pushing the paper guide lockrelease lever, move the lateral

guides along the appropriate size

guides for the paper to beloaded. Release the pressureapplied to the paper guide lockrelease lever to lock it again.








4 Fix the paper guide knobs.

– Turn the paper guide knobs (twofor each) clockwise to fix theguides.

5 Load the paper into the tray.

– Load the paper so that the leftside edge is aligned with the left

side lining of the tray.– Pushing the guide lock release

lever, move the front edge guideto the edge of the paper.

6 When paper is seated properly, close the paper feed roller.

7 Push in the tray until it locks into place.

– The indicator “ ” on the Machine Status screen or Copy screen

will change to “ ”.

2

ReminderDo not load above the limit level, and carefully load the paper to be

seated under the paper holding lever at the air nozzle.

Be sure that the side paper guides and front edge guide are securelyaligned to the paper; otherwise the machine cannot detect the correct

paper size, or machine trouble may occur.

Do not bump the tray into the main body; otherwise machine trouble may

be caused.








To load A5/B6/A6 size paper in paper feeder unit

0 The lower tray (tray 5) can be load with A5 w / B6 w / A6 w size paperusing the auxiliary paper guide. The upper tray (tray 4) can be loaded with

A5 w / B6 w size paper using the auxiliary paper guide.Do not load A5 v / A6w size paper into the upper tray (tray 4), for the traycannot detect those paper sizes.

0 Be sure that the machine is powered ON before withdrawing the tray.

0 Only one tray can be withdrawn at a time.

1 Withdraw the tray.

2 Slide both paper guides closely untilit stops.

– Turn the four paper guide knobscounterclockwise to loosen

them.

– Pushing the paper guide lockrelease lover, move the bothguides closely until it stops.

3 Move the auxiliary paper guides

inwardly.








4 Adjust the position of the auxiliary paper guides.

– Pushing the paper guide lock release lever, move the auxiliary

paper guides along the appropriate size guides for A5 w, B6 w or A6 w paper. Release the pressure applied to the paper guide lockrelease lever to lock it again.

– Turn the paper guide knobs (two for each) clockwise to fix theguides.

5 Load the A5 w B6 w or A6 w paper

into tray 5.

– Load paper so that the left sideedge is aligned with the left side

lining of the tray.– Pushing the guide lock release

lever, move the front edge guideto the edge of the paper.

6 Push in the tray 5 until it locks into place.

– The indicator “ ” on the Machine Status screen or Copy screenwill change to “ ”.








2

ReminderDo not load above the limit level, and carefully load the paper to be

seated under the paper holding lover at the air nozzle.

Be sure that the side paper guides and front edge guide are securelyaligned to the paper; otherwise the machine cannot detect the correct


Do not bump the tray into the main body; otherwise machine trouble may

be caused.








To make fine adjustment of tray 5 paper guides

Printed image may be dislocated if the paper guides are not aligned closelyto the paper loaded in the tray.

Adjust the position of paper guides correctly according to the following

procedure.

1 Withdraw the tray to be adjusted,then place a sheet of paper to beloaded in that tray.

2 Turn the bottom plate lock release knob counterclockwise to loosen it,slide it to the rear side, then turn it clockwise to fix it in position.

3 Return the tray to its original position, then withdraw it again after the

tray bottom plate goes up completely.

– The bottom plate of the tray automatically goes up when returnedin position.

– When that automation is completed, the paper amount indicator onthe Machine Status screen and Copy screen changes to “ ”.Withdrawing the tray at this point, you will find that t he bottomplate has been elevated to the top position.








4 Align paper guides to the sheet.

– Turn the four paper guide knobscounterclockwise to loosenthem.

– Pushing the paper guide lockrelease lever, move the lateral

guides along the sheet.Do not press the guides to thesheet strongly; otherwise papermishandle may be caused.

5 Fix paper guides position.

– Turn the paper guide knobs (twofor each) clockwise to fix the

guides.– Check the two scales between

paper guide knobs, then confirmthat they reach the same value.If not, readjust paper guides.

6 Turn the bottom plate lock release

knob counterclockwise to unlock thetray bottom plate.

The tray bottom plate goes down.








To load paper in large capacity tray (tray 4)

0 Without the power turned on, the tray bottom plate will not function. Besure to turn on the power switch before loading paper in the tray.

1 Open the tray top door.

– The tray bottom plate will go up.– To load the same size as loaded

before, proceed to step 3.If changing the paper size,proceed to the next step.

2 Adjust the position of the tray paper guides and rear stopper.

– Turn the four paper guide knobs and two rear stopper knobs coun-terclockwise to loosen them.

– Move the upper part of the twopaper guides to the appropriatepositions according to the sizeindication.








4 Press the paper loading button.

5 Repeat the steps 3 and 4 until the bottom plate will not go down anymore.

6 Close the tray top door.

2

ReminderDo not load above the limit indicated on the tray paper guides.

Be sure that the rear stopper is correctly positioned according to the

paper size to be loaded; otherwise paper misfeed or machine trouble may

occur.








4.2 Loading tabbed sheets

Tabbed sheets can be used if the tray paper type is specified as tabbedsheets in the Paper Setting. Follow the procedure below to supply the traywith tabbed sheets.

To load tabbed sheets in main body trays (tray 1 to 3)0 The tray paper type should be specified as tabbed sheets. See page 6-48

for the details of Paper Setting.

0 Example 1: 3 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for one finished set.Example 2: 9 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for 3 finished sets

1 Withdraw the tray to be loaded with tabbed sheets.

2 Open the paper feed roller.

3 Place tabbed sheets on the tray.

– Place paper referring to the illustration shown above.

Rear

Front

Rear

Front

.

1st tab

2nd tab3rd tab

1st tab

2nd tab

3rd tab

Printedside

Printedside

1st tab

2nd tab

3rd tab

ONE FINISHED SET

3 FINISHED SETS

1st tab 2nd tab

3rd tab

Example 1:

Example 2:








4 Move the side guide plates to the edge of the paper.

– Set paper aligning it to the paper feed roller side of the tray.– Press the release lever of the front side guide plate to move the side

guide plates, and also move the rear edge guide to the edge of thepaper.

5 Push in the tray until it locks into place.

2

ReminderDo not load above the limit level on the side guide plate.

Be sure that the side guide plates and rear edge guide are securely

aligned to the paper; otherwise the machine cannot detect the correct









To load tabbed sheets in bypass tray

Example 1: 3 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for one finished set.Example 2: 9 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for 3 finished sets.

1 Open the bypass tray located on the right side of the machine.

2 Specify the paper type as tabbed sheets for the bypass tray.

– See page 6-48 for specifying the paper type of the bypass tray.

3 Place tabbed sheets on the tray.

– Place paper referring to the illustration shown above.

Rear

Rear

Front

1st tab

Printedside

2nd tab

3rd tab

3 FINISHED SETS

Printedside

1st tab

2nd tab

3rd tab

1st tab 2nd tab

3rd tab

Front

1st tab

2nd tab

3rd tab

ONE FINISHED SET

Example 1:

Example 2:








7 WARNINGPrecaution for the empty toner bottleIf it is thrown into a fire, the toner may ignite and cause a dangerous situation.

% DO NOT THROW toner or the empty toner bottle into a fire!

7 CAUTIONPrecaution for storing and handling the toner bottleIf too much of toner is inhaled or toner gets in your eyes, your health may beaffected.

% Keep the toner bottle away from children.

% Be careful not to spill toner inside the machine or get toner on your

clothes or hands.% If your hands become soiled with toner, immediately wash them with

soap and water.

% If toner gets in your eyes, immediately flush them with water, and thenseek professional medical attention.








To exchange the toner bottle

1 Open the toner access door.

2 Unlock and open the toner bottlecover of the empty toner bottle.

3 Partially withdraw the toner bottle,then turn it to set the up-arrow mark( + ) at the top.








4 Fully withdraw the toner bottlestraightforward to remove the bottle.

5 Loosen toner in the new toner bottle.

– Tap both top and bottom of thenew toner bottle on a solidsurface five times each, then

shake the bottle at least fivetimes.

6 Remove the cap from the new tonerbottle, then put it to the used emptyone.








4.4 Exchanging toner recovery box

When the toner recovery box becomes full with the used toner, "Pleaseexchange toner recovery box" message will be displayed on the touchscreen, and also the Toner Recovery Box indicator on the Machine Statusscreen will light.

Follow the procedure below to exchange the toner recovery box.

7 WARNINGPrecaution for the toner recovery box

If it is thrown into a fire, the toner may ignite and cause a dangerous situation.% DO NOT THROW the toner recovery box into a fire!








4.5 Replenishing staples

Inserting a new staple cartridge into finisher FS-503

When the staple cartridge of the finisher FS-503 becomes empty, the StapleCartridge Supply indicator lights in red in the option status area of the

Machine Status screen.

Follow the procedure below to replenish staples.

1 Open the finisher door.

2 Pull out the stapler unit.

– Pull out the stapler unit slowly byholding the stapler unit handleuntil it stops.








6 Return the stapler unit to its originalposition.

7 Close the finisher door.

2

Reminder

Do not pull the lock tape upward, otherwise the tape may rip and remaininside the cartridge so that the staples cannot be used.








3 Set the new cartridge.

– Check that the top side of the staple cartridge is up, otherwise itcannot be inserted.

4 Close the left side door of the saddle stitcher.








3 Remove the staple cartridge.

– Pull up and draw forward the sta-ple cartridge, then remove it whilesliding it along the stapler rail.

4 Remove the empty staple case fromthe staple cartridge.

5 Insert the new staple case into the

staple cartridge.

– Firmly insert the staple case intothe staple cartridge while aligningthe arrow sides of both case and

cartridge, then remove the locktape.

– Do not remove the staples re-maining inside the cartridge; oth-erwise, the first sheet output afterthe replenishment will not be stapled.

1

2








4.6 Disposing punch waste

Emptying waste basket of Finisher FS-607

When the waste basket of Punch kit PK-512 installed in Finisher FS-607 be-comes full, the Punch Waste Basket indicator lights in red in the option status

area of the Machine Status Screen.

Follow the procedure below to empty the waste basket.

1 Open the Finisher door.

2 Withdraw the waste basket.








Emptying waste basket of folding unit FD-501

When the waste basket of folding unit FD-501 becomes full, the PunchWaste Basket indicator lights in red in the option status area of the MachineStatus screen.

Follow the procedure below to empty the waste basket.

1 Open the folding unit door, then

withdraw the waste basket.








2

ReminderBe sure to return the waste basket to its original position, otherwise the

trimming function cannot be performed.








4.8 Removing finished sets from large capacity stackerLS-501

The large capacity stacker LS-501 can hold 5,000 output sheets (2,000sheets for B5 and A5) at maximum.

Follow the procedure below to take out paper from the stacker.

2

NoteThe paper stopper is provided to secure the paper in position when

moving the carriage.

To remove finished sets

1 Press the Paper removal button.

The stacker unit will move down tothe carriage.

2 Open the large capacity stacker

door.

– Once the stacker holds a sheet ofoutput paper, the large capacitystacker door will be locked and

cannot open till the stacker unitgoes down fully to the carriage.








2

ReminderThe carriage is for the exclusive use of carrying paper. Do not drive it in

any other use.

Never put yourself in the large capacity stacker.

Once lowering the stacker unit for the purpose of removing mishandled

paper or checking output sheets, be sure to remove all the sheets from

the carriage. If the carriage is returned with any sheets left on the stacker

unit, machine trouble may be caused.

When returning the stacker unit to its original position, fit the two

projections of the carriage to the two holes of the stacker unit, otherwise

the carriage cannot be returned properly.








5 Remove the paper stopper from thepaper holder.

– Pull up and turn the paperstopper as illustrated.

– Remove the stopper from thepaper holder.

6 Return the paper stopper to itsoriginal position.

Return the paper stopper properly;otherwise the stacker door may notbe closed.






5Before making copies






Before making copies 5



5.1 Control panel and basic screens

5.1.1 Control panel

1

2

3

4

5

6789101112

13

14

1516

17

18

19









1 [COPY] tab Touched to display the Copy screen.

2 Color mode area Used to specify the desired color mode (single color,black, full color, or auto color).

3 [SCAN] tab Used to display the Scanner screen.

4 [Zoom] key Touched to select the desired magnification ratio usingpreset ratios, user preset ratios, zoom mode or verti-cal/horizontal zoom mode.

5 [e 1.0] key Touched to copy in 1.000 magnification ratio.

6 [Auto Zoom] key Touched to activate the Auto Zoom mode.

7 [JOB LIST] tab Used to display the Job List screen.

8 Set Number indicator Indicates the print quantity entered from the control panelkeypad.

9 [Application] key Touched to select various application functions.

10 [MACHINE] tab Used to display the Machine Status screen.

11 Output indicator Indicates the print count while printing.

12 [Quality Adjust.] key Touched to specify the image quality of the originals, in-cluding copy density, color adjustment, etc.

13 [Paper Setting] key Touched to use different paper type from that indicatedon the tray key.

14 Tray keys Display specified paper setting and amount remaining ineach tray.

15 [Auto Paper Select] key Touched to activate APS (Automatic Paper Selection).

16 [Rotation Off] key Touched to release the Rotation function.17 Simplex/Duplex mode area Used to select the copy mode (1-1, 1-2, 2-1, or 2-2).

18 [Punch] key Touched to use Punch mode.

19 [Staple] key Touched to use Staple mode.

20 Output icon area Displays the icon of the output settings currently speci-fied.

21 [Output Appli.] key Touched to specify the desired output mode.

22 [Separate Scan] key Touched to store scanned images into memory.

23 Original icon area Displays the icon of the original settings currently speci-fied.

24 [Original Setting] key Touched to specify the condition of the original to bescanned.

25 Machine status icons Display to indicate various machine status.

26 Message area Displays the machine status and procedure required atthat time.









1 [COPY] tab Touched to display the Copy screen.

2 [SCAN] tab Used to display the Scanner screen.

3 [JOB LIST] tab Touched to display the Job List screen.

4 [MACHINE] tab Touched to display the Machine Status screen, andblinks in red when machine trouble occurs.

5 Count/Set indicator Indicates the print quantity entered from the control panelkeypad, and also indicates the print count on the left ofthe set count while printing.

6 Tray setting list Displays the paper setting made for each tray, and alsodisplays the paper sizes loaded in the Post inserter. Thecurrently selected tray will be indicated in different color.

7 Job list Displays the current status of the jobs to be operated onthe machine.

8 [Controller] key Touched to set the controller.(Controller setting is not

available for the machine without optional printer control-ler.)

9 [Adjustment] key Touched to make adjustments of the machine and op-tional equipment.

10 [Both Sides Adj.] key Touched to make adjustments of the image to be printedon both sides of paper loaded in each tray.

11 [Paper Setting] key Touched to make paper setting for each tray

12 Maintenance & supply indica-tors

Light in red when toner/staple supply is required or whentrash basket is full.

13 Machine status display Prompts you if any door or cover is open.

14 Scanner message Displays the current status of scanning job.

15 Icon area Displays various machine status icons.

16 Message area Displays messages concerning machine status.








5.2 General copy operation

Follow the procedure below to make a basic copy.

How to make a basic copy

0 The following procedure is basic and not always applicable to the

operation of selected copy conditions. When using a specific function, besure to follow the procedure described in each section.

1 Position the original.

– For details on positioning theoriginal, see page 5-15.








– If No is touched, the Machine Status screen will be restored.

The current job will be displayed in the job list, with the count/set

quantity indicated at the upper right corner of the screen.

!DetailThe screen to be displayed after machine power is turned on can be

selected either from the Machine Status screen (initially selected) or the

Copy screen. The popup menu will vary depending on this selection.

The Job List screen is provided to change the operation order of reserve

jobs or cancel the reserve job. See page 11-3 for details.

To suspend the job in progress, press [Stop].For details, see "To stop scanning/printing" on page 5-26.








3 Adjust paper guides.

2

ReminderOnce closed, do not open the document feeder, otherwise the selected

copy conditions may be altered automatically.








Positioning the original in mixed mode

Mixed size originals can be copied together from the document feeder.For the sizes available in the Mixed mode, see page 3-15.

1 Arrange the original in order.

– Arrange the mixed sizes originalsaligning them to the left anddepth as shown in the illustration.

2 Position the original FACE UP (with page one UP) in the ADF.

– The direction of the original should conform to the original directionicon displayed on the Copy screen.

Up to 100 sheets of the original can be set at a time.


2

ReminderOnce closed, do not open the document feeder, otherwise the selected


!DetailTo use the mixed mode, see procedure on page 6-11.

To thedepth To the left

Settingdirection








Positioning the original in Z-folded mode

Z-folded mode detects the folded original size without using the sizedetection sensor of the ADF.For the sizes available in the Z-folded mode, see p. 3-16.

1 Arrange the original in order.

2 Position the original FACE UP (with page one UP) in the ADF.

– The direction of the original should conform to the original directionicon displayed on the Copy screen.Up to 100 sheets of the original can be set at a time.


2ReminderOnce closed, do not open the document feeder, otherwise the selected


!DetailTo use the Z-folded original mode, see procedure on page 6-13.








5.3.2 Positioning the original on original glass

Use the original glass when the original is not suitable for use with the ADF,e.g., when size is incompatible, or when the original is folded, stapled, torn,

or in generally poor condition.

!DetailFor details of the original unavailable in the ADF, see page 3-14.

0 Copy result may not be satisfactory if the original should not bepositioned correctly, especially when using duplex mode, Staple, HalfFold, or Booklet Pagination. See page 6-3 for details.

0 When Book Copy, Auto mode in Repeat, or Image Centering is selected,the ADF should be kept open while scanning the original. For details oneach function, see "8 Application functions".

1 Raise the ADF.

2 Position the original FACE DOWN in the left rear corner, aligning theedge with the left measuring guide.

– The direction of the original should conform to the Original directionicon displayed on the Copy screen.

3 Gently close the ADF to prevent the original from shifting on the glass.








5.4 Setting print quantity

This section describes how to set or change the print quantity.

To set print quantity

The machine is initially set to copy the original set in amounts determined by

the print quantity setting, then output sorted sets.

0 Print quantity can be entered in any instance of the procedure unless thecontrol panel keypad is temporarily used for entering other values.

1 Enter the desired print quantity fromthe control panel keypad.

Entered quantity will be displayed on the touch panel.








To change print quantity

Follow the procedure below to change the print quantity that has beenalready entered.

1 Press [C] (clear quantity).

The quantity displayed on the touchpanel will return to 1.

2 Enter the correct quantity from the control panel keypad.

Newly entered quantity will be displayed on the touch panel.








5.5 Setting job during warmup

While the machine is warming up after power is turned on, you can selectcopy conditions and start scanning so that the machine may start printingimmediately the machine engine is ready.Service can set the machine to disable this function. Contact your service

representative, if desired.








To scan the original during warmup

1 Turn on the main power switch and sub power switch of the machine.

– For details on turning on the power, see page 2-23.

2 Display the Copy screen to check that the message "Ready to set

reserve job" is displayed in the message area.

– A few seconds after the Wake-up screen appears on the touchpanel, the Machine Status screen with four types of warm-up imagewill be displayed in succession.Touch [COPY] tab to change the Machine Status screen to display

the Copy screen, then check that the message "Ready to setreserve job" is displayed in the message area.








3 Set the desired copy conditions, and enter the print quantity.

– For details on setting print quantity, see page 5-20.

4 Position the original FACE UP in the ADF or FACE DOWN on theoriginal glass.

– For details on positioning the original, see page 5-15.

5 Press [Start].

– When scanning the original for the job is started, the popup menu

will appear on the Copy screen.

Touch [Yes] or [Close] to return to the Copy screen to make anotherreserve job setting. See page 6-63 for details.








If [No] is touched, the Machine Status screen will be restored.

The current job will be displayed in the job list, with the count/set

quantity indicated at the upper right corner of the screen.

!DetailThe screen to be displayed after machine power is turned on can be

selected either from the Machine Status screen (initially selected) or the

Copy screen. The popup menu will vary depending on this selection.

The Job List screen is provided to change the operation order of reserve

jobs or cancel the reserve job. See page 11-3 for details.

To suspend the job in progress, press [Stop].For details, see "To stop scanning/printing" on page 5-26.








5.6 To stop scanning/printing

This section describes how to stop the job currently in process (scanning,printing, or both of scanning and printing).

To stop scanning/printing

0 This procedure is effective only for the job in progress. To stop reserved jobs on standby, operate on the Job List screen. See Section 14 fordetails.

1 Press [Stop] on the control panelwhile the current job is in progress.

– With the popup menu displayedright after pressing [Start] forscanning the original of reserve

job, the current job cannot be

canceled even if [Stop] ispressed. According to theprocedure on page 5-31, touchan appropriate key on the popupmenu to clear it.

The current machine operation of the selected job will be suspended,and the popup menu will be displayed on the Copy screen.

2 Touch the desired key on the popup menu.

– The popup menu will vary according to the job in progress.








Both scanning and printing are in progress

% Touch [Stop Job] to cancel the job, or touch [Continue] to complete the job.

2

ReminderTouching [Stop Job] will delete all the scanned data.








Scanning a job in separate scan mode


2









Batch printing is in progress


2









Scanning and printing the job using program job


2









Scanning reserve job while printing

Select to stop scanning, printing, or to stop both operation.

1 Start scanning the reserve job while printing.

The following popup menu will be displayed.

2 Touch [No] to restore the Machine Status screen.

– If machine has been set to display the Copy screen as the initialscreen, touch [MACHINE] tab to restore the Machine Status screen.

3 Press [Stop].

Machine operation will be ceased, and the following popup menu willbe displayed.








4 Select the job to cancel.

– Touch [Scan] to stop scanning the reserve job and continueprinting.Touch [Print] to stop printing and continue the scanning job.Touch [Scan/Print] to cancel both scanning and printing jobs.Touch [Continue] to complete both jobs.

2

Reminder All the data scanned for stopped job will be deleted.






6Basic job settings






Basic job settings 6



6.1 Original setting

This section describes how to specify the original types and direction.

6.1.1 Selecting binding direction of the original: Bind Direction

When copying double-sided originals in 2-1 or 2-2 mode, the copied sets willbe exactly the same in page arrangement as the originals.Use this function to obtain the single- or double-sided copies having thesame edge as page top, from double-sided originals printed upside down onthe reverse side.

!DetailSee "Setting binding direction for duplex copies" on page 9-7 to make

double-sided copies upside down on the reverse side, using the originals

having the same edge as page top.

Original direction

Duplex originals

2-1 copying

2-2 copying








0 Top binding is available only in 2-1 or 2-2 copy mode.

0 If the machine restores the initial setting, this function will be reset to

Right& Left binding.

0 The machine is set to match the binding direction of the original with thebinding direction of copies in Output Application setting automatically.For details, see p. 16-18, p. 16-45 or p. 17-134.


2 Touch [Original Setting] on the Copy screen.

The Original Setting screen will be displayed.

3 Touch [Top] in the Bind Direction area to highlight it.

4 Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the Copy screen.

– Touch [Default Set] to restore the initial setting, or touch [Cancel] toresume the previous setting.








6.1.2 Specifying orientation of the original: Direction

Specify the orientation of the original placed in the ADF or on original glass.Without this setting, the copy results may not be obtained as expected,

especially when making copies under following conditions.- Copying from double-sided original- Making double-sided copies

- Combine Originals

- Booklet Pagination- Book Copy

- Staple, etc.

Using ADF Using originalglass

Key Description

Select for the original positioned withthe top toward the rear of the machine.Initially selected as factory default.

Select for the original positioned withthe top toward the front of the machine.

Select for the original positioned in the ADF with the top toward the left side ofthe machine.Or, select for the original positioned onthe original glass with the top towardthe right side of the machine.

Select for the original positioned in the ADF with the top toward the right side ofthe machine.

Or, select for the original positioned onthe original glass with the top towardthe left side of the machine.

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1











3 Touch the desired original direction key to highlight it.










6.1.3 Specifying original type: Image/Type

Image

Select one of the following modes according to the original image type, sothat the copy quality more closely matches to that of the original.

This setting is effective when making copies in Full Color, Single Color, orBlack mode.

!DetailThe screen type can be selected automatically to match with the

Text/Photo or Photo mode when specified.

This function is provided in the User setting. For details, see page 16-57.

The density level can be shifted in each of four Image modes.

This function is provided in the User setting. For details, see page 17-28.








Key Description

Select for copying the original including both text and photo image.This mode is specified as factory default.

Select to reproduce a half-tone photo image. The copy will closely rep-resent the half-tones of the original image.

Select for copying the original composed of text only.In this mode, the edges of copied text will be sharpened to providehigher legibility.

Select for copying colored original with small text, such as a map.

Text/PhotoOriginal

Original Photo

Original Text








Type

Use this function to improve the image quality by specifying the printedoriginal type.

Key Description

Select for normal original.

Select for photo-printed original.

Select for copied original.

Select for original printed using ink-jet printer.











3 Touch the desired mode key to highlight it.

– Select the desired mode for each of Image and Type.










6.1.4 Copying mixed size originals: Mixed

Use the Mixed mode to copy the mixed size original set scanned from the ADF with Auto Paper Select or Auto Zoom activated.

Function Description

Auto Paper Select Makes a copy of the same size as the original set.

Auto Zoom Copies onto a single and desired paper size in appropriate zoom

ratio automatically selected for each original page.








0 Load the original in the ADF.

0 Combination of the original sizes to be mixed depends on the widest

original width (width of the ADF original guides). See "Positioningoriginals into the ADF" on page 5-15 for details.

0 Do not load more than 100 sheets of the original, otherwise the originalmay be misfed or damaged, or machine trouble may be caused.

If the number of original sheets exceeds 100, divide them into blocks toscan. For details, see "Separate Scan mode" on page 6-23.

0 To scan the original from the original glass, Separate Scan mode isrequired. For details, see "Separate Scan mode" on page 6-23.

0 With Mixed specified, Auto Paper Select will function automatically.

To copy onto a single and desired paper size, manually specify AutoZoom. For details, see page 6-32.


– Arrange the mixed size originals aligning the left and rear sides.For details, see "Positioning originals into the ADF" on page 5-15.



3 Touch [Mixed] to highlight it.










6.1.5 Copying Z-folded original: Z-Folded

Use the Z-folded mode with the document feeder to copy Z-folded originals.Otherwise, the size detection sensor of the ADF may function incorrectly.

0 Load the original in the ADF.0 This mode requires more scanning time to detect the original size.


– Normal originals can be set together with the Z-folded original.



3 Touch [Z-Folded] to highlight it.

4 Touch [OK] to return to the Copy screen.


Z-folded original








6.1.6 Specifying original thickness: Thickness

Use this function with the ADF to copy thin or thick originals.


0 Avoid using thin mode for double-sided originals, otherwise the originals

may be damaged.

0 This function is compatible with all the other functions.

1 Position the original in the ADF.



3 Touch [Thin] or [Thick] to highlight it.

– For the original of normal thickness (50 g/m2 to 128 g/m2 ), select[Normal].



Key Description

Select for the original weight 129g/m2 to 200 g/m2.

Select for the original weight 35g/m2 to 49g/m2.








6.1.7 Copying non-standard size original: Custom

The machine usually detects the standard size of the original fed through ADF or positioned on the original glass (Standard mode).

Use the Custom mode to specify the desired standard size as scanning areairrespective of actual size of the original.

This function also allows you to specify/register the desired special size in1 mm increments, and to recall the registered size when needed.

0 Use [Full Area] on the Custom Size menu for small original that cannot bedetected in Standard mode.

0 Special sizes can be registered in this mode. Registered size informationcan be utilized later for both the original and copy paper size setting.




3 Touch [Custom].

The Custom Size screen will be displayed.








– Specifying a special size:

(1) Touch [Size Input] to display the Size Setting screen.(2) Select the lengthwise/widthwise dimension key to highlight it,then use [+], [,] or touch screen keypad to enter the desiredspecial size within the available range from 100 to 303 mm inlengthwise dimension, from 140 to 438 mm in widthwise dimension.

(3) Touch [OK] to return to the Custom Size screen with specifiedsize displayed.








– Registering a special size:

(1) Touch [Size Input] to display the Size Setting screen.(2) Select the lengthwise/widthwise dimension key to highlight it,then use [+], [,], or touch screen keypad to enter the desiredspecial size within the available range from 100 to 303 mm inlengthwise dimension, from 140 to 438 mm in widthwise dimension.

(3) Touch [Size Registration] to display the Size Registration screen.(4) Touch the desired number key to highlight it, using [Next] and[Previous] as needed. Select the key with a name displayed to

overwrite the size and name registered for that key.

(5) Touch [Add] to display the Input Custom Size Name screen.

Touching [Delete] will display a popup menu to confirm the datadeletion. Touch [Yes] to delete the data registered for that key.








(6) Enter the desired name, then touch [OK] to return to the previousscreen.(7) Touch [Close] to restore the Size Setting screen.(8) Touch [OK] to return to the Custom Size screen with specifiedsize displayed.

– Recalling a special size: (1) Touch [Size Input] to display the Size Setting screen.(2) Touch [Size Recall] to display the Size Recall screen.

(3) Touch the desired number key to highlight it, using [Next] and[Previous] as needed.

(4) Touch [OK] to restore the Size Setting screen with recalled sizedisplayed.(5) Touch [OK] to return to the Custom Size screen with specified

size displayed.








5 Touch [OK].

The Original Setting screen will be restored.


– Touch [Default Set] to restore the initial setting, or touch [Cancel] to

resume the previous setting.








6.1.8 Copying tabbed originals: Tab Paper

Use Tab Paper mode to scan A4 v or 8.5"e11"v tabbed original in order toprint it including the tab part.

!DetailSee page 4-20 for details on loading tabbed copy paper in a tray.

0 Available tabbed copy paper sizes are A4v or 8.5" e 11"v.

0 When loading tabbed copy paper in a tray, specify the paper type as Tab

Paper for that tray in Paper Setting. See page 6-48 for details.

0 Tab extension width for tabbed original: 12.5 mm or less

0 The magnification ratio will be fixed to 1.000 (100%).




3 Touch [Tab Paper].

The Tab Paper screen will be displayed.








4 Touch the desired size key to highlight it, then touch [OK].

The Original Setting screen will be restored.










6.2 Separate Scan mode

A large amount of the original can be divided and scanned into memory.The ADF accepts only 100 sheets at a time, however, the Separate Scanmode allows you to handle the original that exceeds 100 sheets as a single

job.

The multiple original scanned from the original glass, or both from the ADFand original glass, can also be combined into a single job.

0 Note that the maximum number of the original available in the ADF doesnot change in this mode. Do not load more than 100 original sheets orabove the limit mark ( , ), otherwise paper misfeed or damage to theoriginal may be caused.

0 Separate Scan mode is necessarily used and operates automatically in

the following functions:Making double-sided copies using original glassInsert Image

Book CopyProgram JobStoring image in Program Overlay


– Using the original glass, place thefirst page FACE DOWN on theoriginal glass.

– Using the ADF, load the originalarranged in page order with pageone on the top.

2 Make copying selections on the Copy screen, as desired.








3 Touch [Separate Scan] to highlight it.

The Separate Scan mode will be activated. If this key is already

highlighted, the Separate Scan mode has been activated automaticallydue to some copy selection.

4 Press [Start] on the control panel.

The machine starts scanning the

original.

5 Replace the original, then press[Start].

– Memory indicator under themessage area of the touch panelallows you to check the

remaining memory.

– Repeat steps 4 and 5 for alloriginal pages to be scanned.

6 When scanning is completed, touch [Separate Scan] to exit theSeparate Scan mode.








7 Enter the desired print quantity, thenpress [Start].

All the data in memory will be output.

!DetailTo delete the scanned data without printing or to suspend the printing

job, press [Stop]. See "To stop scanning/printing" on page 5-26 for

details.








6.3 Selecting color mode

The following four modes are available:

- Single Color mode copies in one color selected from red, green, blue,magenta, cyan, and yellow.

- Black mode makes black-and-white copies whether the original image is

colored or not.- Full Color mode makes full-colored copies whether the original image is

colored or not.

- Auto Color mode detects whether the scanned original is colored orblack-and-white image, and automatically selects either Full Color modeor Black mode for copying.

0 This machine is provided with color adjustment function. See "7 Coloradjustment".

0 Some adjustments cannot be made in Black and Single Color modes:Hue/Saturation/Brightness, Color Balance, Dot in screen, Color Text in

Image Distinction Level, Type in Original Setting


2 Touch the desired color mode key on the Copy screen to highlight it.

– [Full Color] is already highlighted if initial settings are restored.








– Touching Single Color will display the Single Color screen. Selectthe desired color key, then touch [OK].

3 Select additional copy conditions, as desired.

4 Enter the desired print quantity, then press [Start] on the control panel.








6.4 Zoom

In the initial settings on the Copy screen, the magnification is automaticallyset at 1.000 (full size).

This section describes how to change the magnification ratio.

6.4.1 Copying in 1.000 magnification modeFollow this procedure to make a 100% copy of the original image.

1 Press [Reset] on the control panel. If the machine is equipped with the

ADF, close it securely before pressing [Reset].

– The initial setting will be restored. Check that [e 1.0] is highlightedto indicate that the 1.000 magnification is selected.


– Specifying paper size will release 1.000 magnification and set AutoZoom automatically. In this case, touch [e 1.0] to highlight it again.

!DetailThe initial settings may be altered by the machine manager. For details,

see page 16-39.








6.4.2 Changing magnification ratio

The following four modes are provided.- Zoom (proportional): 0.250 to 4.000 in 0.001 (0.1%) increments

- Zoom (individual): Vertical and horizontal zoom ratios can be specifiedindividually within the range from 0.250 to 4.000 in 0.001 (0.1%)increments.

- Enlarge/Reduce: Select one from the eight ratios (0.500, 0.707, 0.816,0.866, 1.154, 1.224, 1.414, 2.000) provided on the screen.

- Set Zoom: Select one from the three ratios previously programmed.

!DetailThe Enlarge/Reduce and Set Zoom ratio setting is described on

page 16-22 and page 16-39.

1 Touch [Zoom] on the Copy screen.

2 Specify the desired magnification.

– Zoom (proportional):

Touch to highlight the proportional zoom key at the upper left

corner in the Zoom area.Then, use the screen keypad to enter the desired magnificationratio. The entered ratio will be displayed on the screen.

If wrong number is entered, continue by entering the correctnumber.

Touching arrow keys [+] and [,] will change the ratio in 0.001(0.1%) steps.








– Zoom (individual):

Touch to highlight the vertical zoom key (the second one in the leftside line) in the Zoom area, then use the screen keypad to enter thedesired lengthwise magnification ratio.Similarly, touch the horizontal zoom key (the third one in the leftside line) to enter the desired widthwise magnification ratio. The

entered ratio will be displayed on the screen.

If wrong number is entered, continue by entering the correctnumber.Touching arrow keys [+] and [,] will change the ratio in 0.001(0.1%) steps

– Enlarge/Reduce:

Touch the desired zoom key in the Enlarge/Reduce area.








0 Specify the original direction on the Original Setting screen according tothat of the original loaded in the ADF.

0 The double-sided copies can be arranged upside down on the backpages.

0 The normal double-sided copies (having the same edge as page top) canbe made from double-sided originals printed upside down on the back

pages.

0 The machine is set to match the original binding direction and copybinding direction automatically. For details, see page 16-18, page 16-45or page 17-134.


2 Touch [1->2] or [2->2] on the Copy screen to highlight it.








– Selecting the binding direction of double-sided copies:

(1) Touch [Output Appli.] on the Copy screen to display the Output Application screen.(2) Touch the desired binding direction key to highlight it. To makedouble-sided copies arranged upside down on the back pages,select [Top].

(3) Touch [OK] to return to the Copy screen.

For details in specifying binding direction of double-sided copies,see page 9-7.








6.5.2 Making double-sided copies using original glass

Use the original glass to scan originals unsuitable for the document feeder.

0 Use the Separate Scan mode.

0 Specify the original direction on the Original Setting screen according tothat of the original placed on the original glass.

0 Double-sided copies can be arranged upside down on the back pages.

0 The machine is set to match the original binding direction and copybinding direction automatically. For details, see page 16-18, page 16-45or page 17-134.

1 Position the original on the originalglass.

– Open the ADF. Position the firstpage of the original FACE DOWN,

then close the ADF.– If Book Copy, Non-Image Area

Erase, Size Auto Detect mode ofImage Repeat, or ImageCentering is selected, keep the

ADF open throughout the

scanning procedure.

2 Touch [1->2] on the Copy screen to highlight it.

– The Separate Scan key will be automatically highlighted on thescreen.

– DO NOT press [Reset] at this point, otherwise the Separate Scanmode will be released to disable the machine from scanning theoriginal placed on the original glass.








7 When all originals are scanned, touch [Separate Scan] to exit theSeparate Scan mode.

8 Press [Start] to print.

All the data in memory will be output.

!DetailTo delete the scanned data without printing, or to suspend the printing

job, press [Stop]. For details, see "To stop scanning/printing" on

page 5-26.








6.5.3 Making single-sided copies from double-sided originals

Use ADF and select [2->1] mode to make single-sided copies from double-sided originals.

0 Specify the original direction on the Original Setting screen according tothat of the original loaded in the ADF.

0 The normal single-sided copies (having the same edge as page top) canbe made from double-sided originals printed upside down on the backpages.


2-1 copying

Double-sided original

Simplex copy

Front Front Back








6.6.1 Selecting paper size automatically: Auto Paper Select

Auto Paper Select detects the original size placed on the ADF or originalglass and automatically selects and feeds copy paper of the same size ( e1.0

magnification mode), or selects an appropriate size according to themagnification ratio selected (Zoom mode).

!DetailThe original sizes to be detected from the ADF or original glass are

previously determined. See page 3-14 for details.

The original sizes to be detected from the ADF or original glass can be

changed. For details, see page 17-73.

The machine manager can designate the tray or paper condition

incompatible with Auto Paper Select. For details, see page 16-12.

The machine can be set to deactivate Auto Paper Select when original is

set in the ADF or on the original glass.

0 Auto Paper Select is incompatible with Auto Zoom, while Rotation isavailable.

0 Auto Paper Select will not select the tray of the size specified as Custom.

1 Press [Reset] on the control panel. If the machine is equipped with the

ADF, close it securely before pressing [Reset].

– [Auto Paper Select] is initially selected on the Copy screen.









– The tray loaded with an appropriate paper size will be selectedautomatically.Or, a message will be prompt you that the appropriate size cannotbe found in any tray. In this case, load the paper of the size referredin the message.

2

Reminder Auto Paper Select may not function for the tray of selected size due to

the paper specifications registered for that tray.








6.6.2 Turning on/off the rotation

This function allows you to utilize Auto Paper Select or Auto Zoom and copythe original documents onto size A4 or B5, irrespective of the copy paper

feeding direction.

!DetailThe machine can be set to change the timing to operate this function.For

details, see page 16-45 or page 17-134.

The copier is initially set to activate the Rotation function automatically.

Follow the procedure below to release/resume this function.

Original OriginalCopy Copy

Rotation copyingRotation copying

Normal copying

Normal copying

A3

B4

A4

B5

A4

A4 B5

B5

B5

B5

B5

A4

A4

A4








0 Copy paper sizes: A4v / w, B5v / w

0 Original sizes: A3w, B4w, A4v / w, B5v / w

1 Touch [Rotation Off] on the Copy screen to highlight it.

When Rotation is released, the Rotation icon on the Copy screen will

disappear to indicate that this function is cancelled.

2 Touch to deselect [Rotation Off] to resume this function.

When Rotation is resumed, the Rotation icon will be displayed on thescreen.








4 Select the tray to change the setting temporarily.

– Touch the desired tray key in the left side area of the screen.

5 Change the setting of paper specifications.

– Change the paper specifications of the tray either by selecting theone previously registered or by programing a new setting.

– To recall a setting:

(1) Touch [Recall].(2) Use [Next] or [Previous] to scroll the list to the desired PaperType key, then touch the key to highlight it.(3) Touch [OK] to return to the Paper Setting screen.

(4) Touch [Size Setting] to specify the paper size. For setting

procedure, see step 6.(5) Touch [OK] to return to the Paper Setting screen.








The tray 5 and Multi-sheet bypass tray exclusively allow theselection of 257 - 300g/m2.

(4) Touch [Both Sides Adj].Touch [Front] or [Back] to select the printed side, select theadjustment item (vertical zoom, horizontal zoom, vertical shift,

horizontal shift, or registration loop), and then touch [+ <--> –] tospecify the value to be positive or negative. Use the screen keypador arrow keys [+] and [,] to enter the desired adjustment value.Touch [OK] to complete the setting, or touch [Reset] to clear thesetting.








(5) Touch [Speed Setting]. Select the desired speed key, then touch[OK].

This setting is unavailable if paper weight is specified as 106 -135 g/m2.

(6) Make a selection for Hole-Punch.

Touch [Punched] if the paper has punch holes, or touch [NoPunched] if not, then touch [OK].








(7) Make a selection for Colored Paper.Touch [Non White] when using colored paper, or touch [White] forwhite paper.

(8) Touch [OK] to return to the Paper Setting screen with the newspecifications displayed.

The paper specifications made in this step can be registered. Fordetails, see chapter "13 Paper setting".








6 Change the paper size temporarily.

– Select one of the following three options:Standard, Custom, Tab Paper

– To set the desired standard size:

(1) Touch [Size Setting], then touch [Standard] to highlight it.

The tray can be set to detect some specific standard sizes, ifdesired.Touch [Search Size Set], select the desired size to highlight it, thentouch [OK].

(2) Touch [OK] to complete the setting.








– To set the desired custom size:

(1) Touch [Size Setting], then touch [Custom].(2) Select the lengthwise/widthwise dimension key to highlight it,then use [+], [,], or touch screen keypad to enter the desiredspecial size.Entered size should fall within 140 - 330 mm in lengthwise

dimension, 182 - 487 mm in widthwise dimension.(3) Similarly, touch the trimming width key to highlight it, then enterthe desired amount. With the Trimming mode selected, the

machine will output printed sets trimmed by the specified amount.Entered amount should fall within 1 - 40 mm.(4) Touch [Lead Edge], [Rear Edge], or [Center] to specify thedesired image position.(5) Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the PaperSetting screen.Touching [Fix] will complete the setting and directly return to the

Copy screen.








– To register the desired custom size:

(1) Touch [Size Setting], then touch [Custom].(2) Select the lengthwise/widthwise dimension key to highlight it,then use [+], [,], or touch screen keypad to enter the desiredspecial size.Entered size should fall within 140 - 330 mm in lengthwise

dimension, 182 - 487 mm in widthwise dimension.(3) Similarly, touch the trimming width key to highlight it, then enterthe desired amount. With the Trimming mode selected, the

machine will output printed sets trimmed by the specified amount.Entered amount should fall within 1 - 40 mm.(4) Touch [Lead Edge], [Rear Edge], or [Center] to specify thedesired image position.(5) Touch [Size Registration] to display the Size Registration screen.(6) Touch the desired number key to highlight it, using [Next] and[Previous] as needed. Select the key with a name displayed to

overwrite the size and name registered for that key.(7) Touch [Add] to display the Input Custom Size Name screen.Touching [Delete] will display a popup menu to confirm the datadeletion. Touch [Yes] to delete the data registered for that key.

(8) Enter the desired name, then touch [OK] to return to the previous

screen.(9) Touch [Close] to restore the Size Setting screen.(10) Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the PaperSetting screen.Touching [Fix] will complete the setting and directly return to theCopy screen.








– To recall a registered custom size:

(1) Touch [Size Setting], then touch [Custom].(2) Touch [Size Recall] to display the Size Recall screen.(3) Touch the desired number key to highlight it, using [Next] and[Previous] as needed.

(4) Touch [OK] to restore the Size Setting screen with recalled sizedisplayed.(5) Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the PaperSetting screen.Touching [Fix] will complete the setting and directly return to theCopy screen.

The smallest size of the custom size can be changed. Contact yourservice representative for details.








– To set a tabbed paper size:

(1) Touch [Size Setting], then touch [Tab Paper].(2) Touch the desired tabbed paper size key to highlight it.(3) Touch [OK] to complete the setting.

7 Touch [Close] on the Paper Setting screen.

The Copy screen will be restored with the new paper specificationsdisplayed on the specified tray key.








2

NoteTo output a chart for the Both Sides Adjustment, follow the procedure

below to set the adjustment value.

(1) Touch [Front] on the Both Sides Adjustment screen to select the

printed side, then touch [Chart Adjustment].

(2) Touch [COPY] tab to display the Copy screen.

(3) Press [Start] on the control panel to output a chart. Touch [Return] to

restore the Chart Adjustment screen.

(4)Enter the adjustment data of the front side.

With Front selected:

Use a scale to measure. Enter the adjustment value from the screen

keypad.

Setting range: 0.0 to 999.9

(5) Touch [Adjustment Start].

(6)Repeat steps (2) to (5) until the desired result is obtained.

Touch [Close] to complete the front side setting.

(7) Similarly, touch [Back] and repeat the chart adjustment, if desired.








6.6.4 Adjusting fixing pressure of fixing unit

If printed image on large-sized paper becomes rugged, lowering the fixingpressure of the fixing unit may normalize the image. Reversely, if the image

duplex-printed on small-sized thick paper shows unevenness, adding fixingpressure of the fixing unit may reduce the unevenness.

Follow the procedure below to adjust the fixing pressure of the fixing unit.

1 Open the front door of the main body.

2 Turn the fixing conveyance unit leverleftward to withdraw the conveyancefixing unit.

3 Holding the handle on the left side ofthe fixing unit, push it up to open theleft side cover of the fixing unit.

4 Move the fixing pressure adjustmentknob.

– Slide the knob rightward to alignthe arrow mark on the lever withthe one on the right side, if

printed image on large-sizedpaper becomes rugged.








– Slide the knob leftward to alignthe arrow mark on the lever withthe one on the left side, if theimage duplex-printed on small-sized thick paper showsunevenness.

5 Close the left side cover of the fixing unit, return the fixing conveyanceunit to its original position, then close the front door of the main body.

6 Operate the copying/printing job.

– The fixing pressure adjustment

knob should not be movedunless the copy/print resultrequires the adjustment.When copying/printing is

completed with the knob moved,be sure to return it to the originalposition where the arrow mark onthe knob meets that in themiddle.

7 CAUTIONThe internal fixing unit is very hot.% To avoid getting burned, DO NOT TOUCH.








6.7 Setting reserve job

The Reserve function allows you to set up a new job while a current job is inprocess. When the current job is finished, the reserve job starts printingimmediately.

Service can set the machine to disable this function. Contact your service

representative, if desired.

0 Job settings: max. 100

0 The reserve job setting will be available after the copier starts to scan thecurrent job, and also available anytime while printing the current job.

1 Display the Copy screen with the message "Ready to set reserve job"displayed in the message area.

– When scanning job is started:

The following popup menu will be displayed.

Touch [Yes] to set reserve job. The Copy screen for setting reserve job will be displayed.

Touching [No] will return to the Machine Status screen. In this case,touching [COPY] tab will display the Copy screen and allows you to

make the reserve job setting.

If the machine is initially set to display the Copy screen afterscanning job is started, the above popup menu will provide only the[Close] key. Touching [Close] will also display the Copy screen tomake the reserve job setting.








– While printing job is in progress:

The message “Printing in progress” is displayed in the messagearea of the Machine Status screen.Touch [COPY] tab to display the Copy screen with the message“Ready to set reserve Job”.

2 Select copy conditions for the reserve job as desired, positionoriginal(s), then press [Start].

– Repeat steps 1 and 2. Up to 100 reserve jobs can be entered.

– To check and operate the reserve jobs, touch [JOB LIST] tab todisplay the Job List screen. See page 11-3 for details.

!DetailIf any trouble occurs on a reserve job, see page 23-9.








6.8 Copy conditions incompatible with basic job settings







bizhub PRO C6500 / bizhub PRO C6500e 6-67loaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine







None: Compatible

o: Grayed out

1: Condition last selected has priority. (Condition in the far left column willbe released.)

A: Condition in the top row is selected automatically. Unreleasable.

B: Condition in the top row is selected automatically. Releasable.

C: Not specified

D: Condition in the far left column does not function (ignored).

E: Not grayed out but unavailable

*1 Separate Scan mode is selected automatically.

*2 1->1 mode is selected automatically.

*3 Rotation without Auto Zoom is unavailable in Mixed.

*5 Using IP scanner, Automatic exposure is unavailable.

*6 Image Distinction Level: Color Text only is grayed out or releasedautomatically.

*8 1->2 or 2->2 mode is selected automatically.

*9 After making proof copy, Simplex/Duplex mode can be altered in

printing side only. 2->1 and 2->2 appear grayed out when 1->1 or 1->2 isselected, and vice versa.

*11 1->1 or 1->2 mode is selected automatically. With 1->2 selected,

Separate Scan mode is also selected.*12 ADF mode is activated automatically.

*13 Full Color mode is selected automatically.

*14 1->1 or 1->2 mode is selected automatically.

*17 Output tray is limited to the secondary (sub) tray.

*18 Auto Paper Select is unavailable with the ADF kept open. (The message"Select paper size" will be displayed when [Start] is pressed.)






7Color adjustment






Color adjustment 7


7 Color adjustment

7.1 About colors

RGB and CMYK models

Have you ever wondered why the world surrounding us appears colored toour eyes?Light is electromagnetic waves with wavelengths between about 380 -780 nm, also called visible rays. The wavelengths of visible rays can beseparated into the rainbow colors violet, indigo, blue, green, yellow, orange,

and red, from the shortest wavelength in order. When all the wavelengths ofthe visible rays strike your eye at the same time, white color is perceived.We see the objects in color because they reflect or transmit visible light of

different wavelengths or frequencies.

PrismSlit

White light

Light

Reflection

Color

Visible rays Electromagnetic wave

(nm)

(m)






7 Color adjustment


The colors separated from visible light are called primary colors. Primarycolors cannot be produced from other colors. These colors, however, can becombined to make up any other color (color mixture).

The color mixture provides two different types, three primary colors of lightand three primary colors of pigment.The three primary colors of light are called additive color mixture, and the

more colors are added, the brighter it will be. Mixing red (R), green (G), andblue (B) colored lights, various colors can be created.The three primary colors of pigment are called subtractive color mixture, andthe more colors are added, the darker it will be. Various colors can becreated by mixing cyan (C), magenta (M), and yellow (Y) pigments (such asink or toner), however, black (K) is actually used as the fourth color in additionto the three primary pigments.

Three primary colors of light Three primary colors of pigment






Color adjustment 7


HSB model

This model is based on the human perception of color.When our eyes perceive colors in objects, we receive the information not only

on the color itself (reddish, bluish, etc.) but the brightness (rather bright, dark,etc.) and the purity (vivid, dull, etc.) of the color.The color perception (reddish, bluish, etc.) is defined as hue (H).The strength or purity of the color is defined as saturation (S), and thelightness or darkness of the color is defined as brightness (B).The above three elements are called the three attributes of color.

With these three attributes, the Munsell color system has been created todescribe colors in a three-dimensional space.

Brightness

Saturation

Hue






7 Color adjustment


7.2 Color copy quality

Modifying colors

As mentioned above, colors can be reproduced by mixing four pigments, thethree primary colors cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y), and black (K).

To enhance the copy quality, this machine allows you to modify colors bymeans of the three attributes of color based upon the human eye andperception.

The following methods are provided:

Adjust the density of the whole image.

OriginalDensity






Color adjustment 7


Adjust the hue, saturation, and brightness.

The hue adjustment leads the color of the image to another color adjacent inthe color circle of red (R), yellow (Y), green (G), cyan (C), blue (B), and

magenta (M).

Original

Hue

Saturation

Brightness






7 Color adjustment


Change the hue by varying the image’s red (R), green (G), and blue (B)individually or mutually.

OriginalRed

Green

Blue






Color adjustment 7


Change the hue by varying the image’s cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y), andblack (K) individually or mutually.

OriginalCyan

Magenta

Yellow

Black






7 Color adjustment


Reproducing images

This machine provides two methods for reproducing images.

The Dither (Error Diffusion) method uses small dots (600 dots per inch) toreproduce the image. This method is appropriate for text originals.The screen method also provides two methods, Line screen and Dot screen.

The Line screen uses many halftone lines, like scanning lines of a television,while Dot screen uses small dots to reproduce the image.The screen methods provide fine quality in reproducing the gradation in

scanned photographic images, however, text originals may not bereproduced clearly by using the same method as photo originals.

Dot screen

Line screen

Black images

Black images

Color images

Dots Dots

Color images

Line Line






Color adjustment 7


What is image distinction level?

In many cases, originals include both photo and text. Although the text isnormally printed in black, a color printer inevitably uses not only the black

toner but cyan, magenta, and yellow in layers to reproduce the black text.Using the screen method, the color printer may add colors in large or boldcharacters to reproduce the text in the same way as the photo.While scanning such originals, this machine detects and determines thephoto portion and text area, so that the text area should be reproduced insingle color and the photo portion in full color. This function also allows youto obtain the optimum print results by modifying the standard for image

distinction level according to the character size of the text or its proportionin the whole original.

Solid Solid

Detected as text






7 Color adjustment


Applying filters

In addition to the color adjustment and image reproduction methods, thismachine allows you to apply the following filters to improve the copy image

quality.

Sharpen the outline of the image. (Sharpness)

Increase the contrast of the image. (Contrast)

OriginalSharpness

OriginalContrast






Color adjustment 7


Increase shine on the image. (Glossy)

Improving color copy quality

To improve the color copy quality, this machine provides the three types ofadjustment methods: color adjustment, Selecting the image reproductionmethod and its adjustment, and other adjustments.

The color adjustment is performed by varying the level of pigments in RGBmodel or CMYK model, or by modifying the hue, saturation, and brightnessof the image.

To reproduce the copy image, select one of the two methods, Line screenand Dot screen. The Image Distinction Level function will help in selecting themost appropriate method for each part of the original to make the copies of

scanned image.

For further improvement, use Copy Density or apply filters for Sharpness,Contrast, and Glossy.

Original

Glossy






7 Color adjustment


To use keys under [Quality Adjust.] on the Copy Screen

When any setting is made on the Quality Adjustment Screen, the selectionwill be listed as one of three keys in the area under the [Quality Adjust.] key

on the Copy Screen. If four or more selections have been made, use [,] and[+] to scroll.

Use this shortcut to directly jump to the setting screen or Quality AdjustmentScreen (for the function without subsequent screen), if any setting change isdesired.

2

NoteMachine administrator can set the machine to display the frequently-

used function key in the area under the [Quality Adj.] key, so that the

setting screen of that function can be directly accessed by a single touch

from the Copy screen.

For details, refer to "11 Short Cut Key Setting" on page 16-33.






Color adjustment 7


7.3 Adjusting density level

Automatic exposure operates to detect the density level of the original imagewhile scanning, and automatically selects the appropriate density for thecopy.

!DetailThe density to be selected automatically using Automatic exposure can

be adjusted on the machine. For details, see page 17-28.

To adjust copy density

Follow the procedure below to select the exposure (density) manually tomake darker or lighter copies.






7 Color adjustment



2 Touch [Quality Adjust.] on the Copy screen.

The Quality Adjustment screen will be displayed.

3 Touch [Copy Density] to display the Copy Density screen.






Color adjustment 7


4 Select the desired density level.

– Touch the desired density level key from [–1] to [–4] to make the

copy image lighter, or from [+1] to [+4] to make it darker.– Touch [Standard] to select the middle density level.– To resume the Automatic exposure, touch [Auto] to highlight it.

5 Touch [OK].

The Quality Adjustment screen will be restored.

? Do you want to resume the previous setting?

% Touch [Cancel].

?Do you want to restore the initial setting?

% Touch [Default Set].

? Do you want to check the adjustment result?

% Touch [Adj. Proof Copy] to print a sample copy.

6 Touch [Close] on the Quality Adjustment screen.

The Copy screen will be restored with the [Copy Density] key displayedand highlighted under the [Quality Adjust.] key.Use this key to directly jump to the Copy Density screen, if any settingchange is desired.






7 Color adjustment


To adjust background

Adjust the background whiteness when copying newspaper or recycledpaper original.




Original

Background






Color adjustment 7


3 Touch [Adj. Back.] to display the Adjust Background screen.

4 Adjust the density level of the background.

– Touch the desired level key from [–1] to [–4] to make thebackground lighter, or from [+1] to [+4] to make it darker.

– Touch [Standard] to select the middle density level.

5 Touch [OK].



% Touch [Cancel].

? Do you want to restore the initial setting?









7 Color adjustment



The Copy screen will be restored with the [Adj. Back.] key displayedand highlighted under the [Quality Adjust.] key.Use this key to directly jump to the Adjust Background screen, if anysetting change is desired.






Color adjustment 7


To adjust B-side prevent

Adjust the density level of the back side lighter when copying dark originals.




3 Touch [B-Side Prevent] to display the B-Side Prevent screen.






7 Color adjustment


4 Adjust the density level of the back side.

– Touch the desired level key from [–1] to [–4] to make the back side

lighter.– Touch [Standard] if adjustment is not needed.

5 Touch [OK].



% Touch [Cancel].






The Copy screen will be restored with the [B-Side Prevent] keydisplayed and highlighted under the [Quality Adjust.] key.Use this key to directly jump to the B-Side Prevent screen, if any settingchange is desired.






Color adjustment 7


7.4 Changing colors using RGB values

Change the color by modifying each value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B).

2

NoteIn Full Color mode, this adjustment properly reflects on the strength of

each color (red, green, and blue) reproduced on a printed image.

Using Black or Single Color mode, this adjustment will operate to the

reproducibility of each color of colored original, giving effect to the

strength of black or single color on a printed image.

!DetailTo reproduce the yellow part of the original which cannot be printed

normally in Single Color mode, make the Red stronger.To change the hue of the printed image in Single Color mode, see

"Changing colors using CMYK value" on page 7-44.

To modify RGB value









7 Color adjustment


3 Touch the desired color key.

The Red, Green, or Blue Adjustment screen will be displayed.

4 Adjust the color value.

– Touch the desired level key from [–1] to [–4] to make the colorweaker, or from [+1] to [+4] to make it stronger.

– Touch [Standard] to select the middle level.






Color adjustment 7


5 Touch [OK].



% Touch [Cancel].






The Copy screen will be restored with the modified color key displayedand highlighted under the [Quality Adjust.] key.Use this key to directly jump to that color adjustment screen, if anysetting change is desired.






7 Color adjustment


7.5 Changing colors using HSB values

Change the color of the copy image by making adjustments to Hue,Saturation, and Brightness.

To adjust hue




3 Touch [Hue] to display the Hue screen.






Color adjustment 7


4 Make the desired adjustment.

– Touch the desired level key from [–1] to [–4] to make yellow closer

to red, and red closer to magenta. (Adjustment goes anticlockwisein the color circle.)Or, touch a key from [+1] to [+4] to make yellow closer to green, andgreen closer to cyan. (Adjustment goes clockwise in the colorcircle.)


5 To adjust the hue by setting fine adjustment in each color of RGB,touch [RGB Adjustment] to display the Fine Adjustment screen.

– Make fine adjustment on each color, then touch [OK] to return to theHue screen.






7 Color adjustment


6 Touch [OK].



% Touch [Cancel].






The Copy screen will be restored with the [Hue] key displayed andhighlighted under the [Quality Adjust.] key.Use this key to directly jump to the Hue screen, if any setting change isdesired.






Color adjustment 7


To adjust saturation




3 Touch [Saturation] to display the Saturation screen.






7 Color adjustment


4 Make the desired adjustment.

– Touch the desired level key from [–1] to [–4] to make the colors

calm, or from [+1] to [+4] to make them vivid.– Touch [Standard] to select the middle level.

5 To adjust the saturation by setting fine adjustment in each color ofRGB, touch [RGB Adjustment] to display the Fine Adjustment screen.

– Make fine adjustment on each color, then touch [OK] to return to theSaturation screen.






Color adjustment 7


6 Touch [OK].



% Touch [Cancel].






The Copy screen will be restored with the [Saturation] key displayedand highlighted under the [Quality Adjust.] key.Use this key to jump to the Saturation screen, if any setting change isdesired.






7 Color adjustment


To adjust brightness




3 Touch [Brightness] to display the Brightness screen.






Color adjustment 7


4 Select the desired brightness level.

– Touch the desired level key from [–1] to [–4] to make the image

darker, or from [+1] to [+4] to make it brighter.– Touch [Standard] to select the middle level.

5 Touch [OK].



% Touch [Cancel].






The Copy screen will be restored with the [Brightness] key displayedand highlighted under the [Quality Adjust.] key.Use this key to jump to the Brightness screen, if any setting change isdesired.






7 Color adjustment


7.6 Adjusting sharpness

Use this function to sharpen the outline of copy image.

To adjust sharpness




3 Touch [Sharpness] to display the Sharpness screen.






Color adjustment 7


4 Select the desired sharpness level.

– Touch the desired level key from [–1] to [–4] to make the outline

smoother, or from [+1] to [+4] to make it sharper.– Touch [Standard] to select the middle level.

5 Touch [OK].



% Touch [Cancel].






The Copy screen will be restored with the [Sharpness] key displayedand highlighted under the [Quality Adjust.] key.Use this key to jump to the Sharpness screen, if any setting change isdesired.






7 Color adjustment


7.7 Adjusting contrast

Use this function to increase the contrast of copy image.

To adjust contrast




3 Touch [Contrast] to display the Contrast screen.






Color adjustment 7


4 Select the desired contrast level.

– Touch the desired level key from [–1] to [–4] to decrease the

contrast, or from [+1] to [+4] to increase the contrast.– Touch [Standard] to select the middle level.

5 Touch [OK].



% Touch [Cancel].






The Copy screen will be restored with the [Contrast] key displayed andhighlighted under the [Quality Adjust.] key.Use this key to jump to the Contrast screen, if any setting change isdesired.






7 Color adjustment


7.8 Setting image distinction level

Image Distinction Level detects and determines the photo portion and textarea of the original when scanned, allowing you to obtain the optimum printresult by modifying the standard for detection according to the character sizeof the text or its proportion in the whole original.

For this adjustment, two items are provided; Text/Photo proportionadjustment and Black/Color text proportion adjustment.

- Text/Photo changes the ratio of detecting the text area of the original.- Color Text changes the proportion in detecting that the original text is

black or colored.

Follow the procedure below to make the adjustment.

!DetailFor details on detecting images, see "What is image distinction level?" on

page 7-11.

To set image distinction level









Color adjustment 7


3 Touch [Distinction] to display the Image Distinction Level screen.

4 Make an adjustment to Text/Photo.

– Touch the desired level key from [–1] to [–4] to increase theproportion of photo, or from [+1] to [+4] to increase the proportion

of text.– Touch [Standard] to select the middle level.

5 Make an adjustment to Color Text.

– Touch the desired level key from [–1] to [–4] to increase the

proportion of black text, or from [+1] to [+4] to increase theproportion of colored text.







7 Color adjustment


6 Touch [OK].



% Touch [Cancel].






The Copy screen will be restored with the [Distinction] key displayedand highlighted under the [Quality Adjust.] key.Use this key to jump to the Image Distinction Level screen, if anysetting change is desired.






Color adjustment 7


7.9 Selecting screen type or compression

This machine provides two methods to reproduce the print image; Linescreen and Dot screen.The machine selects an appropriate method automatically according to theother copy conditions selected for the job.

!DetailSee "Reproducing images" on page 7-10 for details of Line screen and

Dot screen.

Follow the procedure below to select the reproducing method manually.

Dot screen and line screen

Select one of the following four types of screen according to the original type

and desired print result.- Dot 1: Dot screen- Dot 2: Dot screen

- Line 1: Line screen

- Line 2: Line screen

The print result may not be satisfactory depending on the original type. In thiscase, try another screen type.

!DetailDot 2 and Line 2 also provide the lower line screen (type 2) as an option.

This setting can be made in the Administrator setting. For detai´ls, see

page 17-67.

Compression

The desired copy result may not be obtained because the internal memory

overflows when using the reproducing method selected manually orautomatically according to the other copy conditions of the job.In this case, select Compression to give priority to compressing the scanneddata.The Dither method is used instead of Line screen or Dot screen.

Auto

Auto selects an appropriate reproducing method automatically according tothe selected copy conditions.This mode is initially selected.






7 Color adjustment


To select reproducing method




3 Touch [Screen] to display the Screen Setting screen.






Color adjustment 7


4 Select the desired reproducing method.

– To select the Line screen, touch [Line 1] or [Line 2/Type 1] to

highlight it.– To select the Dot screen, touch [Dot 1] or [Dot 2/Type 1] to highlight

it.– To compress the scanned data, touch [Compression] to highlight it.– Touch [Auto] to highlight it, if reproducing method should be

selected automatically.

5 Touch [OK].


? Do you want to resume the previous setting?% Touch [Cancel].






The Copy screen will be restored with the [Screen] key displayed and

highlighted under the [Quality Adjust.] key.Use this key to jump to the Screen Setting screen, if any setting change

is desired.






7 Color adjustment


7.10 Changing colors using CMYK value

Change the hue by varying the image’s cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y), andblack (K) individually or mutually.This adjustment can be made in each density area (shadow, mid tone, orhighlight) of the individual color, or in the whole density area of each color.

The adjustment value ranges from –10 to +10.

To adjust color balance




3 Touch [Color Balance] to display the Color Balance screen.






Color adjustment 7


4 Select the desired density area.

– Check the shadow, mid tone, and highlight areas of the original,

then select the desired density area to adjust the color balance.– If the adjustment is necessary for the whole density area, touch

[ALL] to highlight it.

5 Select the color and specify the adjustment value.

– Touch Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, or Black to highlight it.Then, touch [,] or [+] to display the desired adjustment value from–10 to +10.Select smaller number to make the color lighter, or larger numberto make it darker.The adjustment can be made for each density area.

6 Touch [OK].



% Touch [Cancel].



? Do you want to check the adjustment result?% Touch [Adj. Proof Copy] to print a sample copy.


The Copy screen will be restored with the [Color Balance] keydisplayed and highlighted under the [Quality Adjust.] key.Use this key to jump to the Color Balance screen, if any setting change

is desired.






7 Color adjustment


7.11 Selecting glossy

Use this function to increase shine on the copy image.

To specify glossy




3 Touch [Glossy] to highlight it.






Color adjustment 7



The Copy screen will be restored with the [Glossy] key displayed andhighlighted under the [Quality Adjust.] key.



!DetailSetting "Glossy" will lower the copy speed. For details, see page 13-6.






7 Color adjustment


7.12 Copy conditions incompatible with color adjustment






Color adjustment 7






7 Color adjustment


None: Compatible

o: Grayed out




C: Not specified



*6 Image Distinction Level: Color Text only is grayed out or releasedautomatically.






Application functions 8



8.1 To use application function

Follow the procedure below to display the Application screen and select thedesired copying features.

To display application screen

1 Touch [COPY] tab on the Machine Status screen to display the Copyscreen.

2 Touch [Application] on the Copy screen.








– The Application screen will be displayed on the touch panel.

– If you touch a function key, another screen or two will display toenable you to enter the appropriate settings (except for ProgramJob, Non-Image Area Erase, Neg./Positive Reverse, and ImageCentering).

– Various functions can be used in combination, however, if one

function on the menu is incompatible with another, it will appeardimmed.

? Do you want to restore the previous setting?

% Touch [Cancel].

? Do you want to cancel all the selected application functions with the

setting made for each remained?

% Touch [All Off] on the Application screen.

? Do you want to resume the initial setting?

% Press [Reset] on the control panel.

3 Touch [OK] on the Application screen to return to the Copy screen.

2ReminderOnly with the Copy screen displayed, you can press [Start] to start

copying.








To use keys under [Application] on the Copy screen

When any setting is made on the Application screen, the selection will belisted as one of three keys in the area under the [Application] key on the Copy

screen. If four or more selections have been made, use [,] and [+] to scroll.Use this shortcut to directly jump to the setting screen or Application screen(for the function without subsequent screen), if any setting change is desired.

!DetailYou may find a [Bookmark] key on some subsequent screens. Touch this

key to highlight it, if desired, so that the screen may be directly accessed

from the Copy screen or Check screen to change the setting you made.See page 10-3 for details.

Machine administrator can set the machine to display the frequently-

used application function key in the area under the [Application] key, so

that the setting screen of that function can be directly accessed by a

single touch from the Copy screen.

For details, see page 16-33.








8.2 Inserting sheets and covers: Insert Sheet

Use Insert Sheet in print mode or blank mode to insert chapter sheets orseparator sheets into the finished set, as well as front and back covers.

The covers and insertions can be fed from different tray source for each, and

also available from Post inserter if Folding unit FD-501 option is installed, or

from Paper inserter PI-502 option mounted on the Finisher FS-607.

Front/back cover setting

The following functions are provided in Front/Back Cover setting. Front (Printor Blank) and Back (Print or Blank) settings are compatible.

Function Description

Front Cover + Print The first page of the original will be printed onto the front cover. Whenmaking double-sided copies, the second page of the original will beprinted onto the back side of front cover.

Front Cover+ Blank A blank sheet for front cover will be inserted as the first sheet of copiedset. The same result will be obtained when making double-sided cop-ies.

Back Cover + Copy The last page of the original will be printed onto the back cover. Whenmaking double-sided copies, the last two pages of the original will beprinted onto both sides of back cover.

Back Cover + Blank A blank sheet for back cover will be inserted as the last sheet of copiedset. The same result will be obtained when making double-sided cop-ies.

432

4

432

REPORT P RT

432432

2

21

432

321

432

432

2

21








e.g. Selecting [Print] with page 5 specified as insertion location:

Simplex/Duplex Description

1%1 The 5th page of single-sided original is copied onto the insertion, whichwill be the 5th sheet of copied set.

1%2 The 5th and 6th pages of single-sided original are copied onto bothsides of the insertion, which will be the 3rd sheet of copied set.With page 6 specified, the 5th page of the single-sided original is sim-plex-copied onto copy paper, while the 6th and 7th pages of the single-sided original are duplex-copied onto the insertion which will be the 4thsheet of copied set.

2%2 The 5th and 6th pages of double-sided original are copied onto bothsides of the insertion, which will be the 3rd sheet of copied set.With page 6 specified, the 5th page of the double-sided original is sim-plex-copied onto copy paper, while the 6th and 7th pages of the dou-ble-sided original are duplex-copied onto the insertion which will be the4th sheet of copied set.

2%1 The 5th page of double-sided original is simplex-copied onto the inser-tion, which will be the 5th sheet of copied set.

3

3








e.g. Selecting [Blank] with page 5 specified as insertion location:


1%1 A blank insertion will be added as the 6th sheet of copied set, after the5th page of single-sided original is simplex-copied.

1%2 A blank insertion will be added as the 4th sheet of copied set, after the5th page of single-sided original is simplex-copied.With page 6 specified, a blank insertion will be added as the 4th sheetof copied set, after the 5th and 6th pages of single-sided original areduplex-copied.

2%2 A blank insertion will be added as the 4th sheet of copied set, after the5th page of double-sided original is simplex-copied.With page 6 specified, a blank insertion will be added as the 4th sheetof copied set, after the 5th and 6th pages of double-sided original areduplex-copied.

2%1 A blank insertion will be added as the 6th sheet of copied set, after the5th page of double-sided original is simplex-copied.

3

3








0 Use ADF. Use Separate Scan mode if original count exceeds 100 or iforiginal glass is desired for scanning the original. See page 6-23 fordetails.

0 Trays for copy paper, front/back covers, and insertions should have thesame paper size loaded. Auto Zoom is automatically selected.

0 Max. insert sheets: 30 locations, from 1~999, including front and back

covers

0 Post inserter is available as additional front/back cover tray source. Inthis case, Post inserter will feed the first (front) cover and the last (back)cover.


2 Load paper into the tray.

– Load regular sheets, insertion sheets and covers into any tray.

When using the Post inserter, load covers or insertion sheets intothe Post inserter tray.Be sure that the trays for copy paper, front/back cover, andinsertions have the same paper size loaded.

– Check the tray information on the Machine Status screen or Copyscreen and use the specified paper; otherwise machine trouble may

occur.– To use any other paper type/size than the specified paper, touch

[Paper Setting] on the Copy screen to change the settingtemporarily. page 6-43 for details.


4 Touch [Insert Sheet] on the Application screen.








5 Select the desired cover mode.

– Touch [Front/Back Cover] on the Insert Sheet screen.

– Touch the desired tray key to select the cover sheet tray source.– Select the desired front/back cover mode.

Touch [None] if no cover is desired, [Print] to insert a copiedfront/back cover, or touch [Blank] to insert a blank front/back cover.

– Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the Insert Sheetscreen, or touch [Cancel] to restore the previous setting.








6 Select the desired insertion mode.

– Touch [Insert Paper] on the Insert Sheet screen.

– Touch the desired tray key to select the insertion tray source.– Select the desired insertion mode.

Touch [Print] to insert a copied insertion, or touch [Blank] to inserta blank insertion.

7 Enter the page number.

– Use the control panel keypad to enter the page number of insertionlocation. Touch [Set] after each entry to move to the next key.To clear an incorrect entry, touch [Delete].Repeat this procedure to make all the page entry.

– Up to 30 insertion locations can be specified, including front andback covers. To enter the 16th to 30th page locations, touch [,] toscroll to the next page.









? What if an entered page number is larger than the total original pagecount?

% The entered page number will be ignored.

? Should the page number be entered from the smaller number?% Not necessary. The page number entered at random will be sorted

automatically.

? What if the same page number is entered twice?

% The second entry will be ignored on the screen.

8 Specify the post inserter setting, if desired.

– Touch [Paper inserter] on the Insert Sheet screen.

– Touch the desired tray key for each of front and back covers.If no post inserter cover is desired, deselect all the keys.

Using the Front/Back Cover mode in combination, the post insertercovers will be added as the first and last covers.









9 Confirm the setting information on the screen.

– The Insert Sheet screen provides the information of the setting

made on each subsequent screen.If no setting change is desired, touch [Close] to return to the

Application screen.– To release the Insert Sheet function with the current setting

remained, touch [Function Off].

10 Touch [OK] on the Application screen.

The Copy screen will be restored, with highlighted [Insert Sheet] keydisplayed under the [Application] key.Use this key to jump to the subsequent screen to make any settingchange.

11 Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad, thenpress [Start].








8.3 Locating title pages on the right side: Chapters

Chapter is used with ADF in 1-2 mode for the purpose of locating title pageson the right side, rather than reverse side, of a duplex copy to improve thepresentation of double-sided copies.

To effectively locate the title page on the right, a blank sheet will be

automatically created on the reverse side of a sheet, if required.

e.g. Specifying pages 2 and 5 as title pages:


1%2 A blank page is automatically added before the 2nd and 5th pages ofthe original, so that they will be printed on the front side of double-sidedcopies.

1%2 + Print Insertion The same page insertion is performed as above, and the chapter pages(2/3 and 5/6) will be printed on paper from another tray source.

2%2 Since one double-sided original sheet is counted as two pages, thecopy result will be exactly the same as above in 1%2 mode with Noneselected for Chapter paper.

2%2 + Print Insertion The same page insertion is performed as above, and the chapter pages(2/3 and 5/6) will be printed on paper from another tray source.

3

3









0 Max. title pages: 30 sheets, from 1 ~ 999

0 The chapter page can be copied on the sheet from another tray source.(Print Insertion)

0 Use Stamp together with this function to print chapter number ontochapter page in addition to page number, numbering, or watermarknumbering.



3 Touch [Chapters] on the Application screen.








4 Enter the page number of each title page.

– Use the control panel keypad to enter the page number of each titlepage. Touch [Set] after each entry to move to the next key.To clear an incorrect entry, touch [Delete].Repeat this procedure to make all the page entry.

– Up to 30 title pages can be specified. To enter the 16th to 30th title

page locations, touch [,] to scroll to the next page.– To change the selection of paper tray for copying title pages, touch

[Print Insertion] on the Chapters screen to enable the [InsertionTray] key.Use this key to change the currently selected paper tray displayedon the screen.

? What if an entered page number is larger than the total original pagecount?

% The entered page number will be ignored.

? Should the page number be entered from the smaller number?

% Not necessary. Chapter insertions occur in sequence even if

original page numbers are entered out of sequence.

? What if the same page number is entered twice?

% The second entry will be ignored on the screen.

5 Touch [OK] to complete the setting.

– To restore the previous setting, touch [Cancel].– To release the Chapters function with the current setting remained,

touch [Function Off].









The Copy screen will be restored, with highlighted [Chapters] keydisplayed under the [Application] key.Use this key to jump to the subsequent screen to make any settingchange.


2

NoteTouch [Booklet Pagination] on the Chapters screen to use this function.

In this case, touching [OK] on the Booklet Pagination screen will return to

the Chapters screen.








8.4 Lay out several pages onto one sheet: CombineOriginals

Use this function to lay out and copy a fixed number (2, 4, or 8) of pages ontoone sheet of copy paper, so that the paper use can be saved.

The following functions are provided to Combine Originals. The direction of

the page arrangement will vary according to the specified original bindingmargin.

Settingitem

Description

2 in 1 Select this setting to print two original images onto one sheet.

Left binding Right binding

4 in 1 Select this setting to print four original images onto one sheet.The page arrangement (Numbering Direction) can be specified.

Horizontal order, left binding Horizontal order, right binding

Vertical order, left binding Vertical order, right binding

1

1

2

2

1

1

2

2

1

1

2

2

1

1

2

2

1

1

2

2

3

3

4

4

1

1

2

2

3

3

4

4 2

2

1

1

4

4

3

3

2

2

1

1

4

4

3

3

1

1

3

3

2

2

4

4

1

1

3

3

2

2

4

4

3

3

1

1

4

4

2

2

3

3

1

1

4

4

2

2








8 in 1 Select this setting to print eight original images onto one page.The page arrangement (Numbering Direction) can be specified.

Horizontal order, left binding Horizontal order, right binding

Vertical order, left binding Vertical order, right binding

Settingitem

Description

1

1

2

2

3

3

4

4

5

5

6

6

7

7

8

8

1

1

2

2

3

3

4

4

5

5

6

6

7

7

8

8

4

4

3

3

2

2

1

1

8

8

7

7

6

6

5

5

2

2

1

1

4

4

3

3

6

6

5

5

8

8

7

7

1

1

3

3

5

5

7

7

2

2

4

4

6

6

8

8

1

1

5

5

2

2

6

6

3

3

7

7

4

4

8

8

7

7

5

5

3

3

1

1

8

8

6

6

4

4

2

2

5

5

1

1

6

6

2

2

7

7

3

3

8

8

4

4








0 Use ADF.

0 If the original is placed on the original glass, Separate Scan mode will

function automatically.

0 Auto Zoom is automatically selected. Normally the fixed size of Tray 1 willbe selected. (Available to be changed manually.)



3 Touch [Combine Originals] on the Application screen.

4 Select the desired Combine Originals mode.

– Touch [2 in 1], [4 in 1] or [8 in 1] in the desired order area, referringto the illustration on the previous page.









– To restore the previous setting, touch [Cancel].– To release the Combine Originals function with the current setting



The Copy screen will be restored, with highlighted [Combine Originals]key displayed under the [Application] key.Use this key to jump to the subsequent screen to make any settingchange.

Auto Zoom is automatically selected. When selecting any tray otherthan the one that is set and displayed on the Copy screen, touch thedesired tray key.









8.5 Making a multiple page signature booklet: BookletPagination

Use this function to make a multiple page signature booklet on both sides ofpaper. Original images are scanned into memory and automatically arrangedin booklet format in correct order.

If the machine is equipped with saddle stitcher SD-501 option, folded,stapled, and/or trimmed booklets can be made.

Select the binding mode according to the desired booklet type.

Mode Description

Left Bind Copies will be made from the left page to the right page.

Right Bind Copies will be made from the right page to the left page.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .









0 Available original sizes are A3w, B4w, A4w / v, and B5w / v.

0 Original pages should be a multiple of 4 in 1-2 mode or a multiple of 2 in2-2 mode; otherwise blank pages are automatically inserted to the last.

0 Trays for copy paper and front/back covers should have the same papersize loaded.

0 Auto Zoom is automatically selected. Select the desired paper size.


2 Load the desired copy paper size in a tray.

– Available paper sizes are A3w, B4w, A4w, and B5w.– When selecting cover sheet mode (Cover With Copy Sheet or Cover

With Blank Sheet), load the same size cover in any other tray.


4 Touch [Booklet Pagination] on the Application screen.








8.6 Inserting different original images into printed sets:Insert Image

Use this function to insert images scanned from the original glass into a setof original document scanned from the ADF at specified locations, thenoutput the combined images as a finished set.

The images scanned from original glass will be added as the next page ofspecified document pages.

e.g. Specifying pages 2 and 5 as insertion locations:


1%1 The first scanned image will be inserted after page 2 of the original, andthe second scanned image will be inserted after page 5.

1%2 The first scanned image will be printed on the front side of the 2nd sheetafter page 2 of the original is printed, and the second scanned imagewill be on the front side of the 4th sheet in the finished set.

2%2 One double-sided original sheet will be counted as two pages, so thecopy result will be exactly the same as above in 1%2 mode.

2%1 The first scanned image will be inserted after page 2 of the finished set,and the second scanned image will be inserted after page 5.

3

3

7

8

4

5

2

3

1

6

7

8

4

5

2

3

1

6








0 Up to 30 locations can be specified for the original from 1 to 999 pages.

0 Separate Scan mode is automatically selected.


– Be sure to arrange the original in page order, and then place it with

the first page faceup. Up to 100 original sheets can be set.If the original count exceeds 100, divide them into blocks not

exceeding 100 sheets, and load them from the block with the firstpage.


3 Touch [Insert Image] on the Application screen.

4 Specify the image insertion location by entering page number.

– Use the control panel keypad to enter the page number. Touch [Set]after each entry to move to the next key.To clear an incorrect entry, touch [Delete].Repeat this procedure to make all the page entry.








8.7 Dividing spread image into right and left pages: BookCopy

Use this function to divide a page spread image, such as an open book orcatalog, into two separate images of right and left pages. If front and backcovers are desired, scan the cover pages first so that they will be printed

without image division performed and all the original pages will be output incorrect order.

Using Booklet Pagination in combination, original images are automaticallyarranged in booklet format in correct order to make a multiple page signaturebooklet on both sides of paper.

e.g. Scanning a book original from the original glass:

Mode key Description

Spread

Front Cover + Spread Printed sets will be output from the front cover page, then divided doc-ument pages according to pagination.The original should be scanned from the front cover, then page spreadoriginals in page order.

FrontBack Back

Front Front

cover cover cover

cover cover








e.g. Using Booklet Pagination in combination to make a booklet:

Front/Back Cover +Spread

Printed sets will be output from the front cover page, divided documentpages according to pagination, then the back cover page.The original should be scanned from the front cover, back cover, thenpage spread originals in page order.


Front Back

Back Back

Front

FrontFront

cover cover

covercover

Back

cover cover


Spread + BookletPagination

Front/Back Cover +Spread + BookletPagination

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front

Front

FrontBack

Back

Back

cover cover

cover cover cover cover








e.g. Using ADF to scan page spread originals to copy right and left pagesseparately:


Left Bind Page spread originals will be scanned from the left page to the rightpage, and will be output in page order.

Right Bind Page spread originals will be scanned from the right page to the leftpage, and will be output in page order.

2221 2

2221 2








0 Available paper sizes: A4, B5, 8.5"e 11"


0 Non-Image Area Erase and Image Centering are automatically selectedfor scanning the original from original glass. Do not close the ADFthroughout the scanning job.


– Using the original glass to scan, position the first page facedownwith the ADF kept open.Using the ADF, arrange the original in page order, and then load itwith the first page faceup. Up to 100 original sheets can be set.If the original count exceeds 100, divide them into blocks notexceeding 100 sheets, and load them from the block with the firstpage.

– When selecting the Front Cover or Front/Back Cover + Spread

mode, follow the procedure on page 8-29 to scan the front cover

first.


3 Touch [Book Copy] on the Application screen.









– Available paper sizes are A4v, B5v, and 8.5"e 11"v.– Auto Zoom and Auto Paper Select are released and e1.0

magnification is selected automatically.– Be sure not to select [Top] as binding direction on the Output

Application screen.


– Scanned image will be stored into memory. Repeat this procedureto complete scanning all originals.

– When scanning from the original glass, Non-Image Area Erase and

Image Centering are automatically selected.Be sure to keep the ADF open throughout the scanning job.



The machine will start printing when ready for output.








8.8 Programming different settings for an output job:Program Job

In the ordinary Separate Scan mode, the combined features selected for the job are applied to all originals to be scanned. Using Program Job, you mayscan multiple sets of originals and apply different settings on each set

(referred to as JOB), then output them all as a complete set.

Original A Original B Original C

Output usingProgram Job









0 Output mode and print quantity setting cannot be specified for each JOB.

The last setting made will be applied to all JOBs.

0 The paper size specified for the first job will be applied to all subsequentJOBs.

0 Max. 100 JOBs can be programmed for an output job.

0 Program Job settings cannot be stored in Program Memory.



3 Touch [Program Job] on the Application screen.

The incompatible function keys will be dimmed to show inactivity.


The Copy screen will be restored, with highlighted [Program Job] keydisplayed under the [Application] key.This key can also be used to display the Application screen for makingsetting change.

The [Separate Scan] key on the Copy screen also appears highlightedto show that the Separate Scan mode is automatically selected.


– The paper size determined at this time will be applied to allsubsequent JOBs.








6 Press [Start] to start scanning.

When scanning for the current JOB is completed, the popup menu willbe displayed to ask you whether or not to store the scanned imagedata as a JOB for printing in specified copy conditions.

7 Touch [Decision] to store the current JOB images.

– To delete the scanned images, touch [Cancel].

8 Repeat above steps until all JOB originals are scanned.









10 Touch [Output Appli.] to display the Output Application screen, thenselect the desired output mode.

– The setting made at this time will be applied to all subsequentJOBs.

11 Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

– Entered quantity will be the count of complete set.

12 Press [Start].

The machine will start printing in conditions specified for each JOB.








8.9 Dividing an image for enlarged copy: Multi-PageEnlargement

Use this function to make an enlarged copy, made up of several copiedpages divided and enlarged from an original image.

0 Use the original glass to scan.

0 Use Auto Paper Select, or select the desired paper size on the Copy

screen.If Auto Paper Select is used, the largest paper size will be selectedautomatically.

0 The output size can be selected (standard size) or determined when amagnification ratio is entered on the screen.

1 Position the original on the original glass, then close the ADF or originalcover.

The machine will detect the original size placed on the original glass.

2 Select the desired paper size on the Copy screen.

Original

Multi-page enlargement








– Touch the desired tray key to highlight it.

If Auto Paper Select is selected (initial setting), the largest paper sizeloaded in a tray will be selected automatically.


4 Touch [Multi-Page Enlargement] on the Application screen.








5 Select an output paper size or magnification, as desired.

– To select an output paper size:Touch the desired size key to highlight it.

– To select a magnification ratio:Use the touch panel keypad or [+]/[,] to specify the desiredmagnification ratio.


– To restore the previous setting, touch [Cancel].– To release the Multi-Page Enlargement function with the current

setting remained, touch [Function Off].


The Copy screen will be restored, with highlighted [Multi Enlarge.] keydisplayed under the [Application] key.Use this key to jump to the subsequent screen to make any settingchange.










8.10 Erasing outside area of original: Non-Image AreaErase

Using this function, the machine will automatically detect the original sizeplaced on the original glass, then make a copy eliminating the exposed glassarea outside the borders of the original.

0 Scan the original from original glass. Be sure to keep the ADF open.

0 Original size should be larger than 3 e 3 cm.

1 Position the original on original glass with the ADF or original coverkept open.

– Do not close the ADF/original cover.


Set original

General copying No Image Area Erase








3 Touch [Non-Image Area Erase] on the Application screen.



The Copy screen will be restored, with highlighted [Non-Image Area]key displayed under the [Application] key.This key can also be used to display the Application screen for making

setting change.

Auto Zoom and Auto Paper Select are released and e1.0 magnificationis selected automatically.

Available copy modes are 1->1 and 1->2. Selecting [1->2] will select[Separate Scan] automatically.



!DetailMachine administrator can set the machine to obtain the optimum copy

result of Non-Image Area Erase by adjusting the density level of the

original manually. For details, see page 17-30.

Non-Image Area Erase may perform incorrectly if the lighting in the work

place is directly over the original glass. In this case, consult your service

representative about an appropriate place for installation.








8.11 Reversing color in image: Neg./Positive Reverse

Use this function to reverse the positive image to the negative image and viceversa in the selected color mode.

- Single Color: Makes a reversed image in the selected single color.

- Black: Reverses the image from black-on-white to white-on-black, andvice versa

- Full Color: Copies in complementary colors of the four colors.

- Auto Color: Makes a reversed image according to the original image(detected as Full Color or Black).










3 Touch [Neg./Positive Reverse] on the Application screen.



The Copy screen will be restored, with highlighted [NegPos. Reverse]key displayed under the [Application] key.This key can also be used to display the Application screen for makingsetting change.

5 Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad, then

press [Start].









8.12 Repeating original image on one sheet: Image Repeat

8.12.1 Setting repeat times automatically

Use the Size Manual Input mode to manually specify the scanning area of theoriginal glass, then let the machine to print the scanned image repeatedly on

one sheet of copy paper.Size Auto Detect mode will automatically detect the original size (image andsurrounding blank area also), then let the machine determine the number ofrepeats.

Mode Description

Size Manual Input

Size Auto Detect

CopyHorizontal width Vertical

width

Copy








0 Scan the original from original glass. The ADF cannot be used to scan theoriginal.

0 Use the Size Manual Input mode to repeat a part of the original, not theentire image, by specifying the scanning area.

0 Size Auto Detect mode uses Non-Image Area Erase to automaticallydetect the original size with the ADF/original cover kept open.

1 Position original on the original glass.

– When selecting Size Manual Input, place the original facedown onthe original glass so that the original image should fit within the areameasured by vertical/horizontal width from the rear-left corner.Close the ADF/original cover gently.

– When selecting Size Auto Detect, open the ADF/original cover, thenplace the original facedown on the original glass.In this case, Non-Image Area Erase is automatically selected. Be

sure to keep the ADF/original cover open.


3 Touch [Image Repeat] on the Application screen.








4 Make setting for Size Manual Input or Size Auto Detect, as desired.

– To select Size Manual Input:Touch [Manual] to highlight it, then use [+]/[,] to specify thedesired horizontal/vertical width.

– If the touch panel keypad is desired, touch [Input With Keypad] todisplay the Image Size Input screen.Touch [Horizontal] or [Vertical] to highlight it, then enter the desiredhorizontal/vertical width.Touch Close to complete the setting and return to the ImageRepeat screen.








– To select Size Auto Detect:Touch [Auto] to highlight it.


– To restore the previous setting, touch [Cancel].– To release the Image Repeat function with the current setting



The Copy screen will be restored, with highlighted [Image Repeat] keydisplayed under the [Application] key.Use this key to jump to the subsequent screen to make any settingchange.




press [Start].









!DetailUsing Size Auto Detect mode, Image Repeat may perform incorrectly if

the lighting in the work place is directly over the original glass. In this

case, consult your service representative about an appropriate place for

installation.

You may find the [Bookmark] key at the lower-left corner of the Image

Size Input screen. Touch this key to highlight it, if desired, so that the

screen may be directly accessed from the Copy screen or Check screen

to change the setting you made.

See page 10-3 for details.








8.12.2 Specifying repeat times: Repeat

Repeat mode will scan the image area specified by the selected paper sizeand mode (2 Repeat, 4 Repeat, or 8 Repeat), then arrange the image by

specified times in one copy sheet.

2 Repeat

4 Repeat

8 Repeat








0 Magnification ratio is fixed to e1.0 (100%). Rotation becomesunavailable, if this magnification ratio is changed manually.

0 The scanning area will be a portion of the selected paper size equallydivided according to the selected mode.


– Both ADF and original glass are available. The scanning area varies

according to the selected paper size, original direction, andselected repeat mode.


3 Touch [Image Repeat] on the Application screen.

4 Select the desired Repeat mode.

– Touch [2 Repeat], [4 Repeat], or [8 Repeat] to highlight it.









– To restore the previous setting, touch [Cancel].– To release the Image Repeat function with the current setting



The Copy screen will be restored, with highlighted [Image Repeat] keydisplayed under the [Application] key.Use this key to jump to the subsequent screen to make any settingchange.




press [Start].









8.13 Eliminating copy marks along borders: Frame CenterErase

When the original is scanned from the original glass, black copy marks maybe produced along borders and center line, and also around punch holes.Use this function to eliminate them from the copies and lower the toner

consumption at the same time.

Mode Description

Frame erase Erases black copy marks along borders of the original image.

Center erase Erases black copy marks along the center line of the original.








0 Available range for the Frame erase amount is 1 to 300 mm, for the Centererase amount is 1 to 99mm, in 1mm increments.

0 Frame erase and Center erase can be used in combination.

0 The Frame erase amount can be specified both collectively for all foursides and individually for each side.


– Both ADF and original glass are available.When lowering the ADF/original cover onto thick original (e.g. openbook), do not press it down too hard. Keep the ADF/original coveropen, if required.


3 Touch [Frame Center Erase] on the Application screen.








4 Touch [Erase/All Sides], [Erase/Each Side], or [Center Erase] tohighlight it.

– Use Frame erase and Center erase in combination, if desired.

5 Specify the erasure amount for the selected mode.

– To specify the erase amount for Erase/All Sides:Confirm that all the frame erase amounts in the illustration are

highlighted.Use [,] and [+], or touch panel keypad to enter the desired eraseamount.








– To specify the erase amount for Erase/Each Side:Touch the desired side key on the right side of the screen tohighlight the erase amount in the illustration, then use [,] and [+],or touch panel keypad to enter the desired erase amount.

– To specify the erase amount for Center Erase:Confirm that the center erase amount in the illustration is

highlighted. If not, touch [Center] on the right side of the screen tohighlight it.Use [,] and [+], or touch panel keypad to enter the desired eraseamount.


– To restore the previous setting, touch [Cancel].– To release the Frame Center Erase function with the current setting










The Copy screen will be restored, with highlighted [Frame/Fold] keydisplayed under the [Application] key.Use this key to jump to the subsequent screen to make any settingchange.










8.14 Copying image in the center of copy paper: ImageCentering

Use this function to detect the image area of the original and center thewhole image on copy paper.


– Both ADF and original glass are available.


3 Touch [Image Centering] on the Application screen.

– The incompatible function keys will be dimmed to show inactivity.

– Non-Image Area Erase will be selected automatically. If using ADFto scan the original, touch it to deselect this function.

– If Book Copy is used in combination, the original smaller than theselected paper size will be printed in the center of the copy paperwithout image division performed.









The Copy screen will be restored, with highlighted [Non-Image Area]and [Image Centering] keys displayed under the [Application] key.These keys can also be used to display the Application screen formaking setting change.





2

ReminderImage Centering may perform incorrectly if the lighting in the work place

is directly over the original glass. In this case, consult your service

representative about an appropriate place for installation.








8.15 Adjusting position of copy image: Page Margin - Shift

Use this function to create a binding margin on copies in order to make iteasier for filing purposes, and also to adjust the position of copy image onboth front and back sides when making double-sided copies, in order tocorrect the image dislocation.

Page Space function is available only when Booklet Pagination or 2 Repeatmode of Image Repeat has been already selected. Use this function to make

the desired amount of blank space between the two images on a page.

If image loss is likely, see "Reducing images to create binding margin: PageMargin - Reduce & Shift" on page 8-66.

Original

Right

Right

Up

Up

Left

Left

Down

Down

Copies








0 Available shift direction: Top, Bottom, Right, Left

0 Shift amount: 0 to 250 mm in 1 mm increments



3 Touch [Page Margin] on the Application screen.

4 Touch [Shift].








5 Select the side of copy paper to be adjusted with image position.

– Touch [Front], [Back], or [Double Sided] to highlight it.

– Making single-sided copies, only the front side setting will beeffective.

– To have the same shift amount on both sides of double-sidedcopies, select [Double Sided].

– To specify the page space amount, touch [Page Space].








6 Specify the shift direction and amount.

– Use [Top] or [Bottom] to shift the image in lengthwise direction, and[Right] or [left] in widthwise direction. Touch the desired shiftdirection key to highlight it, then use [,] and [+], or touch panelkeypad to enter the desired shift amount. For entering the pagespace amount, shift direction is not needed to be specified.

– Setting the shift amount in 0.1 mm increments is also available byUser/Administrator setting. For details, see page 16-45 orpage 17-134.

7 Repeat the steps 5 and 6, if setting the shift amount for front and backsides individually.


– To restore the previous setting, touch [Cancel].– To release the Page Margin function with the current setting



The Copy screen will be restored, with highlighted [Page Margin] keydisplayed under the [Application] key.Use this key to jump to the subsequent screen to make any setting

change.










2

NotePage Space function is available only when Booklet Pagination or 2

Repeat mode of Image Repeat has been already selected. Use this

function to make the desired amount of blank space between the two

images on a page.

BookletPage space

Original

Page space

Original

Page space

2 Repeat In Repeat








8.16 Reducing images to create binding margin: PageMargin - Reduce & Shift

Use this function instead of Shift to prevent image loss when creating abinding margin.

To create a binding margin without reducing the original image, see

"Adjusting position of copy image: Page Margin - Shift" on page 8-61.

Left binding margin

Right

Up

Left

Down

Front

Front

Front

Front

Up

Up

Right

Right Right

Left

Left

Right binding margin

Top binding margin

Down

Down

Originals

Back

Back

Back

Back








0 Auto Zoom is automatically selected and cannot released. Reductionratio will depend on the specified shift amount.

0 Shift amount: 0 to 250 mm in 1 mm increments



3 Touch [Page Margin] on the Application screen.

4 Touch [Reduce & Shift].








5 Select the side of copy paper to be adjusted with image position.

– Touch [Front] or [Back] to highlight it.– Auto Zoom will automatically determine the reduction ratio

according to the shift amount specified for the front page. Settingfor the back page is not required normally because the shift amountand reduction ratio determined for the front page will be

automatically applied to the back page.

6 Specify the shift direction and amount.

– Use [Top] or [Bottom] to shift the image in lengthwise direction, and[Right] or [left] in widthwise direction. Touch the desired shift

direction key to highlight it, then use [,] and [+], or touch panelkeypad to enter the desired shift amount.

– Setting the shift amount in 0.1 mm increments is also available inthe Utility mode.

7 Repeat the steps 5 and 6, if setting the shift amount for front and back

sides individually.


– To restore the previous setting, touch [Cancel].– To release the Page Margin function with the current setting



The Copy screen will be restored, with highlighted [Page Margin] keydisplayed under the [Application] key.

Use this key to jump to the subsequent screen to make any settingchange.










8.17 Printing additional information: Stamp/Image Overlay

This function allows you to print onto output copies the desired type of built-in stamp, numbering for multiple sets, page number for multiple pages,date/time, watermark, and watermark numbering.

The following six modes are provided for the Stamp function. These are

compatible with each other.

Mode Description

Built-in Stamp

Set Numbering

Page No.

URGENT

CONFIDENTIAL

IMPORTANT

002/005

P1

1-1

1/5








The above six modes are provided with following detailed settings. Fordetails, see page 8-83.

- Fine adjustment for printed position

- Start number setting for Set Numbering mode- Start number setting for Page No. mode

- Character size/type setting for Page No. and Date/Time modes

- Cover/Insert print setting for Page No.- Color setting

Date/Time

Watermark

Set Numbering (Wa-termark)

Mode Description

’06/1/23 1:23PM








8.17.1 Printing stamp onto copies: Built-in Stamp

Print the desired letter type selected from preset stamps onto the specifiedposition of copies.

0 To use this function, the optional HDD (HD-506) is required to be installedin the machine.



3 Touch [Stamp/Image Overlay] on the Application screen.

4 Touch [Built-in Stamp].








5 Select the desired stamp type, printing position, character size, printpage and color.

– Touch one of the twelve stamp type keys to highlight it.– Touch one of the nine printing position keys to highlight it. If fine

adjustment is desired, touch [Fine Adjustment]. See page 8-83 fordetails.

– Touch [Character Size] to select Larger or Smaller.– Touch [Print Page] to select Cover Only or All Pages.– For selecting the stamp color, see page 8-88.

6 Touch [OK] twice to complete the setting.

– To restore the previous setting, touch [Cancel].– To release the Stamp/Image Overlay function with the current



The Copy screen will be restored, with highlighted [Stamp/Overlay] keydisplayed under the [Application] key.

Use this key to jump to the subsequent screen to make any settingchange.

8Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad, thenpress [Start].









8.17.2 Printing distribution number: Set Numbering

Print a distribution number onto the specified position of copies.


2Touch [Application] on the Copy screen.


4 Touch [Set Numbering].








5 Select the desired numbering type, printing position, character size,print page, start number, and color.

– Touch one of the four numbering type keys to highlight it.– Touch one of the nine printing position keys to highlight it. If fine


– Touch [Character Size] to select 20 point or 36 point.– Touch [Print Page] to select Cover Only or All Pages.– To specify the start number, touch [Start Number]. See page 8-84

for details.– For selecting the stamp color, see page 8-88.


– To restore the previous setting, touch [Cancel].

– To release the Stamp/Image Overlay function with the currentsetting remained, touch [Function Off].


The Copy screen will be restored, with highlighted [Stamp/Overlay] keydisplayed under the [Application] key.Use this key to jump to the subsequent screen to make any settingchange.










8.17.3 Printing page number: Page No.

Print a page number onto the specified position of copies.




4 Touch [Page No.].








5 Select the desired page numbering type, printing position, print page,color, character size/type, and start number.

– Touch one of the five page numbering type keys to highlight it.– Touch one of the nine printing position keys to highlight it. If fine


– Touch [Print Page] to designate whether to print the page numberon the front/back cover or insertions. See page 8-87 for details.

– For selecting the stamp color, see page 8-88.– Touch [Change Character] to select the character size and type.

See page 8-86 for details.– To specify the start number, touch [Start Number]. See page 8-85

for details.















8.17.4 Printing date/time: Date/Time

Print date and time onto the specified position of copies.




4 Touch [Date/Time].








5 Select the desired date/time type, printing position, charactersize/type, print page, and color.

– Touch one of the five date type keys and one of the three time typekeys to highlight it.

– Touch one of the nine printing position keys to highlight it. If fineadjustment is desired, touch [Fine Adjustment]. See page 8-83 for

details.– Touch [Change Character] to select the character size and type.

See page 8-86 for details.– Touch [Print Page] to select Cover Only or All Pages.– For selecting the stamp color, see page 8-88.















8.17.5 Printing watermark onto copies: Watermark

Print the desired letter type selected from preset watermarks in the center ofprinted page background.

0 To use this function, the optional HDD (HD-506) is required to be installedin the machine.




4 Touch [Watermark].








5 Select the desired watermark type, color, and text density.

– Touch one of the twelve watermark type keys to highlight it.– Touch one of the seven color keys to highlight it.– Touch one of the four text density keys to highlight it.– If fine adjustment of the centered watermark position is required,

touch [Fine Adjustment]. See page 8-83 for details.















8.17.6 Printing distribution number as watermark: Set Numbering

Print a distribution number in the specified form repeatedly over the scannedimage.




4 Touch [Set Numbering] in the Watermark area.








5 Select the desired watermark numbering type, character size, startnumber, color, and text density.

– Touch one of the four numbering type keys to highlight it.– Touch [Character Size] to select 20 point or 36 point.– To specify the start number, touch [Start Number]. See page 8-84

for details.

– Touch one of the seven color keys to highlight it.– Touch one of the four text density keys to highlight it.





The Copy screen will be restored, with highlighted [Stamp/Overlay] keydisplayed under the [Application] key.Use this key to jump to the subsequent screen to make any setting

change.










8.17.7 Detailed setting in "Stamp/Watermark"

Making fine adjustment on printing position

Use this function to make fine adjustment on printing position of Built-inStamp, Set Numbering, Page No., and Date/Time. The adjustment range is

0 to 50mm, in lengthwise direction ([Top] or [Bottom]) and in widthwisedirection ([Right] or [left]).

1 Touch the desired direction key to highlight it, then use [,] and [+], ortouch panel keypad to enter the desired amount.

2 Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the previous screen.








Setting start number in "Set Numbering"

Touching [Start Number] on the Set Numbering screen will display thefollowing screen to allow you to specify the start number.

1 Use [,] and [+], or touch panel keypad to enter the desired startnumber. Up to four digits can be specified.









Setting start number in "Page No."

Touching [Start Number] on the Page No. screen will display the followingscreen to allow you to specify the start number and page to be started with

page numbering.If Chapters is already selected, chapter start number and the chapter to bestarted with chapter numbering can also be specified on this screen.

1 Touch [Start Number] under Page No. to highlight it, then use [,] and[+], or touch panel keypad to enter the desired start number. Up to fourdigits can be specified.

2 Touch [Start Page] under Page No. to highlight it, then enter the desired

start page.

3 Touch [Start Number] under Chapter to highlight it, then use [,] and[+], or touch panel keypad to enter the desired start number. Up to twodigits can be specified.

4 Touch [Start Chapter] under Chapter to highlight it, then enter thedesired start chapter.









Selecting character size/type

Use this function to specify the character size and type for Page No., andDate/Time.

1 Touch one of the four keys under Character Size to highlight it.

2 Touch either [Gothic] or [Ming] under Font to highlight it.









Setting print page in "Page No."

This function allows you to print the page number on the front cover andinsertions, if Print/Blank Insert Paper mode of Insert Sheet has already been

selected.

1 Touch one of the three keys under "Cover" to highlight it.

2 Select one of the keys under "Print Insert if Print mode has beenspecified", or one of the two under "Blank Insert for Blank mode".









Selecting color

Use this function to select the desired color in Built-in Stamp, SetNumbering, Page No., and Date/Time.

1 Touch one of the seven color keys to highlight it.









8.18 Overlaying image onto printed pages: Image Overlay

Use this function to scan an image, then overlay the image onto each pagecopied in the job.

1 Position the overlaying original.

– Position a sheet of original faceup in the ADF or facedown on theoriginal glass.



4 Touch [Image Overlay] to highlight it.

1st scanned original Originals scanned2nd and later

Copies in Overlay mode












The Copy screen will be restored, with highlighted [Stamp/Overlay] keydisplayed under the [Application] key.This key can also be used to display the Application screen for makingsetting change.

Auto Zoom and Auto Paper Select are released and e1.0 magnificationis selected automatically.The [Separate Scan] key on the Copy screen also appears highlightedto show that the Separate Scan mode is automatically selected.

7 Select any other copy conditions, as desired.


The original image will be scanned into memory.

9 Position the original to be overlaid.

– Position the original either in the ADF or on the original glass.

10 Press [Start] to scan.

– Repeat steps 9 and 10 for all originals.

11 Touch [Separate Scan] to exit the Separate Scan mode.










8.19 Storing overlay image in HDD/ overlaying imagestored in HDD: Program Overlay

Use Program Overlay to scan and store several images in HDD, then recallthe desired image from the HDD to overlay onto each page copied in the job.

To use this function, the optional HDD (HD-506) is required to be installed in

the machine.

Follow the steps 1, 2, 3, and 9 for printing only.

Image Store

Store in HDD

Overlaying Image

Output

Recall overlaying Image

Recalled ImageOverlay originals

Output

Copies in Overlay Memory mode

HDD








1 Position the overlaying original facedown on the original glass.



4 Touch [Program Overlay].

The Image Store/Recall screen will be displayed.

Proceed to step 9 for recalling the image already stored in HDD.








5 Touch [Store].

6 Enter the desired image name to be stored.

– Use the touch screen keypad to enter the desired name up to 8characters. The date when making this entry will be stored

automatically.

7 Touch [OK].

The Copy screen to store the overlaying image will be displayed.Select copy conditions, as desired.

If a popup menu is displayed to prompt you that the entered imagename has been already used, see page 8-96.









The following screen will be displayed to indicate that the machine isnow storing the image data in HDD.When completed, the Image Store/Recall screen will be restored.

9 Select the desired overlaying image data.

– Touch the desired image data key to highlight it, then touch [OK].

The Stamp/Image Overlay screen will be restored.





The Copy screen will be restored, with highlighted [Stamp/Overlay] keydisplayed under the [Application] key.This key can also be used to display the Application screen for makingsetting change.The [Separate Scan] key on the Copy screen also appears highlightedto show that the Separate Scan mode is automatically selected.

12 Position the original to be overlaid.

– Position the original either in the ADF or on the original glass.

13 Press [Start] to scan.

– Repeat steps 12 and 13 for all originals.








14 Touch [Separate Scan] to exit the Separate Scan mode.










Popup menu for name duplication

If the entered name is duplicated, the popup menu will be displayed insteadof the Copy screen.

If both [OK] and [Cancel] keys are displayed, the image with the enteredname applied can be overwritten.Touch [Cancel] to overwrite the existing image data. To store the new datawith a new name, touch [OK].

If the popup menu shows [OK] only, the existing image data cannot beoverwritten. Touch [OK] to enter a new name.Either of the above two can be specified in the Administrator setting.








8.20 Copy conditions incompatible with applicationfunctions








None: Compatible

o: Grayed out




C: Not specified



*1 Separate Scan mode is selected automatically.

*4 Magnification ratio will be determined on the application screenprovided for Multi-Page Enlargement. Auto Paper Select will be released andthe tray loaded with the largest paper size will be selected automatically.








*7 Only 2 in 1 and 2 Repeat modes are available. 4 in 1 mode is compatibleonly with Page Numbering in Stamp.

*10 Available combinations of Stamp/Watermark/Image Overlay/ProgramOverlay are as shown below.

*15 Compatible if Booklet Pagination is selected in combination.

*16 Back cover cannot be attached.

*19 Only 2 in 1 and 2 Repeat modes are available.

*20 Only 2 in 1 mode is available.

Available combinations of Stamp/ Watermark/Image Overlay/Program

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 Built-in Stamp 1 1 1

2 Page No.

3 Set Numbering (Stamp) 1 1 1

4 Date/Time

5 Watermark 1 1 1 1

6 Set Numbering (Watermark) 1 1 1 1

7 Image Overlay 1 1 1 1 1

8 Program Overlay 1 1 1 1 1






9Output applications






Output applications 9



9.1 Selecting an output tray

This section describes how to select an output tray.


2 Touch [Output Appli.] on the Copy screen.

The Output Application screen will be displayed.Output tray positions are indicated as square marks on the front imageof the machine, and the tray mark currently selected appearshighlighted.








3 Touch [Output Tray].

The Output Tray Selection screen reflecting the combination of

optional devices will be displayed.

4 Select the desired output tray.

– Touch the desired tray position key to highlight it.

Machine with large capacity stacker LS-501 (1 unit), or with largecapacity stacker LS-501 + folding unit FD-501:

In addition to the tray position keys , a [Pile Setting] key is displayedto show you a popup menu when touched. On the popup menu, touch[Permit] if you allow paper from several jobs to pile up in the large

capacity stacker, or touch [Prohibit] if you do not.








This setting is initially specified as Prohibit.

5 Touch [OK] on the Output Tray Selection screen.

The Output Application screen will be restored, with the selected traymark highlighted.

6 Touch [OK] on the Output Application screen.

The Copy screen will be restored.








7 Withdraw the saddle stitcher tray, if selected as an output tray.

– Open the tray stand when fully withdrawn.

2

ReminderNever return the saddle stitcher tray to its original position with the tray

stand opened.

Be careful not to exceed the finisher tray/stacker capacity when selecting

the print quantity, otherwise unexpected trouble may be caused.








9.2 Setting binding direction for duplex copies

Use this function to specify the binding direction of output copies whensetting duplex mode (1->2/ 2->2). Select [Top] when making top-boundduplex copies (printed upside down on back pages) from side-boundsimplex/duplex originals (front and back pages have the same side up).

!DetailTo make side-bound duplex copies (front and back pages have the same

side up) from top-bound duplex originals (printed upside down on back

pages), use the setting for binding direction of duplex originals. See

page 6-3 for details.

Binding Direction for Duplex copying

Originals Copies

<R & L> <Upper>








0 The top binding mode is effective only when duplex mode is selected.

0 Resetting the machine will restore the right& left binding mode.



The Output Application screen will be displayed.

3 Touch [Top] under Bind Direction to select it.

4 Touch [OK].








9.3 Sorting/stapling copies (Finisher FS-503)

The finisher FS-503 has a primary (main) tray and a secondary (sub) tray,each of which has the following output modes.

Output to the primary (main) tray

- Non-sort

Non-sort mode simply means that the offset-stacker finisher modes are

not selected. Copies will be stacked upon exit without being offset bysorted sets.

- Collate

Collate mode outputs multiple copies of the original set, having eachsorted set offset by 30 mm upon exit.

- Uncollate

Uncollate mode groups together multiple copies of each original and

offsets the sets by 30 mm upon exit.- Staple

Staple mode offsets and staples each sorted set.

Combined with the output modes above except staple mode, you can also

choose to output face up or face down, and output front to back or back tofront.

Example: Make 3 copied sets from 4 original sheets

Non-sort Staple Collated Uncollated

1 obliquestaple

Offset by 30mm

Offset by 30mm

2 staples








Output to the secondary (sub) tray

- Collate

Collate mode outputs multiple copies of the original set. No offset outputis available.

- Uncollate

Uncollate mode groups together multiple copies of each original. Nooffset output is available.

Combined with the output modes above, you can also choose to output faceup or face down, and output front to back or back to front.

Example: Make 3 copied sets

Face downcollated

Face downuncollated

Face upcollated

Face upuncollated








9.3.1 Non-sort/collate/uncollate output to the primary (main)tray

A machine with finisher FS-503 installed is set to collate output to the primary(main) tray by default, regardless of whether or not to be equipped with otheroptional devices.

Please select an output mode by following the procedures below.

!DetailYou can change the initial output mode in the Utility setting. For details,

see page 16-39.

For detailed specifications, see "Paper tray/ exit tray capacity" on

page 3-6 and "Finisher FS-503" on page 25-7.



The Output Application screen will be displayed.Output tray positions are indicated as square marks on the front imageof the machine, and the tray mark currently selected appearshighlighted.If the primary (main) tray is not selected, touch [Output Tray] to selectit. See page 9-3 for details.








3 Select the desired output mode.

– For Non-sort output, cancel both [Collate] and [Uncollate].– For Collate output, touch [Collate] to highlight it.– For Uncollate output, touch [Uncollate] to highlight it.– Select output face (Face Down / Face Up), and output order (1 to N

/ N to 1) as needed.


The specified output mode icon will be displayed on the Copy screen.

2

ReminderThe primary (main) tray gradually goes down while printed materials are

output. DO NOT allow any object to interfere with the operation of the tray

on the left side of the finisher, as any interference may cause damage to

the finisher.

Be careful not to exceed the finisher tray capacity when selecting the

print quantity, otherwise unexpected trouble may be caused.








9.3.2 Stapling output to the primary (main) tray

Copies will be stapled in this mode. Follow the procedure below to select thestapling position and number of staples: Top Left/ Top Right (Corner Staple),

Left/Top/Right (2 Position Staple).

!DetailFor detailed specifications, see "Paper tray/ exit tray capacity" on



2 Touch [Staple] on the Copy screen.

– Stapled sheets will be delivered to the primary (main) tray. TheOutput Application icon shows the stapling position currently

selected.

If you want to change the stapling position, proceed to the followingsteps.










4 Touch [Staple] to select the stapling position.

The Staple Setting screen will be displayed.

5 Touch the desired stapling position key to select it.

6 Touch [OK].


– To release the Staple function with the current stapling positionsetting remained, touch [Function Off].

The Output Application screen will be restored.










2




the finisher.










9.3.3 Collate/uncollate output to the secondary (sub) tray

A machine with finisher FS-503 installed is set to Collate output to theprimary (main) tray by default, regardless of whether or not to be equipped

with other optional devices. Change the output tray and select the desiredoutput mode by following the procedure below.






3 Select the secondary (sub) tray as the output tray.

– Touch [Output Tray] to display the Output Tray Selection screen.

– Touch the tray position key of the secondary (sub) tray tohighlight it, then touch [OK].









– For Collate output, touch [Collate] to highlight it.– For Uncollate output, touch [Uncollate] to highlight it.– Select output face (Face Down / Face Up), and output order (1 to N




2

Reminder

Be careful not to exceed the finisher tray capacity when selecting theprint quantity, otherwise unexpected trouble may be caused.








9.4 Output modes using folding unit FD-501

Using folding unit FD-501, the following punch/folding patterns are available:

- Punch:Punches 2 or 4 holes in printed sheets for filing purposes. Specify thedesired punch position (left/right/top) according to the original set

direction.- Folding:

Six folding types are available - Z-Fold, Tri-Fold-in, Tri-Fold-out, DoubleParallel, Gate Fold, and Half Fold. Specify the print side (outside or inside)for each folding mode except Z-Fold.

80mm

80mm

Z-Fold Half Fold

Gate FoldDouble Parallel

Tri Fold-out

Tri Fold-in








9.4.1 Punching file holes in copies

Copies will be punched in this mode. Follow the procedure below to select2- or 4-hole punch and punch position.


page 3-6 and "Folding unit FD-501" on page 25-8.


2 Touch [Punch] on the Copy screen.

– Punched sheets will be delivered to the primary (main) tray. TheOutput Application icon shows the number of punch holes andpunch position currently selected.

If you want to change the number of punch holes and punch

position, proceed to the following steps.










4 Touch [Hole-Punch].

The Hole-Punch screen will be displayed.

5 Touch the desired punch key to select it.

6 Touch [OK].


– To release the Punch function with the current number of punchholes and punch position setting remained, touch [Function Off].











2

ReminderBe careful not to exceed the finisher tray capacity when selecting the









9.4.2 Folding copies

Copies will be folded in this mode. Follow the procedure below to select thedesired one from six folding types.



0 Folding types: Z-Fold, Tri-Fold-in, Tri-Fold-out, Double Parallel, GateFold, Half Fold

0 Sheets placed on the post inserter can also be folded.




3 Touch [Fold].

The Folding Type Setting screen will be displayed.








4 Touch the desired folding type key, and either [Outside Print] or [InsidePrint] to select the printed side.

– The printed side cannot be selected when Z-Fold is selected.

5 Touch [OK].

– To restore the previous setting, touch [Cancel].– To release the Fold function with the current folding type setting





2

ReminderBe careful not to exceed the finisher tray capacity when selecting the









9.4.3 Attaching cover sheet (Post inserter on FD-501)

This function is provided by folding unit FD-501 mounted with post inserter.Cover sheets loaded in the upper/lower tray of the post inserter will be

attached to the output copies as a front cover, back cover, or insertion(chapter) sheets.Use this function to create a staple-bound book with covers and title pagesattached. You can also use the Cover With Blank Sheet mode of BookletPagination in combination with Paper inserter function of Insert Sheet tomake a booklet enfolded with a cover sheet.



Copied set withcover attached instaple mode

Copied set withcover and intersheet attached

cover andinter sheet








1 Load paper in the upper/lower tray ofthe post inserter.

2 Use Insert Sheet and Booklet Pagination to attach a cover sheet.

2

ReminderDo not load more than 500 sheets (80g/m 2 ) for each of the upper and

lower trays.

Do not load above the limit line indicated on the guide plate.



Upper tray

Lower tray








To prevent small cover sheet from skewing

The small cover sheet may be skew, when loading it in the upper/lower trayof the post inserter.

Three paper rollers are attached to the upper/lower tray respectively.

To lock the roller both sides, prevent paper from skewing.

Push the both roller lock levers to inside to lock them.

2

ReminderBesure to lock both sides, when locking the paper rollers.

Do not lock the paper rollers normally.








9.5 Output modes using saddle stitcher SD-501

9.5.1 Making folded booklet

Using Booklet Pagination in combination, the machine installed with saddlestitcher SD-501 can create a multiple page signature booklet, folded and

stapled at two positions (saddle stitched) in the center.Use Trimming mode to trim the edge that opens the booklet, if desired.


page 3-6 and "Saddle stitcher SD-501" on page 25-8.

Fold & Staple Fold & Staple and Trimming











3 Touch [Fold & Staple].

The screen to specify the Trimming mode will be displayed.

4 Touch [Trimming] or [Non Trimming] to select whether or not to useTrimming mode.








5 Touch [OK].

– To restore the previous setting, touch [Cancel].– To release the Fold & Staple function with the current Trimming




The specified output mode icon will be displayed on the Copy screen.Booklet Pagination in Application is selected automatically.

7 Withdraw the saddle stitcher tray.


2

NoteThe folded and stapled (and trimmed) sets will be delivered into the

saddle stitcher tray. If the tray is not fully withdrawn, the machine will

detect that the tray is filled up, even with less number of finished sets than

that specified in specifications.

2


stand opened.








9.5.2 Folding copies

The machine installed with saddle stitcher SD-501 provides Multi Half Foldmode to double-fold up to 5 sheets of copied set, or Multi Tri-Fold mode to

fold it inside in three.Using Multi Tri-Fold, the print side can be specified on the screen.

0 Using Multi Half Fold mode, the finished sets will be delivered to the

saddle stitcher tray.

0 Using Multi Tri-Fold mode, the finished sets will be delivered to the multi-folding mode tray.




3 Touch [Multi Half Fold] or [Multi Tri-Fold] to select it.

Multi Half Fold+Non Trimming

Multi Half Fold+Trimming

Multi Tri-Fold+Inside Print

Multi Tri-Fold+Outside Print








– If [Multi Half Fold] is selected, the Multi Half Fold screen will bedisplayed to specify whether or not to trim the edge of the foldedsheets. Touch [Trimming] or [Non Trimming] to select it.

– If [Multi Tri-Fold] is selected, the Multi Tri-Fold screen will bedisplayed to specify the print side. Touch [Outside Print] or [InsidePrint] to select it.

4 Touch [OK].

– To restore the previous setting, touch [Cancel].– To release the function with current setting remained, touch

[Function Off].










The specified output mode icon will be displayed on the Copy screen.With Multi Half Fold selected, Booklet Pagination in Application is alsoselected automatically.

6 When using Multi Half Fold, withdraw the saddle stitcher tray.


2

NoteThe double-folded sets will be delivered into the saddle stitcher tray. If

the tray is not fully withdrawn, the machine will detect that the tray is filled

up, even with less number of finished sets than that specified in

specifications.

The triple-folded sets will be delivered into the multi-folding mode tray.

2


stand opened.








9.6 Using folder/finisher functions manually

If the optional Folding Unit FD-501, and Finisher FS-503 are installed, youcan load a set of paper in the lower tray of the post inserter and punch, fold,and/or staple it manually.



Multi-Feed1 Stapling 2 Holes Punch

Fold & Staple

Z-Fold Tri Fold-in Half-FoldDetectionfunction ON

Multi-FeedDetection

function OFF

1

2

3

4

5

2 Stapling 4 Holes PunchTri Double

Gate FoldParallelFold-out

No. Name

1 Multi-Feed Detection button

2 Staple Selection button

3 Punch selection button

4 Fold Selection button

5 Start/Stop button








0 When using folder/finisher functions manually, paper should be placedonly in the upper tray of the post inserter.

0 Multi-feed detection is a feature that automatically stops the machine ifmore than one sheet is fed at a time. The post inserter is designed todetect multi-feeding. Coated paper and other kinds of smooth surfacepaper may activate this function even if a single sheet is fed, stopping the

machine. Should this case occur frequently, press the Multi-FeedDetection button and light up the lower lamp, in order to turn the functionOFF.

0 Manual Fold & Staple mode is unavailable at present.

1 Place paper in the upper tray of thepost inserter.

– 1 or 2 stapling: Place paper faceup.

– Punching: Place paper face up.

– Folding: Place the surface to beinside the fold face up.

Align the guide plate with thepaper.

2 Select the desired mode.

– When selecting 1 or 2 stapling, press the Staple selection button toturn on the desired mode lamp.

– When selecting 2- or 4-hole punching, press the Punch selection

button to turn on the desired mode lamp.– When selecting folding (from 6 styles), press the Fold selection

button to turn on the desired mode lamp.

Upper tray

Staple Selection button

Punch Selection button

Fold Selection buttonStaple Selection button Fold Selection button








Punching and stapling can be combined. When combining them,turn on the lamps for both functions.

3 Press the Start/Stop button.

– To interrupt the operation, pressthe Start/Stop button again.

– If multi-feeding is detected and

the machine stops even if singlesheet is fed, press the Multi-FeedDetection button to turn on thelamp below.

2ReminderBe careful not to exceed the finisher tray capacity when selecting the


Start/Stop button

Multi-Feed Detection button

ON

OFF








9.7 Using Finisher FS-607

The Finisher FS-607 has a primary (main) tray and a secondary (sub) tray,each of which has the following output modes.

Output to the primary (main) tray

Combined with the output modes above except staple mode, you can alsochoose to output face up or face down, and output front to back or back tofront.

Example: Make 3 copied sets from 4 original sheets

Mode Description

Non-sort Non-sort mode simply means that the offset-stacker finisher modes are not se-lected. Copies will be stacked upon exit without being offset by sorted sets.

Collate Collate mode outputs multiple copies of the original set, having each sorted setoffset by 30mm upon exit.

Uncollate Uncollate mode groups together multiple copies of each original and offsets thesets by 30mm upon exit.

Staple Staple mode offsets and staples each sorted set.

Non-sort Collate Uncollate

1 obliquestaple

Offset by 30mm

Offset by 30mm

2 staples

Staple









Combined with the output modes above, you can also choose to output face

up or face down, and output front to back or back to front.

Example: Make 3 copied sets

Mode Description

Collate Collate mode outputs multiple copies of the original set. No offset output is avail-able.

Uncollate Uncollate mode groups together multiple copies of each original. No offset out-put is available.

Face downcollated

Face downuncollated

Face upcollated

Face upuncollated








9.7.1 Non-sort/ Collate/ Uncollate output to the primary (main)tray

A machine with Finisher FS-607 installed is set to collate output to theprimary (main) tray by default, regardless of whether or not to be equippedwith other optional devices.

Please select an output mode by following the procedures below.

!DetailYou can change the initial output mode in the Utility setting. For details,

refer to "02 Initial Setting" on page 16-39.

For detailed specifications, see "Paper tray/ exit tray capacity" on



2 Touch [Output Appli.] on the Copy Screen.

The Output Application Screen will be displayed.Output tray positions are indicated as square marks on the front imageof the machine, and the tray mark currently selected appearshighlighted.If the primary (main) tray is not selected, touch [Output Tray] to selectit. See page 9-3 for details.









– For Non-sort output, cancel both [Collate] and [Uncollate].– For Collate output, touch [Collate] to highlight it.– For Uncollate output, touch [Uncollate] to highlight it.– Select output face (Face Down / Face Up), and output order (1 to N/

N to 1) as needed.

4 Touch [OK] on the Output Application Screen.

The specified output mode icon will be displayed on the Copy Screen.

2




the finisher.










9.7.2 Stapling output to the primary (main) tray

Copies will be stapled in this mode. Follow the procedure below to select thestapling position and number of staples: Top Left/ Top Right (Corner Staple),

Left/Top/Right (2 Position Staple).




2 Touch [Staple] on the Copy Screen.

– Stapled sheets will be delivered to the primary (main) tray. TheOutput Application icon shows the stapling position currently

selected.

If you want to change the stapling position, proceed to the followingsteps.


The Output Application Screen will be displayed.








4 Touch [Staple] to select the stapling position.

The Staple Setting Screen will be displayed.

5 Touch the desired stapling position key to select it.

6 Touch [OK].


– To release the Staple function with the current stapling positionsetting remained, touch [Function Off].

The Output Application Screen will be restored.










2




the finisher.










9.7.3 Collate/ Uncollate output to the secondary (sub) tray

A machine with Finisher FS-607 installed is set to Collate output to theprimary (main) tray by default, regardless of whether or not to be equipped

with other optional devices. Change the output tray and select the desiredoutput mode by following the procedure below.






3 Select the secondary (sub) tray as the output tray.

– Touch [Output Tray] to display the Output Tray Selection Screen.

– Touch the tray position key [=] of the secondary (sub) tray tohighlight it, then touch [OK].









– For Collate output, touch [Collate] to highlight it.– For Uncollate output, touch [Uncollate] to highlight it.– Select output face (Face Down / Face Up), and output order (1 to N




2

Reminder

Be careful not to exceed the finisher tray capacity when selecting theprint quantity, otherwise unexpected trouble may be caused.








9.7.4 Making folded booklet (Multi Half Fold / Fold&Staple)

The machine with Finisher FS-607 installed can use Half Fold or Fold&Staplemode to make a folded or folded & stapled booklet in combination with

Booklet Pagination feature in Application settings.

!DetailFor specifications of copy paper to be used, see Section 3.

0 Max. number of sheets (21 lb paper) in each mode

Multi Half Fold: 3 sheetsFold & Staple: 20 sheets/ 19 sheets when using thick cover paper

0 Folding mode tray capacity: Approx. 100 sheets at maximumMulti Half Fold: 33 sets max. of 3-sheet-folded booklet (33 e 3 = 99

sheets)Fold & Staple: 20 sets max. of 5-sheet-folded booklet (20 e 5 = 100

sheets)Fold & Staple: 5 sets max. of 20-sheet-folded booklet (5 e 20 = 100sheets)

0 Use ADF to scan the original.

Multi Half Fold Fold & Staple











3 Touch [Fold & Staple] or [Multi Half Fold] to highlight it.


The specified output mode icon will be displayed on the Copy Screen.With Multi Half Fold selected, Booklet Pagination in Application is alsoselected automatically.








9.7.5 Folding copies in three (Multi tri-fold)

The Finisher FS-607 can fold A4 w or 8.5”e11” w copies in three upon exit.Choose to print outside the fold (Outside Print) or inside (Inside Print).

To fold copies in three

0 Number of folded sheet: Max. 3 sheets

0 Paper size: A4 w or 8.5”e11” w

0 Paper weight: 61 to 80 g/m2

0 Printed side: Selectable (inside or outside)

0 Output tray: Folding mode tray

0 The output order will be set to 1 to N automatically.

0 Selecting Inside Print automatically sets the output face to Face Up, whileOutside Print sets to Face Down.




Multi Tri-Fold + Outside PrintMulti Tri-Fold + Inside Print








3 Touch [Multi Tri-Fold].

The Multi Tri-Fold Screen will be displayed.

4 Touch [Outside Print] or [Inside Print], as desired.

5 Touch [OK].


– To release the function with current setting remained, touch[Function Off].











9.7.6 Punching file holes in copies (Punch)

The Finisher FS-607 with Punch kit PK-512/513 installed can punch file holesin output copies.

2

ReminderDo not punch special paper type such as labels, tracing paper, etc.

Otherwise, machine trouble may occur.

Be sure that the side guide plates of the paper tray are securely aligned

to the paper; otherwise the copies may not be punched in position.

!Detail

For detailed specifications, see "Paper tray/ exit tray capacity" onpage 3-6 and "Finisher FS-607" on page 25-9.

108 mm70 mm 70 mm21 mm

21 mm









2 Touch [Punch] on the Copy Screen.

– Punched sheets will be delivered to the primary (main) tray. TheOutput Application icon shows the number of punch holes andpunch position currently selected.

If you want to change the number of punch holes and punchposition, proceed to the following steps.



4 Touch [Hole-Punch].

The Hole-Punch Screen will be displayed.








5 Touch the desired punch key to select it.

6 Touch [OK].

– To restore the previous setting, touch [Cancel].– To release the Punch function with the current number of punch

holes and punch position setting remained, touch [Function Off].




2ReminderBe careful not to exceed the finisher tray capacity when selecting the









9.8 Cover sheet feeding (Paper inserter)

The Finisher FS-607 with Paper inserter PI-502 installed can attach coversheets to output copies.

Using Insert Sheet function, cover sheets loaded in the upper and lower trays

of the paper inserter will be attached as a front cover and/or back cover or

insertion sheet to output copies, and also using Staple mode, a covered andstapled book can be made.

Or, using Cover with Blank Sheet mode of Booklet Pagination and Multi HalfFold/ Fold&Staple with Trimming mode, a booklet-type cover will be

attached to the multiple page signature booklets.

Cover sheet

Copied set withcovers and insertions

Copied set withcover attached instaple mode attached








0 Upper/Lower tray capacity: 200 sheets (200 g/m2 paper) or within 30 mmthick each

0 Use ADF.

0 The cover paper size should be the same as copy paper size.

0 Cover paper loaded in the paper inserter cannot be copied.

1 Load cover paper into the upper andlower trays of the paper inserter.

2 Use Insert Sheet or Booklet Pagination function to attach covers to theoutput copies.

Upper tray

Lowertray








9.9 Using Finisher FS-607 manually

The Finisher FS-607 with Paper inserter PI-502 installed can be operatedmanually, using the operation panel provided on the paper inserter.

Place a set of paper into the lower tray. Upper tray cannot be used.

Available finishing modes according to the optional configuration aredescribed below.

- Finisher FS-607 + Paper inserter PI-502– Staple (1 staple / 2 staples)– Fold & Staple

– Multi Tri-Fold- Finisher FS-607 + Paper inserter PI-502 + Punch kit PK-512/513– Staple (1 staple / 2 staples)– Fold & Staple– Multi Tri-Fold– Punch

Start/Stop button

Fold&Staple

1 oblique staple

2 parallel staples

Multi Tri-Fold Punch








0 Paper should be placed only in the lower tray of the paper inserter. Uppertray cannot be used.

0 Staple (1 staple / 2 staples) and Punch can be used in combination.

1 Place a set of paper in the lower tray of the paper inserter.

– Staple (1 staple / 2 staples): Place paper face up.– Punch: Place paper face up.

– Fold&Staple: Place the front of the finished set up.– Multi Tri-Fold: Place the outside

of the fold UP.– Align the guide plate with the

paper.

2 Press Staple mode selection button and Punch button to select thedesired mode.

– To select Staple (1 staple / 2 staples), Fold&Staple, or Multi Tri-Fold, press Staple mode selection button to turn on the desiredmode lamp.

– To select Punch, press Punch button to turn on the lamp.To use Staple in combination, turn on the desired Staple modelamp.To select only the Punch mode, turn off all the other mode lamps.

3 Press Start/Stop button.

? Do you want to stop the output operation?

% Press Start/Stop button on the operation panel of paper inserter.

Lower tray

Staple mode selection button

Punch button

Start/Stop button








9.10 Loading/sorting a volume of copies (Large capacitystacker LS-501)

The large capacity Stacker LS-501 has a stacker (on the carriage) and asecondary (sub) tray, each of which provides the following output modes.

Output to the stackerNon-sort: Non-sort mode simply means that the offset-stacker finisher modes are notselected. Copies will be stacked upon exit without being offset by sorted

sets.

Collate: Collate mode outputs multiple copies of the original set, having each sortedset offset by 20mm upon exit.

Uncollate:

Uncollate mode groups together multiple copies of each original and offsetsthe sets upon exit.



Collate:

Collate mode outputs multiple copies of the original set. No offset output isavailable.

Uncollate: Uncollate mode groups together multiple copies of each original. No offsetoutput is available.



page 3-6 and "Large capacity stacker LS-501" on page 25-6.










The Output Application screen will be displayed.Output tray positions are indicated as square marks on the front imageof the machine, and the tray mark currently selected appears

highlighted.If the stacker or secondary (sub) tray is not selected, touch [OutputTray] to select the desired one. See page 9-3 for details.


– For Non-sort output, cancel both [Collate] and [Uncollate].– For Collate output, touch [Collate] to highlight it.– For Uncollate output, touch [Uncollate] to highlight it.– Select output face (Face Down / Face Up), and output order (1 to N




2

ReminderBe careful not to exceed the stacker or secondary (sub) tray capacity

when selecting the print quantity, otherwise unexpected trouble may be

caused.








9.11 Copy conditions incompatible with outputapplications








None: Compatible

o: Grayed out


A: Condition in the top row is selected automaticaly. Unreleasable.

B: Condition in the top row is selected automaticaly. Releasable.

C: Not specified



*15 Compatible if Booklet Pagination is selected in combination.

*16 Back cover cannot be attached.






Advanced information 10



10.1 Checking feature selections before copying: Mode

CheckDisplay the Check screen to check the feature selections you made, and useProof Copy to make a sample copy if needed, before making multiple copies.This is a convenient and cost effective way of viewing the results of thecopying selections.

0 Proof copy is available when using ADF, or when using Separate Scanmode for more than 100 sheets of original or originals to be scanned fromoriginal glass.

1 Position the original, then select the desired copy conditions on theCopy screen.

– Or, use Separate Scan mode to scan all originals.

2 Press [Mode Check] on the controlpanel.

The Check screen will be displayed.








3 Check the job settings on the screen, using [Next] and [Previous] asrequired.

– To make any setting change from the Check screen, proceed to thenext step.

– To release any application function from the Check screen,proceed to step 5.

– If a sample copy is needed, proceed to step 6.– If settings are OK, proceed to step 7.

4 Change the settings from the Check screen.

– Touch the desired copying condition key (Basic Setting/ Output Application/ Original Setting/ Quality Adjustment/ Application) onthe Check screen, then touch [Change].








– The LCD will display an appropriate screen to change the copyingcondition selected. Change the setting as desired, then touch [OK]to restore the Check screen to return to the checking steps.

– When [Bookmark] has been checked on some subsequent screen,selecting the application function key will jump to that screen. Seepage 8-3 for details.

– Do not press [Stop] or [Reset] to change the setting, or all thesettings will restore the initial condition.

– If making a set or sample copy, proceed to step 6.

– To start printing without proof copying, proceed to step 7.

5 Release application functions.

– Touch the desired application function key on the Check screen tohighlight it, then touch [Clear].

The confirmation popup menu will appear on the Check screen.








– Touch [Yes] to cancel the function, or [No] to restore.

– If making a sample copy, proceed to the next step.– To start printing, proceed to step 7.

6 Make a sample copy.

– Press [Proof Copy] on the control panel or touch [Proof Copy] onthe Check screen.

A sample copy will be output and the Copy screen will be resumed.– Press [Stop] to suspend the proof copying. In this case, the

scanned image data will not be deleted from memory.– If any setting change is required, press [Mode Check] and return to

step 3.If the copy result is satisfactory, proceed to the next step.

– If the desired selection cannot be changed, press [Reset] to deleteall the data in memory and restart the job setting.

7 Change the print quantity as required, then press [Start].

– If proof copying has been made, the machine will simply startprinting without scanning originals.








10.2 Making sample set for checking results: Proof Copy

Use Proof copy to produce a sample of the copied set before makingmultiple copies. This is a convenient and cost effective way of viewing resultsof the copying selections.

0 Proof copy is available when using ADF, or when using Separate Scan

mode for more than 100 sheets of original or originals to be scanned fromoriginal glass.

1 Position the original, then select the desired copy conditions on theCopy screen.

– Or, use Separate Scan mode to scan all originals.

2 Press [Proof Copy] on the controlpanel.

A sample copy will be output whilescanning originals in the ADF.If Separate Scan mode has beenused, a sample set will be deliveredimmediately.

3 Check the sample copy for specified copy conditions.

– Some conditions can be changed from the Copy screen. Seepage 10-3 for details.








4 Change the settings or print quantity,as required, then press [Start].

– If the desired selection cannot bechanged, press [Reset]] to deleteall the data in memory and restartthe job setting.








10.3 Interrupting job in progress: Interrupt mode

Use the Interrupt mode to interrupt copying in progress to perform a simple job. Pressing [Interrupt] on the control panel stops the machine operationtemporarily at the timing available for interrupt copying. When interruptcopying is completed, the settings for the previous job restore automatically

and the Copy screen displays.0 The Interrupt mode cannot be selected with the following copier

conditions:Machine is not operating printing or scanning job.Program Overlay is in use.The Call for Service message displays or a paper misfeed occurs.

Already using Interrupt mode.

0 Reserve job cannot be operated in Interrupt mode.

0 Auto Low Power or Auto Shut-off will not function during Interrupt mode.

1 Press [Interrupt] on the control panel.

The [Interrupt] LED starts flashing,then keeps lighted when machine isready for Interrupt mode.The Copy screen for interruptcopying will be displayed.

2 Set copy conditions, as desired.

– All copy conditions except Reserve mode can be specified.








3 Position the original, then press [Start] to start the interrupt copying.

4 When interrupt copying is completed, press [Interrupt] again.

The [Interrupt] LED turns out and the settings of the previous job will berestored.

5 Press [Start] to resume copying.








10.4 Storing and recalling job conditions: Mode Memory

Use Mode Memory to store frequently used copy job settings, which can berecalled at any time.

10.4.1 Storing job conditions

Follow the procedure below to store the copy job setting.

0 Available settings: Basic setting, Original Setting, Special Image, Application, Output Application, Print quantity

0 Stored job is given a job number (01 ~ 30) and alphabetical name(dispensable).

0 Up to 30 jobs can be stored.

1 Make job selections from the Copy screen.

2 Press [Mode Memory] on the controlpanel.

The Mode Memory screen will bedisplayed.

3 Touch [Store].

The Job Store Check screen will be displayed.








4 Review the settings, then touch [OK].

The Mode Memory screen will be restored.

? What if any correction is required?

% Touch [Cancel] to return to the Copy screen. Make new selections,then restart the operation from step 2.

5 Touch the desired job key, then touch [OK].

– The job keys numbered from 01 to 18 are displayed on the screen.

Touching [Next] will display the keys from 19 to 30.– A blank keys without a lock icon indicate that no job is stored under

that key, and a named job without a lock icon displayed can be

overwritten.The key with a lock icon displayed is locked and cannot beselected.

– Touch [OK] to proceed to the screen for entering the job name.








6 Enter the desired job name, then touch [OK].

– Enter a job name in up to 16 characters, using the touch panelalphabet keypad.

– Use arrow keys [*] and [)] to move the cursor, and use [Shift] toenter upper case letters or symbols.

– Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the Mode Memory

screen. Check that the job name has been correctly entered.

7 Touch [OK] on the Mode Memory screen to complete the setting and

return to the Copy screen.

2

NoteIf you do not wish to enter a name, simply touch [OK]. The key displays

16 asterisks (*) in place of a name.








10.4.2 Recalling stored job settings

Follow the procedure below to recall jobs that are already stored.

0 The Mode Memory screen can be displayed only from the Copy screen.If any other screen such as Machine Status screen is displayed, pressing[Mode Memory] will be ignored.


2 Touch [Copy] tab to display the Copyscreen, then press [Mode Memory]on the control panel.


3 Touch a job number key to select a job you want to recall.

– The job keys numbered from 01 to 18 are displayed on the screen.

Touching [Next] will display the keys from 19 to 30.– The desired job can also be selected by entering two-digit number

from the control panel keypad.








4 Touch [Job Check].

The Job Recall Check screen displays to enable you to review thesettings.

5 Review the settings, then touch [OK].

The settings of the selected job will be recalled on the restored Copyscreen.









10.5 Recalling previous job settings

Follow the procedure below to copy with a previous job settings.

0 Only the last-completed output job settings can be recalled as theprevious job settings. Non-completed job or reserve job settings cannot

be recalled, even if the setting operations have been made last.

0 The previous job settings can be recalled even after the machine poweris turned off then on.


2 Press [Mode Memory] on the controlpanel.


3 Touch [Pre-Job Recall].

The [Job Check] key will be active on the screen.








4 Touch [Job Check] to review the settings.

– The Mode Check screen will be displayed. Check the settings of theprevious job on the screen.

– Recalled settings can be altered from this screen. See page 10-3for details.

5 Touch [OK].

The settings of the previous output job will be recalled on the Copyscreen.









10.6 Displaying screen for operation guide: Help mode

The Help screen provides you with the information about copy job settingprocedure, toner and paper supply, and control panel and touch panel keyoperation.

Help screen comprises the following menu items.

- 01Copy provides information on function and operation of the keys on Copyscreen.

- 02Scan provides information on function and operation of the keys onScanner screen.

- 03

Job List provides information on function and operation of the keys onJob List screen.

- 04

Machine provides information on function and operation of the keys onMachine Status screen.- 05

Hard keys provides information on function and operation of the keys oncontrol panel.

- 06Parts exchange provides information on adding toner, loading paper,adding staples, and emptying punch/trimmer waste basket.








To display Help screen

% Press [Help] on the control panel.








10.7 Adjusting response time of touch keys: Accessibility

This machine can sets the desired interval between touching the screen keyand machine response in advance.Pressing the Accessibility key on the control panel will select this interval, sothat the machine will respond to the touch key operation only when the key

is kept touched for a specified period of time.This function is convenient for physically handicapped users who have

difficulty in touching keys with accuracy.

!DetailFor details on how to set the desired response time, see page 16-32.

0 Response time can be selected from Normal/ 0.5 second/ 1 second/ 2seconds/ 3 seconds.

1 Press [Accessibility] on the controlpanel.

The Accessibility LED lights in greento indicate that the specifiedresponse time is set on the machine.If Normal is selected as responsetime, pressing [Accessibility] will notmake any change in the touch key

operation.

2 To deactivated this function, press [Accessibility] for one second orlonger.

The Accessibility LED goes off, and normal response time will berestored in touch key operation.








10.8 Controlling copier from browser: Remote Panel

When the machine is connected with a PC over a network, the web browseractivated on the PC enables you to operate the machine. Also, machineoperation can be made using the mouse/keyboard without using the touchpanel, by directly connecting the mouse/keyboard of the PC with the

machine.This function is convenient for physically handicapped users who have

difficulty in operating the control/touch panel, and also promotes efficiencyin operation using PC keyboard and mouse.

Remote Panel functions:

- Touch panel screens can be displayed on the web browser and operatedusing a mouse.

- Control panel keys can be displayed on the web browser and operatedusing a mouse.

- Passwords can be entered using PC keyboard.

The following functions are unavailable:- Reading the screen performed by subsidiary system- Turning ON/OFF the machine power (Main power switch/Sub power

switch, Power Save, Weekly Timer)- Reporting paper misfeed, or displaying counter in real time

- Contact your service representative if direct connection between themachine and mouse/keyboard of a PC is desired.

!Detail

The setting procedure for the IP address is provided on page 17-128.

To specify the IP address of the PC to be used for Remote Panel function,

see "Remote panel setting" on page 19-21.








To control copier from browser

0 Set the Enhance Security mode OFF on the machine.

0 The machine should be connected with a PC over a network with TCP/IPenabled.

0 Specify the IP address of the machine.

0 Specify the IP address of the PC to be used for Remote Panel function,using Web Utilities setting on a PC.

0 One of the following browsers is required on the PC. No other hardware

or application software is necessary.Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.02 or higherNetscape Navigator 7.1 or higherFireFox 1.0 or higher

0 JavaScript must be active.

0 The popup menu such as paper misfeed prompt will not be updatedautomatically. After a long period of inactivity, click [Reload] at the upper

corner of the screen to display the current status.

1 Start the web browser, then enter the IP address of the main body inthe address bar.

The Web Utilities screen will be displayed.

2 Click [Remote Panel] on the Web Utilities screen.

The browser displays control panel and touch panel screen currently

displayed on the machine.








3 Using a mouse and keyboard, perform job operation.






11Job management






Job management 11


11 Job management

11.1 Overview of job list screen

The Job List screen allows you to check/operate the following items.

- Reserved job- Output History

- Send History

- Incomplete- Suspended (The letters on the key turn red if any suspended job remains.)

The jobs referred here include printer jobs and scanner jobs.

Follow the procedure below to display the Job List screen.

1 Touch [JOB LIST] tab on the Copy screen.The Job List screen will be displayed.

2 Touch the desired key at the bottom of the screen.

– See the following pages for details of each subsequent screen.

3 Touch other tab key to exit the Job List screen.






11 Job management


11.2 Job operation on job list screen

This section describes how to check and operate the jobs on the Job Listscreen.

11.2.1 To check/control reserved jobs

Use this function to display all the reserve jobs as a list.

The list includes following information.- Job No.: consecutive numbers of both copy and print jobs

- User Name: user who transmitted the job

- Mode: Copy or Printer- Status: Printing or Reserved (current status of the job)

- Sheets: max. 4-digit page count

- Sets: max. 4-digit set count- Pages To Go: max. 4-digit pages to be output (Sheets eSets = Pages To

Go)

- Minute(s): time required for completing each job (minute)

Follow the procedure below to check the settings, change the output order,and suspend/delete/stop reserved jobs.

1 Touch [JOB LIST] tab on the Copy screen, then touch [Reserved Job]

if not highlighted.

2 Check the status of the reserved jobs.

– Touch [Next] to scroll, if 8 or more jobs are entered.

3 Select the desired job, then select the job operation.






Job management 11


2

ReminderThis will not function if printing operation has already been started for the

selected job.






11 Job management


To specify the next job to be printed

% Touch to highlight the desired reserve job key, then touch [Print Next].

The highlighted reserve job will be moved just under the current print job.

To change the order of jobs% Touch to highlight the desired reserve job key, then touch [Priority].

The highlighted job will be advanced by one in printing order unless the job preceding the selected one is already in progress.

If printing order cannot be changed for the selected job, a message will be

displayed for information.

To suspend reserve job

% Touch to highlight the desired reserve job key, then touch [Suspend].

Printing operation for the selected job will be suspended and keptstored in memory.

In this case, the letters [Suspended] on the key at the bottom of the screenwill turn red to prompt you that a suspended job remains in the machine.Touch [Suspended] to resume printing operation. See page 11-10 for details.

To clear reserve job

1 Touch to highlight the desired reserve job key, then touch [Delete].

2 Touch [Yes] on the popup menu to clear the selected job. All the data of the selected job will be cleared.

To check the settings of reserve job

1 Touch to highlight the desired reserve job key, then touch [Details].

2 Check the settings of the selected job on the screen.

3 Touch [Close] to return to the Job List screen.






Job management 11


11.2.2 To display output history

Use this function to display output history as a list.

The list includes following information.

- Job No.: consecutive numbers of both copy and print jobs- User Name: user who transmitted the job

- Mode: Copy or Printer- Sheets: max. 4-digit page count- Sets: max. 4-digit set count

- Result: Complete or Cancel

- Time: time when output operation was executed

Follow the procedure below to check the settings of output jobs.

1 Touch [JOB LIST] tab on the Copy screen, then touch [Output History].

2 Check the status of the output jobs.


3 Touch the desired job key, then touch [Details].

Detailed settings of the selected job will be displayed.Touch [Close] to return to the previous screen.






11 Job management


11.2.3 To display send history

Use this function to display send history as a list.



- Mode: E-Mail / FTP / SMB / HDD- Address: address to which the data was transmitted- Result: Complete or Cancel

- Time: time when data transmission was executed

Follow the procedure below to check the settings of transmitted jobs.

1 Touch [JOB LIST] tab on the Copy screen, then touch [Send History].

2 Check the status of the transmitted jobs.









Job management 11


11.2.4 To check incomplete jobs

Use this function to display Incomplete jobs as a list.



- Cause: Memory Full, Cancel, etc. (cause for which the job was notcompleted)

Follow the procedure below to check the settings of incomplete jobs.

1 Touch [JOB LIST] tab on the Copy screen, then touch [Incomplete].

2 Check the status of the incomplete jobs.









11 Job management


11.2.5 To check/operate suspended jobs

Use this function to display all suspended jobs as a list.



- Mode: Copy or Printer- Status: Suspended or Printing (current status of the job)- Sheets: max. 4-digit page count

- Sets: max. 4-digit set count

- Pages To Go: max. 4-digit pages to be output (Sheets eSets = Pages ToGo)

- Minute(s): time required for completing each job (minute)

Follow the procedure below to check the settings of each job and

release/collectively release the suspended jobs.

1 Touch [JOB LIST] tab on the Copy screen, then touch [Suspended].

– The letters Suspended on the key appears red to prompt you thata suspended job remains in the machine.

2 Check the status of the suspended jobs.


3 Select the desired job, then select the job operation.






Job management 11


To output suspended job

1 Touch to highlight the desired job key, then touch [Release].

The selected job will be output according to the current printing order.

2 To check the printing order, touch [Reserved Job] to display the

reserved job list.

To release all suspended jobs

% Touch [All Release], then touch [Yes] on the popup menu.

All the data of suspended jobs will be cleared.

To check the settings of suspended job

1 Touch to highlight the desired job key, then touch [Details].

2 Check the settings of the selected job on the screen.

3 Touch [Close] to return to the Job List screen.






11 Job management






12Screen setting outlines






Screen setting outlines 12



12.1 Machine status screen setting outlines

The [Paper Setting], [Both Sides Adj.], [Adjustment], and [Controller] keys arelocated at the bottom of the Machine Status screen, to display each settingscreen.








[Paper Setting] key: The paper set popup screen is displayed.

1 Specify paper settings for each tray by registering paper settings orusing predefined settings. This operation is equivalent to touchingPaper Setting on the Copy screen. Please refer to page 9-44 for moreinformation.

2 After completing the Paper Setting mode settings, touch [Close] to exitthe Paper Setting mode.

2

Note

The Utility screen refers to any screen that is displayed when[Utility/Counter] is pressed.








[Both Sides Adj.] key: The both sides adjustment popup screen is

displayed.

1 Specify the Vertical zoom, Horizontal zoom, Up/Down shift amount,and Right/Left shift amount for both front and back pages. For thedetails, see page 6-48.

2 After completing the Adjustment mode settings, touch [Close] to exitthe Adjustment mode.

Any other settings are unavailable during the Both Sides Adjustmentmode.








[Adjustment] key: The adjustment mode menu screen is displayed.

1 Adjust the settings of Image Control and Output options. For thedetails, see page 14-3.

2 After completing the Adjustment mode settings, touch [Exit] to exit the Adjustment mode.








[Controller] key: The controller setting menu screen is displayed.

1 Specify the settings concerning the optional Print Controller. For thedetails, please see the contents of the user manuals for the optionalcontrollers.

2 Touch the [MACHINE] tab to exit the Controller Setting mode.








12.2 Utility screen setting outlines

% Press [Utility/Counter] on the controlpanel to display the Utility menuscreen.

The Utility screen includes two types of setting items: one in which a user canset and the other in which a machine administrator is required to enter apassword.

!DetailThe machine administrator setting can be established by general users in

the initial setting.

It is recommended to assign the machine administrator who will be the

sole person to control the machine administrator setting. Please contact

your service representative to set up your password.








[Close] and [Exit] on the utility screen

Touch [Close] to return to the previous screen.

Touch [Exit] to return to the screen displayed before pressing[Utility/Counter] on the control panel.






13Paper setting






Paper setting 13


13 Paper setting

13.1 Paper setting outlines

This section provides information on, and instructions for, settings the itemsin the User Setting.

This machine provides Paper Setting mode in order to perform printing jobaccording to the characteristics of paper to be used, by specifyingconditions such as Paper Name, Size, Paper Type, Weight, Both Sides

Adjustment, Process Adjustment, Speed Setting, Hole-Punch, Color Paper,and Air Assist.

Paper conditions as mentioned above are supposed to be predefined, andcan be edited and even deleted at any time. (Paper Setting in User Setting

on Utility screen)Recall the predefined conditions for each tray, and modify them, ifnecessary, in order to satisfy the environmental conditions (temperature,humidity, condition of paper, etc.) at that time. (Paper Setting on Copyscreen or Machine Status screen)

This section provides information on, and instructions for, settings the items

in the User Setting.






13 Paper setting


13.1.1 Setting items in paper setting

Paper type

Select one of the following seven types.

High Quality, Plain, Color Specific, Coated-GL, Coated-ML, Coated-GO,

Coated-MO

See page 13-6 for details of paper type specifications.

Paper name

You can use maximum 22 characters.

Weight

Select one of the following eight types.

64-74g/m

2

, 75-80g/m

2

, 81-105g/m

2

, 106-135g/m

2

, 136-16

2

g/m

2

,163-209g/m2, 210-256g/m2, 257-300g/m2

The unit display for paper weight can be changed. Touch [Unit Change] toswitch between the options.

See page 13-6 for details of relation between paper type and weight.

Both sides adj.

Specify the Vertical zoom, Horizontal zoom, Up/Down shift amount,Right/Left shift amount, and Registration Loop for both front and back pag-

es. Vertical zoom: Front -100 to +100, Back -80 to +20 (in 0.1% increments)

Horizontal zoom: -100 to +100 (in 0.1% increments)

We recommend you performing this adjustment every day or every time thetray is loaded with different type of paper, because the coefficient of

contraction varies according to the paper type, brand, or the difference intemperature and humidity of paper repository.

The Horizontal zoom of the Back side is specified with 01 System Setting of

the Machine Admin. Setting.

This adjustment can be performed using a chart in Paper Setting accessedonly from Copy Screen and Machine Status screen.






Paper setting 13


Process adj.

Usually, this adjustment is not available. Contact your service representativefor detail.

Collective adjustment of the process adjustment for all tray is specified withthe Machine Admin. Setting.

Size

Select [Standard] or [Custom].

- The custom sizes registered from Copy screen or Machine Status screen

can be recalled in paper size setting of User Setting, so that the recalledsize information can be registered together with other paper information.(Link Size Information)

- Tab paper in sizes A4 v, 8.5" e 11" w cannot be registered from [PaperSetting] in the User Setting.

Speed setting

Copy speed change with paper type and paper weight.

[Speed Setting] can be select from [High], [Middle], or [High/Middle Automatic] only when [Weight] is set to 106 to 135 g/m2.

Air assist

Use the Air Assist function to blow air to the paper from the guide plate insidethe tray in order to prevent feeding troubles which a specific paper typetends to cause.

Select one of the following four conditions.

Auto, On (Strong), On (Weak), Off






13 Paper setting


13.1.2 Paper type specifications

The following seven paper types are provided according to the plainness ofpaper.

- Coated-GL (Gloss Laser)Glossy paper for laser printing.

- Coated-ML (Mat Laser)Matte paper for laser printing.

- Coated-GO (Gloss Offset)Glossy paper for offset printing.

- Coated-MO (Mat Offset)

Matte paper for offset printing.- High Quality

The High Quality paper is a non-coated paper generally used for offsetprinting. The High Quality paper has a high degree of whiteness and usedfor various purposes. Specify [High Quality] to a tray to which the HighQuality paper is loaded.

- PlainThe Plain paper is used for copying in general and is called "PPC paper."The plain paper is usually not a recycled paper. Specify [Plain] to the trayto which the plain paper or the recycled paper for monochrome copyingis loaded.

- Color SpecificColor specific paper is the type of paper used for color copying to preventcolor dulling on high quality paper. Select [Color Specific] for those trays

that are used for color specific paper.






Paper setting 13


Weight is classified into eight types as shown in the following table.

Plain/Color Specific/ High Quality

Coated-GL Coated-ML Coated-GO Coated-MO

Plain Gloss Plain Gloss Plain Plain Gloss Plain

(Disable) (Disable) (Disable) (Disable) (Disable) (Disable)

(Disable) (Disable) (Disable) (Disable) (Disable) (Disable)






13 Paper setting


* The coated paper of certain brand can not be used with installation environment.Contact your service representative.

Item Description

Air Assist will be activated automatically when Auto is selected.

Copy speed becomes slower due to the setting for slowing down specified inProcess Adj,Copy rate will be 45 cpm or 32 cpm (on A4 paper in simplex mode).(Normally the Process Adj. setting is available by service only.)

Copy speed becomes faster due to the speed setting (with [High] selected) in pa-per setting.Copy rate will be 65 cpm from 45 cpm (on A4 paper in simplex mode).

Copy speed becomes slightly slower.Copy rate will be 45 cpm from 65 cpm (on A4 paper in simplex mode).

Copy speed becomes slower.Copy rate will be 32 cpm from 65 cpm (on A4 paper in simplex mode).






Paper setting 13


Paper weight conversion chart

Paper type

Basic size

(inch)

Bond

17x22

432x559

Cover

20x26

508x660

Index

25.5x30.5

648x775

Bristol

22.5x28.5

572x724

Tag

24x36

610x914

Book

25x38

635x965

g/m2 lb lb lb lb lb lb

50.0 13.3 18.5 27.7 22.8 30.8 33.852.3 13.9 19.4 29.0 23.9 32.2 35.454.2 14.4 20.1 30.0 24.7 33.3 36.760.2 16.0 22.3 33.3 27.5 37.0 40.764.0 17.0 23.7 35.4 29.2 39.4 43.366.3 17.7 24.6 36.7 30.3 40.8 44.968.7 18.3 25.4 38.0 31.4 42.3 46.572.3 19.3 26.8 40.0 33.0 44.5 48.975.9 20.2 28.1 42.0 34.7 46.7 51.380.0 21.3 29.6 44.3 36.5 49.2 54.1

83.7 22.3 31.0 46.4 38.2 51.5 56.688.0 23.4 32.6 48.7 40.2 54.1 59.590.0 24.0 33.3 49.8 41.1 55.4 60.998.3 26.2 36.4 54.4 44.9 60.5 66.5

100.0 26.6 37.0 55.4 45.7 61.5 67.6104.7 27.9 38.8 58.0 47.8 64.4 70.8108.0 28.8 40.0 59.8 49.3 66.4 73.1110.0 29.3 40.7 60.9 50.2 67.7 74.4120.0 32.0 44.4 66.5 54.8 73.8 81.2127.9 34.1 47.4 70.8 58.4 78.7 86.5130.0 34.6 48.1 72.0 59.4 80.0 87.9

140.0 37.3 51.8 77.5 63.9 86.1 94.7150.0 39.9 55.5 83.1 68.5 92.3 101.5160.0 42.6 59.2 88.6 73.1 98.4 108.2170.0 45.3 62.9 94.2 77.6 104.6 115.0180.0 47.9 66.7 99.7 82.2 110.7 121.8

190.0 50.6 70.4 105.2 86.8 116.9 128.5200.0 53.3 74.1 110.8 91.3 123.1 135.3210.0 55.9 77.8 116.3 95.9 129.2 142.1220.0 58.6 81.5 121.8 100.5 135.4 148.8230.0 61.3 85.2 127.4 105.0 141.5 155.6240.0 63.9 88.9 132.9 109.6 147.7 162.4250.0 66.6 92.6 138.5 114.2 153.8 169.1

260.0 69.2 96.3 144.0 118.7 160.0 175.9270.0 71.9 100.0 149.5 123.3 166.1 182.7280.0 74.6 103.7 155.1 127.9 172.3 189.4290.0 77.2 107.4 160.6 132.4 178.4 196.2300.0 79.9 111.1 166.1 137.0 184.6 202.9






13 Paper setting


13.2 Register paper type/weight

Follow the procedure below to register paper type/weight in the User Setting.

1 Press [Utility/Counter] on the controlpanel.

The Utility menu screen will bedisplayed.

2 Touch [02 User Setting], [01 System Setting], and then [03 Feed TraySetting].






Paper setting 13


3 Touch [01 Paper Setting].

The Paper Setting Menu screen will be displayed.

4 Touch the key to be registered.

– To modify the a paper setting which is already registered, touch toselect the corresponding name for the setting. To register a newsetting, touch to highlight a blank line.






13 Paper setting


5 Touch Add/Edit.

The Input Condition screen will be displayed.

6 Select the paper type.

– Touch [Paper Type] to display the Paper Type screen.– Select the desired paper type, and the touch [OK] to complete the

setting.

See page 13-6 for details of the paper types.






Paper setting 13


7 Enter the paper name.

– Touch [Name] to display the Input Name screen.

– Enter the name of the paper to be used, and then touch [OK].You can use maximum 22 characters.

– The same name as the paper type specified is displayed on thescreen. To alter it, enter the new paper type name. For details onentering texts in the field, see "26 Appendix".

8Select the paper weight.

– Touch [Weight] to display the Paper Weight screen.– Select a desired key to set the paper weight. To change the unit for

paper weight, touch [Unit Change] until a desired unit is displayed.Touch [OK] on selecting an appropriate key.






13 Paper setting


9 Adjust the printed position of the front and back.

– Touch [Both Sides Adj.] to display the Front and Back Page Adjustment screen.

– Enter the adjustment value as follows.

Touch [Front] or [Back] on the Front and Back Page Adjustmentscreen to select the printed side.Select the adjustment item (vertical zoom, horizontal zoom, verticalshift, horizontal shift, and Registration)

10 Operate the process adjustment.

– Touch [Process Adj.]






Paper setting 13


– Enter the adjustment value as follows.Display the required item touching [Next] and [Previous], and touchit.Touch [+ <-> -] to specify the value to be positive or negative.Usethe touch panel keypad or arrow keys [+] and [,] to enter thedesired adjustment value.

– To reset the value, touch [Reset]. To complete the adjustment,touch [OK].

11 Adjust the copying speed.

– Touch [Speed Setting] to display the Speed Setting screen.– Copy speed changes with paper type and paper weight.– The [Speed Setting] key is available only when [Weight] is set to

106-135 g/m2.

– Select the desired speed setting. Touch [OK] to complete thesetting.

12 Specify whether to punch holes on paper or not.

– Select [Punched] or [No punched].

13 Specify whether to use color specific paper or not.

– Select [Non White] or [White].

14 Specify the air assist setting.

– Select [Auto], [On (Strong)], [On (Weak)], or [Off].






13 Paper setting


15 Select the paper size.

– To specify the standard size, touch [Standard] on the link sizeinformation to display the Standard Size Setting screen.Select the desired size key, then touch [OK] to complete the setting.

– To specify the custom size, recall the custom size registered fromCopy screen or Machine Status screen. Touch [Custom] on the linksize information to display the Size Recall Screen. Select the de-sired size key, then touch [OK] to complete the setting.Custom sizes can be registered on the Copy screen, or by selecting[Paper Setting] > [Size Setting] the Machine Status screen. Pleaserefer to page 6-48 for more information.






Paper setting 13


16 Touch [OK] on the Input Condition screen.

– The Paper Setting screen will be restored.Touch [Reset] to reset to the initial setting.


– Touch [Exit] to return to the Copy screen.

!DetailChart adjustment is available from the Paper Setting on the Copy screen

or Machine Status screen only.

Paper Setting of User Setting does not provide this function.

Contact your service representative for details.

Air assist setting is available when tray 4 and tray 5.






13 Paper setting


13.3 Delete paper setting

Follow the procedure below to delete the paper setting previously registered.

1 Press [Utility/Counter] on the controlpanel.


2 Touch [02 User Setting], [01 System Setting], and then [03 Feed TraySetting].






Paper setting 13


3 Touch [01 Paper Setting].

The Paper Setting screen will be displayed.

4 Touch the key to be deleted.






13 Paper setting


5 Touch [Delete].

A popup menu will be displayed to confirm that the selected register

will be deleted.

6 Touch [Yes] to delete, or [No].

– Return to the Input Condition screen. To delete multiple papertypes, repeat steps 4 and 6.


– Touch [Exit] to return to the Copy screen.






14Machine adjustment






Machine adjustment 14



This section describes information on adjusting the settings in the Image

Control and Output options.

14.1 01 Machine Adjustment

14.1.1 01 Printer Adjustment \ 01 Restart Timing Adjustment

Perform this adjustment to control the restart timing.

2

Reminder

Perform this adjustment after completing FD-Mag. Adjustment.

To specify Restart Timing Adjustment

1 Touch [Adjustment] on the Machine Status screen.

The Adjustment Menu screen will be displayed.

2 Touch [01 Machine Adjustment], [01 Printer Adjustment], and then[01 Restart Timing Adjustment].

The Restart Timing Adjustment screen will be displayed.








3 Touch [COPY] tab.

The Copy screen will be displayed.

4 Select A3 w /11" e 17" w paper, then press [START].

The sample pattern (No. 16) will be output.

5 Measure the resultant restart timing.

6 If the desired result cannot be obtained, touch the [ADJUSTMENT] tab.

The Restart Timing Adjustment screen will be restored.

20








7 Display the required item using up/down arrow keys, and touch it.

8 Use the touch panel keypad to enter the desired adjustment value, thentouch [<<SET].

Available range: -60 to +60, 1 step = 0.1 mm

9 Repeat the adjustment steps from 3 to 8 until the desired result isobtained.

10 Touch [Return] to restore the Adjustment Menu screen.








14.1.2 01 Printer Adjustment \ 02 Centering Adjustment

Perform this adjustment to control image centering to the direction of paperfeed.

To specify Centering Adjustment



2 Touch [01 Machine Adjustment], [01 Printer Adjustment], and then[02 Centering Adjustment].

The Centering Adjustment screen will be displayed.

3 Touch [COPY] tab.











5 Fold the output sheet at the center to the direction of paper feed andmeasure the distance between the lines on both sides.


The Centering Adjustment screen will be restored.


8Use the touch panel keypad to enter the desired adjustment value, thentouch [<<SET].











14.1.3 01 Printer Adjustment \ 03 FD-Mag. Adjustment

Perform this adjustment to control the magnification to the direction of paperfeed.

2

NoteThis value is used as the baseline for the Both Sides Adjustment function

in the Paper Setting. Specified value in that adjustment will be an offset

estimated from this baseline.

To specify FD-Mag. Adjustment



2 Touch [01 Machine Adjustment], [01 Printer Adjustment], and then[03 FD-Mag. Adjustment].

The FD-Mag. Adjustment screen will be displayed.








3 Touch the required item key.

4 Touch [COPY] tab.




6 Measure the resultant magnification to the direction of paper feed.

7 If the desired result cannot be obtained, touch the [ADJUSTMENT] tab.The FD-Mag. Adjustment screen will be restored.

205.7










Available range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01%










14.1.4 01 Printer Adjustment \ 04 CD-Mag. Adjustment

Perform this adjustment to control the magnification perpendicular to thedirection of paper feed.

To specify CD-Mag. Adjustment



2 Touch [01 Machine Adjustment], [01 Printer Adjustment], and then[04 CD-Mag. Adjustment].

The CD-Mag. Adjustment screen will be displayed.









4 Touch [COPY] tab.


5 Select A3 w /11" e 17" w paper, then press [START].The sample pattern (No. 16) will be output.

6 Measure the resultant magnification perpendicular to the direction ofpaper feed.


The CD-Mag. Adjustment screen will be restored.




190








14.1.5 02 Scanner Adjustment \ 01 Restart Timing Adjustment

Perform this adjustment to control the restart timing in scanning the originalwith the original glass.

To specify Restart Timing Adjustment



2 Touch [01 Machine Adjustment], [02 Scanner Adjustment], and then[01 Restart Timing Adjustment].

The Scanner Restart Timing Adjustment screen will be displayed.

3 Touch [COPY] tab.









4 Select A3 w /11" e 17" w paper, place the original of which amisalignment can be easily monitored on the original glass, then press[START].

5 Check the misalignment by comparing the original and the output.


The Scanner Restart Timing Adjustment screen will be restored.












14.1.6 02 Scanner Adjustment \ 02 Centering Adjustment

Perform this adjustment to control image centering to the direction of paperfeed in scanning the original with original glass.

To specify Centering Adjustment



2 Touch [01 Machine Adjustment], [02 Scanner Adjustment], and then[02 Centering Adjustment].


3 Touch [COPY] tab.









4 Select A3 w /11" e 17" w paper, place the original of which amisalignment can be easily monitored on the original glass, then press[START].


5 Check the misalignment by comparing the original and the output.


The Scanner Centering Adjustment screen will be restored.













14.1.7 02 Scanner Adjustment \ 03 FD-Mag. Adjustment

Perform this adjustment to control the magnification to the direction of paperfeed in scanning the original with original glass.

To specify FD-Mag. Adjustment



2 Touch [01 Machine Adjustment], [02 Scanner Adjustment], and then[03 FD-Mag. Adjustment].









3 Touch [COPY] tab.




5 Check the magnification in the direction of paper feed by comparing

the output and the original.


The Scanner FD-Mag. Adjustment screen will be restored.










14.2 02 Image Quality Stability

Set priority to either the output speed or the image quality stability in acopying or printing job.

To specify Image Quality Stability



2 Touch [02 Image Quality Stability].

The Image Quality Stability screen will be displayed.

3 Select [Speed] or [Stability] for a copying or printing job.

4 Touch [OK] to restore the Adjustment Menu screen.








14.3 03 Execute Adjust Operation

Execute adjustment operations for the Automatic Gamma Adj., the ColorRegistration Adj., the Toner Refresh Mode, and the Belt Refresh Mode.

To specify Execute Adjust Operation



2 Touch [03 Execute Adjust Operation].

The Execute Adjust Operation screen will be displayed.

3 Touch an appropriate key to execute the adjustment operation.

4 Touch [OK] to restore the Adjustment Menu screen.








14.4 04 Finisher Adjustment (FS-503)

14.4.1 01 Stapler Position Adj. \ 01 Staple Center Position

Perform this adjustment for the center position of copied/printed sheets andof staples processed by the Staple finisher FS-503.

The paper width adjustment is supposed to be completed before thisadjustment.

To specify Staple Center Position



2 Touch [04 Finisher Adjustment], [01 Stapler Position Adj.], and then[01 Staple Center Position].

The Staple Center Position screen will be displayed.








3 Touch [COPY] tab.


A sample copy will be output.

5 If the desired result cannot be obtained, touch [ADJUSTMENT] tab.

The Staple Center Position screen will be restored.


Available range: -20 (forward) to +20 (backward), 1 step = 0.1 mm








7 Fold the output sheet in two on the center to the direction of paper feedand check misalignment (a) of the stapling center position.

8 If the test desired result cannot be obtained, touch [ADJUSTMENT]tab. Repeat the adjustment steps from 3 to 7 until the desired result isobtained.









14.4.2 01 Stapler Position Adj. \ 02 Paper Width (Staple)

Perform this adjustment if stapled sheets are not aligned neatly processedby the Staple finisher FS-503.

To specify Paper Width (Staple)



2 Touch [04 Finisher Adjustment], [01 Stapler Position Adj.], and then[02 Paper Width (Staple)].

The Paper Width (Staple) screen will be displayed.

3 Touch [COPY] tab.









4 Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, touch Stapleand then press [Start].

A sample pattern (No. 16) will be output.

5 Open the finisher door, and withdrawthe Staple unit.

– Confirm the distance betweenthe fixed plates and outputpaper.

– When selecting the paper whichlength side is 239mm or longer,

the Staple unit can not bewithdrawn.

Remove output paper from the paperexit side, withdraw the staple unit, and then reset the output paper in

the unit.

6 Check misalignment (a), in which misalignment occurs if the paper

width setting is larger than the actual width, or paper curving (b), inwhich a sample set is curved if the paper width setting is smaller thanthe actual width has occurred.


The Paper Width (Staple) screen will be restored.

a

b








8 Display the required size key using up/down arrow keys, and touch it.


Available range: -20 (wide) to +20 (narrow), 1 step = 0.1 mm

10 Remove the output paper, and close the finisher door.

11 If the test desired result cannot be obtained, touch [ADJUSTMENT]tab. Repeat the adjustment steps from 3 to 10 until the desired resultis obtained.









14.4.3 01 Stapler Position Adj. \ 03 Paper Width (Straight)

Perform this adjustment if the paper for straight feed is misaligned in theStaple finisher FS-503.

To specify Paper Width (Straight)



2 Touch [04 Finisher Adjustment], [01 Stapler Position Adj.], and then[03 Paper Width (Straight)].

The Paper Width (Straight) screen will be displayed.

3 Touch [COPY] tab.









4 Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, touch Stapleand then press [Start].


5 Open the finisher door, and withdrawthe Staple unit.

– Confirm the distance betweenthe fixed plates and outputpaper.

– When selecting the paper which

length side is 239mm or longer,the Staple unit can not bewithdrawn.

Remove output paper from the paper exit side, withdraw the staple

unit, and then reset the output paper in the unit.

6 Check whether any misalignment or paper buckling has occurred.

Misalignment may occur if the paper width setting is larger than theactual width, and paper may become buckled if the paper width settingis smaller than the actual width.


The Paper Width (Straight) screen will be restored.

a

b











10 Remove the output paper, and close the finisher door.

11 If the test desired result cannot be obtained, touch [ADJUSTMENT]tab. Repeat the adjustment steps from 3 to 10 until the desired resultis obtained.









14.5 04 Finisher Adjustment (FD-501)

14.5.1 02 Multi Folder (Punch) Adj. \ 01 Paper Width Adjustment

Perform this adjustment for the specific paper size if punch holes processedby the folding unit FD-501 dislocate largely.

To specify Paper Width Adjustment



2 Touch [04 Finisher Adjustment], [02 Multi Folder (Punch) Adj.], and then

[01 Paper Width Adjustment].

The Paper Width Adjustment screen will be displayed.








3 Touch [COPY] tab.


4 Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, specify the setnumber to 10, then press [Start] on the control panel.

A sample pattern will be output.

5 Check the diameter of penetrated holes when output sheets are piledup.


The Paper Width Adjustment screen will be restored.













2

NoteIf the setting is too wide, the center position of punch holes may

dislocate. If the setting is too narrow, the position of punch holes may

vary.








14.5.2 02 Multi Folder (Punch) Adj. \ 02 Hole-Punch Vertical Pos.

Perform this adjustment for the position of punch holes to the direction ofpaper feed.

Punch holes can be adjusted separately for 2-hole punch and 4-hole punch.

To specify Hole-Punch Vertical Pos.



2 Touch [04 Finisher Adjustment], [02 Multi Folder (Punch) Adj.], and then[02 Hole-Punch Vertical Pos.].

3 Touch [2-Hole Punch] or [4-Hole Punch].

The corresponding Paper Width Adjustment screen is displayed.








4 Touch [COPY] tab.


5 Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, specify Punch,then press [Start] on the control panel.


6 Check the distance (a) from the edge of the feeding sheet to the centerposition of the punch hole.














11 If adjustment in any other size is required, repeat steps from 4 to 10.









14.5.3 03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj. \ 01 Half Fold Position Adj.

Perform this adjustment for the half fold position processed by the foldingunit FD-501.

To specify Half Fold Position Adj.



2 Touch [04 Finisher Adjustment], [03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.], and then[01 Half Fold Position Adj.].

The Half Fold Position Adjustment screen will be displayed.

3 Touch [COPY] tab.









4 Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, specify Folding,then press [Start] on the control panel.


5 Check the misalignment (a) of the edge of the feeding sheets.


The Half Fold Position Adjustment screen will be restored.



Available range: -50 to +50, 1 step = 0.1 mm– When misalignment (a) of step 5 has occurred, enter the "+" value.




a








14.5.4 03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj. \ 02 Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj.

Perform this adjustment for the folding positions in Tri-Fold-in modeprocessed by the folding unit FD-501.

2

ReminderWhen adjusting both Single Fold and Double Fold, be sure to start with

the Double Fold adjustment.

The baseline of Single Fold is calculated from the edge of the sheet, while

that of Double Fold is calculated from the position of the first fold line,

therefore a distance (b) in step 5 will be altered by changing the position

of either Single Fold or Double Fold.

To specify Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj.



2 Touch [04 Finisher Adjustment], [03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.], and then[02 Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj.].

The Tri-Fold-in Position Adjustment screen will be displayed.








3 Touch [COPY] tab.


4 Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, specify LetterFold-in, then press [Start] on the control panel.


5 Check a distance (a) and distance (b) on the output sheet.


The Tri-Fold-in Position Adjustment screen will be restored.

a

b

[2]

[1]









8 Touch [Double Fold].



– The distance (a) in step 5 will increase when the "+" value isentered, and decrease when the "-" value is entered.

10 Touch [Single Fold.], then repeat step 9.

– The distance (b) in step 5 will increase when the "+" value isentered, and decrease when the "-" value is entered.

11 Repeat steps 3 to 10 until the desired result is obtained.










14.5.5 03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj. \ 03 Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj.

Perform this adjustment for the folding positions in Tri-Fold-out modeprocessed by the folding unit FD-501.

2

NoteThe baseline of Single Fold is calculated from the edge of the sheet, while




To specify Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj.



2 Touch [04 Finisher Adjustment], [03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.], and then[03 Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj.].

The Tri-Fold-out Position Adjustment screen will be displayed.








3 Touch [COPY] tab.


4 Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, specify Tri-Fold-out, then press [Start] on the control panel.




The Tri-Fold-out Position Adjustment screen will be restored.

a

b[2]

[1]









8 Touch [Single Fold].




10 Touch [Double Fold], repeat step 9.












14.5.6 03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj. \ 04 Double Parallel Pos. Adj.

Perform this adjustment for the folding positions in Tri-Fold-in modeprocessed by the folding unit FD-501.

2







To specify Double Parallel Pos. Adj.



2 Touch [04 Finisher Adjustment], [03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.], and then[04 Double Parallel Pos. Adj.].

The Double Parallel Position Adjustment screen will be displayed.








3 Touch [COPY] tab.


4 Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, specify DoubleParallel, then press Start on the control panel.




The Double Parallel Position Adjustment screen will be restored.

b

a

[2]

[1]












– The distance (a) in step 5 will decrease when the "+" value isentered, and increase when the "-" value is entered.


– The distance (b) in step 5 will decrease when the "+" value isentered, and increase when the "-" value is entered.











14.5.7 03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj. \ 05 Z-Fold Position Adj.

Perform this adjustment for the folding positions in Z-fold mode processedby the folding unit FD-501.

2


the Single Fold adjustment.





To specify Z-Fold Position Adj.



2 Touch [04 Finisher Adjustment], [03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.], and then[05 Z-Fold Position Adj.].

The Z-Fold Position Adjustment screen will be displayed.








3 Touch [COPY] tab.


4 Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, specify Z-Fold,then press [Start] on the control panel.




The Z-Fold Position Adjustment screen will be restored.

b

a

[2]

[1]









8 Touch Single Fold.
















14.5.8 03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj. \ 06 Gate Fold Position Adj.

Perform this adjustment for the folding positions in Gate folding modeprocessed by the folding unit FD-501.

2

ReminderWhen adjusting Single Fold, Double Fold and Triple Fold at a time, be

sure to start with the Single Fold adjustment.


that of Double Fold is calculated from the position of the first fold line, and

that of Triple Fold is calculated from the position of the second fold line,

therefore a distance (a), distance (b) and distance (c) in step 5 will be

altered by changing the position of any fold position.

To specify Gate Fold Position Adj.



2 Touch [04 Finisher Adjustment], [03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.], and then[06 Gate Fold Position Adj].

The Gate Fold Position Adjustment screen will be displayed.








3 Touch [COPY] tab.


4 Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, specify Gate,then press [Start] on the control panel.


5 Check a distance (a), distance (b) and distance (c) on the output sheet.


The Gate Fold Position Adjustment screen will be restored.

a

b c

[3]

[1]

[2]












– The distance (a) in step 5 will decrease when the "+" value isentered, and increase when the "-" value is entered.

10 Touch [Double Fold] and [Triple Fold] to set in the same mannerrespectively.

Repeat step 9.

– In Double Fold, the distance (b) in step 5 will increase when the "+"

value is entered, and decrease when the "-" value is entered.In Triple Fold, the distance (c) in step 5 will decrease when the "+"value is entered, and increase when the "-" value is entered.











14.6 04 Finisher Adjustment (LS-501)

14.6.1 05 Stacker Adjustment \ 01 Paper Width Adjustment

Perform this adjustment when output sheets are not aligned in aperpendicular position to the direction of paper feed processed by the large

capacity Stacker LS-501.

To specify Paper Width Adjustment



2 Touch [04 Finisher Adjustment], [05 Stacker Adjustment], and then[01 Paper Width Adjustment].

The Paper Width Adjustment screen will be displayed.








3 Touch [COPY] tab.


4 Specify A3 then press [Start] on the control panel.


5 If output sheets are misaligned, touch [ADJUSTMENT] tab.



Available range: -20 (narrow) to +20 (wide), 1 step = 0.1 mm










14.6.2 05 Stacker Adjustment \ 02 Paper Length Adjustment

Perform this adjustment when output sheets are not aligned to the directionof paper feed processed by the large capacity stacker LS-501.

To specify Length Adjustment



2 Touch [04 Finisher Adjustment], [05 Stacker Adjustment], and then[02 Paper Length Adjustment].

The Paper Length Adjustment screen will be displayed.

3 Touch [COPY] tab.









4 Specify A3 then press [Start] on the control panel.


5 If output sheets are misaligned, touch [ADJUSTMENT] tab.

The Paper Length Adjustment screen will be restored.


Available range: -20 (narrow) to +20 (wide), 1 step = 0.1 mm










14.7 04 Finisher Adjustment (SD-501)

14.7.1 06 Saddle Stitcher Adj. \ 01 Staple Center Adj.

Perform this adjustment for the center (folding) position of copied/printedsheets and of staples processed by the saddle stitcher SD-501.

The [06 Fold Paper Width Adj.] and [04 Half Fold Position Adj.] are supposedto be completed before this adjustment.

To specify Staple Center Adj.

1 Touch Adjustment on the Machine Status screen.


2 Touch [04 Finisher Adjustment], [06 Saddle Stitcher Adj.], and then[01 Staple Center Adj.].

The Staple Center Adjustment screen will be displayed.








3 Touch [COPY] tab.


4 Select the Fold&Staple mode, then press [Start] on the control panel.

A sample copy will be output.

5 Check misalignment (a) of the folded line and stapling position.

6 If the test desired result cannot be obtained, touch [ADJUSTMENT]

tab.

The Staple Center Adjustment screen will be restored.

a

[2]

[1]









Available range: -50 (forward) to +50 (backward), 1 step = 0.1 mm










14.7.2 06 Saddle Stitcher Adj. \ 02 Staple Paper Width Adj.

Perform this adjustment if stapled sheets are not aligned neatly processedby the saddle stitcher SD-501.

To specify Staple Paper Width Adj.



2 Touch [04 Finisher Adjustment], [06 Saddle Stitcher Adj.], and then[02 Staple Paper Width Adj.].

The Staple Paper Width Adjustment screen will be displayed.

3 Touch [COPY] tab.









4 Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, selectFold&Staple and then press [Start] on the control panel.


5 Check misalignment (a), in which misalignment occurs if the paperwidth setting is larger than the actual width, or paper curving (b), in

which a sample set is curved if the paper width setting is smaller thanthe actual width has occurred.


The Staple Paper Width Adjustment screen will be restored.


8 Use the touch panel keypad to enter the desired adjustment value, then

touch [<<SET]. Available range: -20 (wide) to +20 (narrow), 1 step = 0.1 mm


a

b








10 If adjustment in any other paper size is required, repeat steps from 3to 9.


2

NoteThe following limitation is put on the paper width setting according to the

actual paper width.

* Using paper size of which actual width is less than 222 mm such as A4 w, the staple pitch willbe set to 91 mm automatically even if the value shorter than 91 mm of staple pitch is entered.

Actual paper width Minimum value Maximum value

~ 222 mm 91 mm Actual width minus 91 mm

222 mm ~ 290 mm Not limited Not limited

290 mm ~ Not limited 165 mm








14.7.3 06 Saddle Stitcher Adj. \ 03 Staple Pitch Adjustment

Perform this adjustment for the staple pitch processed by the saddle stitcherSD-501.

To specify Staple Pitch Adjustment



2 Touch [04 Finisher Adjustment], [06 Saddle Stitcher Adj.], and then[03 Staple Pitch Adjustment].

The Staple Pitch Adjustment screen will be displayed.

3 Touch [COPY] tab.









4 Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, specifyFold&Staple, then press [Start] on the control panel.


5 Check the staple pitch (a) of the sample sheet.


The Staple Pitch Adjustment screen will be restored.


8 Use the touch panel keypad to enter the desired adjustment value, then

touch [<<SET]. Available range: -20 (wide) to +20 (narrow), 1 step = 1 mm









14.7.4 06 Saddle Stitcher Adj. \ 04 Half Fold Position Adj.

Perform this adjustment for the double-folding position processed by thesaddle stitcher SD-501.

To specify Half Fold Position Adj.



2 Touch [04 Finisher Adjustment], [06 Saddle Stitcher Adj.], and then[04 Half Fold Position Adj.].

The Half Fold Position Adjustment screen will be displayed.

3 Touch [COPY] tab.









4 Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, specify MultiHalf Fold, then press [Start] on the control panel.




The Half Fold Position Adjustment screen will be restored.



Available range: -20 to +20, 1 step = 0.1 mm– When misalignment (a) of step 5 has occurred, enter the "+" value.


10 If adjustment in any other size is required, repeat steps 3 to 9.









14.7.5 06 Saddle Stitcher Adj. \ 05 Tri-Fold Position Adj.

Perform this adjustment for the three-folding positions processed by thesaddle stitcher SD-501.

2

NoteWhen adjusting both Single Fold and Double Fold, be sure to start with








2 Touch [04 Finisher Adjustment], [06 Saddle Stitcher Adj.], and then[05 Tri-Fold Position Adj.].

The Tri-Fold Position Adjustment screen will be displayed.








3 Touch [COPY] tab.


4 Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, specifyTri-Fold, then press [Start] on the control panel.




The Tri-Fold Position Adjustment screen will be restored.

a

b

[2]

[1]








7 Touch the required size key.

8 Touch [Double Fold].




10 Touch [Single Fold], repeat step 9.












14.7.6 06 Saddle Stitcher Adj. \ 06 Fold Paper Width Adj.

Adjust misalignment of the fold & staple, multi fold, and multi tri-fold paperprocessed by the saddle stitcher SD-501.

To specify Fold Paper Width Adj.



2 Touch [04 Finisher Adjustment], [06 Saddle Stitcher Adj.], and then[06 Fold Paper Width Adj.].

The Fold Paper Width Adjustment screen will be displayed.

3 Touch [COPY] tab.









4 Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, specify thenumber of sheets to 5, then press [Start] on the control panel.

A sample pattern will be output.

5 Check that any dislocation is found in the output set.


The Fold Paper Width Adjustment screen will be restored.




– If the setting is too wide, the distance of misalignment may belarger.

9 Repeat the adjustment steps from 3 to 8 until the desired result is

obtained.










14.7.7 06 Saddle Stitcher Adj. \ 07 Trimming Adjustment

Perform this adjustment for the trimmed width.

To specify Trimming Adjustment

1Touch [Adjustment] on the Machine Status screen.


2 Touch [04 Finisher Adjustment], [06 Saddle Stitcher Adj.], and then[07 Trimming Adjustment].

The Trimming Adjustment screen will be displayed.

3 Touch [COPY] tab.









4 Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, specifyFold&Staple, then press [Start] on the control panel.


5 Check the trimmed width (a) from the edge of the feeding sheet.


The Trimming Adjustment screen will be restored.







2NoteEnter the value so that the cover should be cut more than 2.0 mm.

If "All Size" is selected as paper size, the entered adjustment value will be

applied to all sizes. If specific paper size is selected, adjustment value will

be the sum of the entered value and the value previously specified for "All

Size".








14.7.8 06 Saddle Stitcher Adj. \ 08 Trimming Receiver Adj.

Frequent trimming may cause damage to the receiver, resulting in trimmingfailures. Select the interval in which the receiver should be moved after

specified trimming operations (Trimmer Count). Select the pitch to move thereceiver (Move Pitch). Force the receiver to be moved if trimming operationsare beginning to fail (Execute Compulsive Movement).

08 Trimming Receiver Adj. key is not display normally.If the adjustment is provided, contact your service representative.

To specify Trimming Receiver Adjustment



2 Touch [04 Finisher Adjustment], [06 Saddle Stitcher Adj.], and then

[08 Trimming Receiver Adj.].

The Trimming Receiver Adjustment screen will be displayed.








3 Select the trimmer count.

Touch to choose between [700 times], [500 times], and [300 times].

4 Select the move pitch.

Touch to choose between [1.0 mm], [1.5 mm], and [2.0 mm].

5 Touch [Execute Compulsive Movement] to force the receiver to be

moved.

This operation takes effect immediately, and touching [Cancel] will notabort the operation.


The Adjustment Menu screen will be restored.








14.8 04 Finisher Adjustment (RU-503/RU-504)

14.8.1 07 RU Adjustment \ 01 Curl Reform Direction

When paper jam occurs in options, it can be prevented by selecting the curlreform direction for the paper fed into the Relay Unit.

To specify Curl Reform Direction



2 Touch [04 Finisher Adjustment], [07 RU Adjustment], and then

[01Curl Reform Direction].

The Curl Reform Direction screen will be displayed.








3 Touch to select [Upper] or [Lower]. Touch [Off] if you do not use thefunction.









14.9 Finisher Adjustment (FS-607)

14.9.1 01 Saddle Stitcher Stopper Adj.

Adjust the dislocation of staple positions in widthwise direction of paperusing Fold & Staple mode operated by the Finisher FS-607.

1 Touch [Adjustment] on the Machine Status Screen.

The Adjustment Menu Screen will be displayed.

2 Touch [04 Finisher Adjustment] and [01Fold & Staple Stopper Adjustment].

The Fold & Staple Stopper Adjustment Screen will be displayed.

3 Touch [COPY] tab.

The Copy Screen will be displayed.








4 Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, selectFold&Staple and then press [Start] on the control panel.


5 Check the misalignment center fold and position of staples on outputsheets.


The Fold & Staple Stopper Adjustment Screen will be restored.


8 Touch [+ 5 -] to specify the value to be positive or negative. Use thetouch panel keypad to enter the desired adjustment value, then touch[<<SET].

Available range: -128 (wide) to +127 (narrow), 1 step = 1 mm


obtained.









11 Touch [Return] to restore the Adjustment Menu Screen.








14.9.2 02 Half Fold Stopper Adjustment

Perform this adjustment for the double-folding position processed by theFinishher FS-607.



2 Touch [04 Finisher Adjustment] and [02 Half Fold Stopper Adj.].

The Half Fold Stopper Adjustment Screen will be displayed.

3 Touch [COPY] tab.









4 Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, specify MultiCenter, then press [Start] on the control panel.




The Half Fold Stopper Adjustment Screen will be restored.




– When misalignment (a) of step 5 has occurred, enter the "+" value.


obtained.










14.9.3 03 Punch Adjustment \ 01 Vertical Position Adj.

Perform this adjustment for the center position of punch holes operated bythe Punch Kit PK-512/513.



2 Touch [04 Finisher Adjustment], [03 Punch Adjustment], and then [01

Vertical Position Adj.].

The Vertical Position Adjustment Screen is displayed.

3 Touch [COPY] tab.









4 Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, specify Punch,then press [Start] on the control panel.


5 Check the value of misalignment (a) between the center-fold line andpunch position.


The Vertical Position Adjustment Screen will be restored.


8 Touch [+ 5 -] to specify the value to be positive or negative. Use the

touch panel keypad to enter the desired adjustment value, then touch[<<SET].












14.9.4 03 Punch Adjustment \ 02 Horizontcal Position Adj.

Perform this adjustment for the position of punch holes in the feedingdirection operated by the Punch Kit PK-512/513.




Horizontal Position Adj.].

The Horizontal Position Adjustment Screen is displayed.

3 Select the desired tray.

4 Touch [COPY] tab.









5 Load the paper on the desired tray (main body tray or Paper insertertray) to be adjusted, specify Punch, then press [Start] on the controlpanel.


6 Check the distance (a) from the edge of the output sheet to the center

of the punch hole.


The Horizontal Position Adjustment Screen will be restored.











10 If adjustment in any other tray is required, repeat steps from 3 to 9.









14.9.5 03 Punch Adjustment \ 03 Registration Adjustment

Perform this adjustment for the skew of the punch position made by thePunch Kit PK-512/513 in duplex copying or cover sheet feeding using the

paper inserter.

1Touch [Adjustment] on the Machine Status Screen.


2 Touch [04 Finisher Adjustment], [03 Punch Adjustment], and then [03Registration Adjustment].

The Registration Adjustment Screen is displayed.

3 Select the desired tray.








4 Touch [COPY] tab.


5 Load the desired size of paper on the tray to be adjusted, specifyPunch, then press [Start] on the control panel.


6 Check whether or not the punch position is skew on the output sheet.


The Registration Adjustment Screen will be restored.











14.9.6 03 Punch Adjustment \ 04 Paper Edge Detect Sensor Adj.

Perform this adjustment to detect the paper edge to be used as referencepoint of punching operation.




Paper Edged Detect Sensor Adj.].

The Paper Edged Detect Sensor Adjustment Screen is displayed.

3 Touch [Start].

The adjustment result will be displayed.









14.9.7 04 Tri-Fold Adjustment

Perform this adjustment for the three-folding positions processed by theFinisher FS-607.



2 Touch [04 Finisher Adjustment], and then [04 Tri-Fold Adjustment].

The Tri-Fold Adjustment Screen will be displayed.

3 Touch [COPY] tab.









4 Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, specify Tri-Fold, then press [Start] on the control panel.


5 Check the folding positions on the output sheet.


The Tri-Fold Adjustment Screen will be restored.

7 Touch the required size key.


Available range: -128 (left) to +127 (right), 1 step = 0.1 mm

– If specified value is positive, the folding positions move to the right.Or, if negative value is specified, the folding positions move to theleft.









14.9.8 05 2 Position Staple Pitch Adjustment

Perform this adjustment for the staple pitch in Staple and Fold & Staplemodes.



2 Touch [04 Finisher Adjustment], and then [05 2 Pos. Staple Pitch Adj.].

The 2 Position Staple Pitch Adjustment Screen will be displayed.

3 Select the folding key to be adjusted.

4 Touch [COPY] tab.









5 Select the folding method to be adjusted, then press [Start] on thecontrol panel.


6 Check the amount of staple pitch.

7 If the desired result cannot be obtained, touch [ADJUSTMENT] tab.The 2 Position Staple Pitch Adjustment Screen will be restored.

8 Touch [+ 5 -] to specify the value to be positive or negative. Use the

touch panel keypad to enter the desired adjustment value, then touch[<<SET].

Available range: +120 to +160, 1 step = 1 mm


10 If adjustment in any other folding is required, repeat steps from 3 to 9.









14.9.9 06 Paper Inserter Tray Size Adj.

Perform the size adjustment for the Upper tray and Lower tray of the PapeInserter PI-502.



2 Touch [04 Finisher Adjustment], and then [06 Paper Inserter Tray Size

Adj.].

The PI 1 Tray Size Adjustment Screen is displayed.

3 Load the A4 w or 8.5" e 11" w on the Upper tray of the Paper Inserter,and then touch [Start].

4 Touch [Next] to display the PI 2 Tray Size Adjustment Screen.








5 Load the A4 w or 8.5" e 11" w on the Lower tray of the Paper Inserter,and then touch [Start].









14.9.1007 Output Quantity Limit

Specify the quantity limit of the staple, fold & staple, half fold, or tri-fold.



2 Touch [04 Finisher Adjustment], and then [07 Output Quality Limit].

The Output Quality Limit Screen is displayed.

3 Touch the desired key to be specified the quantity limit.


The following adjustment range can be set:Staple 64 - 80 g/m2: 2 to 50 sheetsStaple 81 - 105 g/m2: 2 to 20 sheetsStaple 106 - 209 g/m2: 2 to 20 sheets

Fold & Staple 64 - 80 g/m2: 2 to 20 sheetsFold & Staple 81 - 105 g/m2: 2 to 16 sheetsHalf Fold 64 - 105 g/m2: 1 to 3 sheets

Tri-Fold 64 - 80 g/m2: 1 to 3 sheets







15Utility screen outlines






Utility screen outlines 15



15.1 Chart of setting items on Utility screen

This section uses a systematic chart to describe the setting items providedon layered Utility screens.

Utility menu

[01] ScanSend Ad-dress*1

[01] AddressEdit

E-Mail

HDD

FTP

SMB

Group

[02] E-MailTitle Setting

[03] E-MailText Setting

[02] User Set-ting

[01] SystemSetting

[01] LanguageSetting

[02] Unit Set-ting

[03] Feed TraySetting

[01] PaperSetting *2

[02] FeedTray Auto Se-lection

[03] ATS Per-mit Setting

[04] Auto Pa-per Type

[05] Dehu-midificationFan

[04] Reset Set-ting [01] Auto Re-set Setting

[02] ModeReset Setting

[05] DefaultScreen Setting

[06] PresetZoom Setting








[02] User Set-ting

[01] SystemSetting

[07] PowerSave Setting*3

[08] Time andDate Setting*4

[09] BuzzerSetting

[01] Buzzer Volume Reg-ulation

[2] Buzzer forJob Stop Set

[10] Key Re-sponse Time

[11] Short CutKey Setting

[01] Applica-tion

[02] Quality Adjust.

(Copy)

[03] Quality Adjust.(Scanner)

[04] Quality Adjust. AreaSet

[12] ServicePort Device

[02] InitialSetting

[01] Copy Ini-tial Setting

[02] ScannerInitial Setting

[03] CommonSetting *5

[04] CopySetting *6

[05] ScanSetting *7

[06] PrinterSetting

[01] Gray TextOutline En-hance

[02] Thin LineEnhancement

[03] ReservedText Enhance-ment

[04] Blur Pre-vention

Utility menu








[02] User Set-ting

[01] SystemSetting

[07] ImageQuality Setting

[01] Screen

[02] ScreenInitial Setting

[03] OriginalDensity Shift

[04] ACS adjustment

[08] ChangePassword

[03] Machine Admin. Set-ting

[01] SystemSetting

[01] PowerSave Setting*3

[02] Time andDate Setting *4

[03] Weekly

Timer Setting

[01] Weekly

Timer On/OffSet

[02] TimerSetting

[03] Timer ActionOn/Off Set

[04] LunchHour Setting

[05] Timer In-terrupt Pass-

word Set[04] OperationProhibit Set

[01] Lock/De-lete ModeMemory

[01] CopyMode Memo-ry

[02] ScanMode Memo-ry

[02] ChangeProhibit Set-ting

[03] ScannerProhibit Set-

ting

Utility menu









[01] SystemSetting

[05] Expert Adjustment

[01] AES Lev-el Adjuste-ment

[02] Erase Adjustment

[01] Non-Im-age Area

Erase

[02] EraseOperationSetting

[03] ADFFrame Erase

[03] Printer Adjustement*8

[01] RestartTiming Ad- justemt

[02] Center-ing Adjuste-ment

[03] FD-Mag. Adjustment

[04] CD-Mag. AdjusmentErase

[05] Lead-Edge Earse Adjustment

[06] Registra-tion Loop Adj.

[07] Pre-reg-istration Adj.

[04] Finisher Adjustement(FS-503) *9

[01] StaplerPosition Adj.

[01] StapleCenter Posi-tion

[02] PaperWidth (staple)

[03] PaperWidth(straight)

Utility menu









[01] SystemSetting


[04] Finisher Adjustement(FD-501) *9

[02] MultiFolder(Punch) Adj.

[01] PaperWidth Adjust-ment

[02] Hole-Punch Verti-

cal Pos.

[03] MultiFolder (Fold) Adj.

[01] Half FoldPosition Adj.

[02] Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj.

[03] Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj.

[04] DoubleParallel Pos. Adj.

[05] Z-Fold

Position Adj.

[06] GateFold Position Adj.

[04] MultiFolder (PI) Adj.

[04] Finisher Adjustment(LS-501) *9

[05] Stacker Adjustment

[01] PaperWidth Adjust-ment

[02] Paper

Length Ad- justment

Utility menu









[01] SystemSetting


[04] Finisher Adjustment(SD-501) *9

[06] SaddleStitcher Adj.

[01] StapleCenter Adj.

[02] StaplePaper Width Adj.

[03] StaplePitch Adjust-ment

[04] Half FoldPosition Adj.

[05] Tri-FoldPosition Adj.

[06] Fold Pa-per Width Adj.

[07] Trimming

Adjustment

[08] TrimmerReceiver Adj.

[04] Finisher Adjustment(RU-503/504)*9

[07] RU Ad- justment

[01] Curl Re-form Direc-tion

Utility menu









[01] SystemSetting


[04] Finisher Adjustment(FS-607)

[01] SaddleStitcherStopper Adj.

[02] Half FoldStopper Adj.

[03] Punch Adjustment

[01] VerticalPosition Adj.

[02] Horizon-tal Position Adj.

[03] Registra-tion Adjust-ment

[4] PaperEdge DetectSensor Adj.

[04] Tri-Fold Adjustment

[05] 2 Pos.Staple Pitch Adj.

[06] Paper In-serter TraySize Adj.

[07] OutputQuantityLimit

[05] Scanner Adjustment)*10

[01] RestartTiming Ad- justment

[02] Center-ing Adjust-ment

[03] FD-Mag. Adjustment

[06] Process Adjustment

[01] Front &Back Density

[02] TonerDensity Sen-sor

[03] TonerQuantity/ Ex-posure

Utility menu









[01] SystemSetting


[07] Quality Adjustment

[01] PrinterGamma Off-set Adj.

[02] PrinterGamma Off-

set Auto Adj.

[03] PrinterGamma Sen-sor Adj.

[04] ImageQuality Sta-bility

[05] CustomScreen

[08] Execute Adjust Oper-ation

[06] List/Count

[07] Size Set-ting

[01] Orig.Glass SizeDetect

[02] ADFOriginal SizeDetect

[03] Orig.Glass Mini-mum Detect

[04] K Size

[05] ADF/Orig.Glass Priority

[06] PI SizePriority

[02] Adminis-trator Regis-ter

Utility menu









[03] ScannerSend Ad-dress*1

[01] AddressEdit

E-Mail

HDD

FTP

SMB

Group

[02] E-Mail Ti-tle Setting

[03] E-MailText Setting

[04] User Auth./Ac-count Track

[01] Authenti-cation Method

[02] User Au-thenticationSet

[03] AccountTrack

[04] Without Authentication

[05] NetworkSetting

[01] MachineNIC Setting

[02] E-Mail Ini-tial Setting

[06] CommonSetting*5

[07] CopySetting*6

[08] ScanSetting*7

[09] SystemConnection

[01] Adminis-trator

Utility menu








- 1* [01 Scan Send Address] and [03 Machine Admin. Setting] >

[03 Scanner Send Address] are provided for the same setting, however,use the machine administrator setting for usual operation.- *2 While general paper settings can be registered or predefined settings

can be deleted by selecting [02 User Setting] > [01 System Setting] > [03Feed Tray Setting] > [01 Paper Setting], the use of the [Paper Setting] keyon the Copy screen or the Machine Status screen specifies or changessettings for the paper settings specified for each tray.

- *3 Selecting [02 User Setting] > [01 System Setting] > [07 Power SaveSetting] allows for the same operation as selecting [03 Machine Admin.Setting] > [01 System Setting] > [01 Power Save Setting].

- *4 Selecting [02User Setting] > [01 System Setting] > [08 Time and Date

Setting] allows for the same operation as selecting [03 Machine Admin.Setting] > [01 System Setting] > [02 Time and Date Setting].

- *5 Selecting [02User Setting] > [03 Common Setting] allows for the sameoperation as selecting [03 Machine Admin. Setting] > [06 CommonSetting].

- *6 Selecting [02User Setting] > [04 Copy Setting] allows for the same

operation as selecting [03 Machine Admin. Setting] > [07 Copy Setting].- *7 Selecting [02User Setting] > [05 Scan Setting] allows for the same

operation as selecting [03 Machine Admin. Setting] > [08 Scan Setting].

- *8 The adjustment operations 01 through 04 accessed by selecting [03

Machine Admin. Setting] > [01 System Setting] > [05 Expert Adjustment]> [03 Printer Adjustment] are exactly the same as the adjustments 01

through 04 accessed from the Machine Status screen by selecting[Adjustment] > [01 Machine Adjustment] > [01 Printer Adjustment].

- *9 The adjustment operation by selecting [03 Machine Admin. Setting] >[01 System Setting] > [05 Expert Adjustment] > [04 Finisher Adjustment]are exactly the same as the adjustments on the Machine Status screenby selecting [Adjustment] > [04 Finisher Adjustment].


[10] SecuritySetting

[01] Adminis-trator Pass-word

[02] HDD LockPassword

[03] Overwriteimage data

[04] SecurityStrengthenSet

[04] TouchScreen Ad- justment

Utility menu








The setting items of Finisher Adjustment vary depending on the optionalequipment installed in the machine.

- *10 The adjustment operation by selecting [03 Machine Admin. Setting] >[01 System Setting] > [05 Expert Adjustment] > [05 Scanner Adjustment]are exactly the same as the adjustments on the Machine Status screen

by selecting [Adjustment] > [01 Machine Adjustment] > [02 Scanner Adjustment].








15.2 Function list of user setting

Setting Item/Description Default

01 System Setting

01 Language Setting

Select the language used in the LCD.English / German / French /Italian/ Spanish

English

02 Unit SettingSelect the unit of measurement for the value to be enteredby user and to be displayed on the touch panel.mm/ inch (decimal point)/ inch (Fraction)

mm

03 Feed Tray Setting

01 Paper SettingRegister paper settings, or modify or delete registeredsettings.Paper Type/ Name/ Weight/ Both Sides Adj./ Process Adj./ Speed Setting/ Hole-Punch/ Colored Paper/ Air

Assist/ link size Information

02 Feed Tray Auto SelectionSelect ATS for each tray and the priority of the detec-tion when ATS functions. ATS/APS Switch (Trays 1 to 3): Off, Tray Priority: (Tray3/ Tray/1 Tray2/ Bypass Tray)

Priority: (Tray 3/ Tray/1Tray2)

03 ATS Permit SettingSet ATS on or off.on/ off

off

04 Auto Paper TypeSet the paper type to be selected when ATS functions.Paper Type (Plain/High Quality Paper/Color Specif-

ic)/Weigh (64-74, 75-80, 81-105g/m2

)/ Hole-Punch(Prohibition)/ Tab Paper (Prohibition)/ Color Paper(Prohibition)

Paper Type (Plain/HighQuality Paper/Color Specif-ic) /Weigh (64-74, 75-80, 81-

105g/m2

)/ Hole-Punch (Pro-hibition)/ Tab Paper (Prohibi-tion)/ Color Paper(Prohibition)

05 Dehumidification FanSpecify the paper type which is to be selected in the ATS function.Dryness preparation: on/offFan Heater Control (Tray4): Automatic/ On (compulso-ry/ Off (compulsory)Fan Heater Control (Tray5): Automatic/ On (compulso-ry/ Off (compulsory)

Dryness preparation: OnFan Heater Control(Tray4): AutomaticFan Heater Control (Tray5): Automatic








04 Reset Setting

01 Auto Reset SettingSet the reset interval starting from the completion of acopying job until the machine returns to the initial con-dition, without selecting any key on the touch panel or

the control panel.Off/ 60 seconds/ 120 seconds/ 180 seconds/ 240 sec-onds/ 300 seconds/ 360 seconds/ 420 seconds/ 480seconds/ 540 seconds

60 seconds

02 Mode Reset SettingSelect whether or not to initialize the setting currentlyspecified when the machine takes it that the user haschanged, or original document is loaded into the ADF. And select the settings to be initialized each time a sin-gle job has been completed.Change user/ ADF original direction/ Reset buttonfunction/ Mode memory auto call/ Finisher Mode byFull-auto/ Initial by Key Counter Insert/ Status HoldWhen Auto Reset/ Next Job Staple Setting/ Original

Set/Bind Direction

Change user: Yes ADF original direction: NotresetReset button function: FullautoMode memory auto call: OffFinisher Mode by Full-auto:CollateInitial by Key Counter Insert:Off

Status Hold When Auto Re-set: Not keepNext Job Staple Setting: DoNot ReleaseOriginal Set/Bind Direction:Release

05 Default Screen SettingSelect the initial screen to be displayed when the powerswitch is turned on.Machine/ Job List/ Copy

Machine

06 Preset Zoom SettingModify predefined fixed ratios, and preset frequently usedmagnification ratios.

Fixed/Six typePreset Zoom/Three type

Fixed/Six typePreset Zoom/Three type

07 Power Save SettingSet the interval time of Auto Low Power and Auto Shut Offmodes. Auto Low Power: 5 min./ 10 min./ 15 min./ 30 min./ 60 min./90 min./ 120 min./ 240 min.: 15 min. Auto Shut Off: OFF/ 30 min./ 60 min./ 90 min./120 min./ 240min.: OFF/90 min.

Auto Low Power: 15 min. Auto Shut Off: 90 min.

08 Time and Date SettingSet the present time, summer time, and time zone.Setting Time/ Summer Time/ Time zone

Setting Time/ Summer Time(Off)/ Time zone









09 Buzzer Setting

01 Buzzer Volume RegulationSet the buzzer sound (the touch key sound) as touch-ing the screen.On/ Off, Big/ Small

On

02 Buzzer for Job Stop SetSelect the duration of the buzzer sound when the ma-chine stops due to no paper and mishandled paper.Off/ 3 seconds/ 5 seconds/ 10 seconds

Off

10 Key Response TimeSelect the key response time.Normal/ 0.5 seconds/ 1 second/ 2 seconds/ 3 seconds

Normal

11 Short cut Key Setting

01 ApplicationSelect short cut keys to be displayed under [Applica-tion] on the Copy screen. Up to 3 keys can be selected.Insert Sheet/ Chapters/ Combine Originals/ BookletPagination/ Insert Image/ Book Copy/ Program Job/Multi-Page Enlargement/ Non-Image Area Erase/Neg./ Positive Reverse/ Image Repeat/ Frame/ CenterErase/ Image Centering/ Page Margin/ Stamp/ ImageOverlay

02 Quality Adjust. (Copy)Select short cut keys to be displayed under [ImageQuality] on the Copy screen. Up to 3 keys can be se-lected.Copy Density/ Adjust Background/ B-Side Pre-vent/Red/ Green/ Blue/ Hue/ Saturation/ Brightness/Sharpness/ Contrast/ Image Distinction Level/ Screen/Glossy/ Color Balance Adjustment

03 Quality Adjust. (Scanner)Select short cut keys to be displayed under [ImageQuality] on the Scanner screen. Up to 3 keys can beselected.Scan Density/ Adjust Background/ Red/ Green/ Blue/Sharpness/ Contrast

04 Quality Adjust. Area SetSelect either [Short Cut Key] or [Density Setting Dis-play] to be displayed under [Image Quality] on theCopy screen or the Scanner screen.Short Cut Display/ Density Setting Display

Short Cut Display

12 Service Port Device

Specify whether to use the service port device or not, andselect the keyboard type if the service port device is used.On/ Off, Keyboard Type: EN65/ EN104/ JP101/ JP106/JP109

On

Keyboard Type: EN65









02 Initial Setting

01 Copy Initial settingSpecify the initial values for the copy functions when themachine is reset to the initial setting, such as by pressing[Reset] on the control panel.

Copy Initial setting (Original Setting/ Color/ Zoom/ Applica-tion/ Quality Adjust./ Output Appli./ Simplex/ Duplex/ PaperSetting/ ADF

02 Scan Initial settingSpecify the initial values for the scanning functions whenthe machine is reset to the initial setting, such as by press-ing [Reset] on the control panel.Scanner Setting (Original Setting/ Color/ Zoom/ ColorSpace/ Quality Adjust./ Scan Size/ Resolution/ Simplex/Du-plex/ Default Server

03 Common Setting

1SHOT indication time

Select the SHOT indication time to be displayed in the mes-sage indication area of the touch panel.3 seconds/ 5 seconds

3 seconds

Job Offset ModeSet the machine to offset the copies/ printouts of different jobs.On/ Off

Off

Continuation printSet the machine to output multiple reserve jobs in succes-sion.Copy on/ Copy off/ Printer on/ Printer off

Copy offPrinter on

STOP Key Function

Specify whether to pause or abort a job when [Stop] ispressed on the control panel.Job Temp. Stop/ Job Stop Function

Job Temp. Stop

Side 2 Lens Adjustment modeSpecify whether to enable the lens adjustment mode.On/ Off

Off

Tray Change TimeWhen selecting the tray which sets different paper type,specify the time when it becomes the copy possible.Short/ Standard

Short

Priority Paper TypeSelect whether to maintain the Temperature which is suitedfor the coated paper by turning the fixing unit roller.Others/ Coated Paper

Others

Un-compressing modeSpecify when storing to HDD is not completed with memoryoverflow.Off/ On

Off









04 Copy Setting

Fold & Staple auto selectSet the machine to automatically select the Booklet modewhen Stapling & Folding mode is selected.Yes/ No

Yes

Fine Adjust MarginSelect On/Off to enter a decimal point for image shift.Yes/ No

No

Orig. Glass Auto Size SelectSet the machine to automatically select the same size ofcopy paper as the original placed on the original glass.On/ Off

On

Auto Detect Orig. Size in ADFSet the machine to automatically select the same size ofcopy paper as the original placed on the ADF.On/ Off

On

Original Glass AMSSet the machine to detect the size of the original and selectthe appropriate magnification ratio to correspond to the se-lected paper size.On/ Off

On

ADF AMSSet the machine to automatically select an appropriate ratiofor copying when detecting the original size placed on the ADF.On/ Off

On

Non-Image Area Erase of orig.Specify the conditions to be applied to [Non-Image AreaErase of orig].

Yes/ APS/AMS/ Except Orig. Glass (1:1)

Yes

ADF Frame EraseSet to erase the frame when copying in ADF mode.None/ 1mm/ 2mm/ 3mm/ 4mm/ 5mm

3mm

RotationWhen the trays contain only the paper size different fromthe original, rotate the image of the original and adjust to fitinto the copying paper size.On-Always /APS/AMS/ APS/AMS/ Reduce

APS/AMS

Suspend InterruptionSet the timing to interrupt the present job when pressing [In-terrupt] while copying.Stop Immediately/ When Current Comp.

When Current Comp.

Change Page Print Pos. (Booklet)Set the page number position when using Booklet withPage Numbering in Stamp.Off/ On (Outside Print)

Off









Printer Prohibit TimerSelect the interval time that printing via PC is prohibited af-ter touching the touch keys.Off/ 15 seconds/ 30 seconds/ 60 seconds/ 90 seconds

Off

Bookmark function

Specify whether to delete the set bookmark or not, or selectto disable the bookmark function.Off/ Release Every Job/Not release

Release Every Job

Orig./Out Bind Direction SetSet the machine to conform the binding direction of theoriginals and printed sets each other.On/ Off

On

Choose Default Tray when APS OffSelect the tray to be automatically selected when APS is re-leased. APS Tray/ Tray1/ Tray2/ Tray3/ Tray4/ Tray5

APS Tray

Scan prohibit (pull out tray)

Set to stop scanning when pulling out the tray.On/ Off

On

05 Scan Setting

File Form Default E-MailSelect the default file form when transmitting in E-Mail.Packaged TIFF/ Divided TIFF/ Packaged PDF/ JPEG

Packaged PDF

File Form Default FTPSelect the default file form when transmitting to FTP.Packaged TIFF/ Divided TIFF/ Packaged PDF/ JPEG

Packaged PDF

File Form Default SMBSelect the default file form when transmitting in SMB.Packaged TIFF/ Divided TIFF/ Packaged PDF/ JPEG

Packaged PDF

Default AddressSelect the default destination to be displayed when select-ing the Scanner screen.E-Mail/ HDD/ FTP/ SMB/ QUEUE

E-Mail

Compress Method Color/GraySelect the default destination to be displayed when select-ing the Scanner screen.High Compress/ Standard/ Low Compress

Standard









06 Printer Setting

01 Gray Text Outline EnhanceSelect to enable gray text outline enhancement for printing.Strong+/ Normal/Weak+

Normal

02Thin Line EnhancementSpecify the level of thin line enhancement for printing.Strong+/ Strong/ Normal/ Weak/ Weak+

Normal

03 Reversed Text EnhancementSpecify the level of reversed text enhancement for printing.Strong+/ Normal/ Weak+

Normal

04 Blur PreventionSpecify whether to use the function to prevent blur for linescaused by thin line enhancement.Off/ On

On

07 Image Quality Setting

01 Screen

Enable the selections of settings other than [Line 1] whenselecting [Text & Photo] or [Photo] for image quality.• Line 2:Permission/ Prohibition• Dot 1:Permission/ Prohibition• Dot 2:Permission/ Prohibition

Line 2:Permission

Dot 1:PermissionDot 2:Permission

02 Screen Initial settingSelect the screen to be displayed when selecting [Text &Photo] or [Photo] for image quality.• Full color-Text/Photo: Line 1/ Line 2/ Dot 1/ Dot 2/ Com-

pression• Full color-Photo: Line 1/ Line 2/ Dot 1/ Dot 2/ Compres-

sion• Black-Text/Photo: Line 1/ Line 2/ Dot 1/ Dot 2/ Compres-

sion• Black-Photo: Line 1/ Line 2/ Dot 1/ Dot 2/ Compression• Single Color-Text/Photo: Line 1/ Line 2/ Dot 1/ Dot

2/Compression• Single Color-Photo: Line 1/ Line 2/ Dot 1/ Dot 2/ Com-

pression

Full color-Text/Photo: Line 1Full color-Photo: Line 1Black-Text/Photo: Com-pressionBlack-Photo: Line 1Single Color-Text/Photo:Line 1Single Color-Photo: Line 1

03 Original Density shiftSpecify the default density setting for each image qualitymode.Text & Photo/ Map/ Photo/ Text (0 - 6)

Text & Photo: 3Map: 3Photo: 3Text: 3

04 ACS adjustment Adjust the automatic color detection function. Adj. Range: -5~+5

Adj. Range: 0

08 Change Password

Change a user password which the user has registered foruser authentication.Enter new password









15.3 Function list of machine administrator setting


01 System Setting

01 Power Save Setting

Set the interval time of Auto Low Power and Auto Shut Offmodes. Auto Low Power: 5 min./ 10 min./ 15 min./ 30 min./ 60 min./90 min./ 120 min./ 240 min.: 15 min. Auto Shut Off: OFF/ 30 min./ 60 min./ 90 min./ 120 min./ 240min.: OFF/90 min.

Auto Low Power: 15 min.

Auto Shut Off: 90 min.

02 Time and Date SettingSet the present time, summer time, and time zone.Setting Time, Summer Time, Time zone

Setting Time/ Summer Time(Off)/ Time zone

03 Weekly Timer Setting

01 Weekly Timer On/Off SetEnable or disable the weekly timer function.

Weekly Timer On/ Weekly Timer Off

Weekly Timer Off

02 Timer SettingSet the On/Off times in hours and minutes.

03 Timer Action On/Off SetSet the On/Off condition of the machine for a givenmonth.

04 Lunch Hour Off SettingSet the machine to turn off and then on during thelunch break.

05 Timer Interrupt Password SetThe password is required to enter when using the ma-

chine by interrupting the Weekly Timer mode. Use thisfunction to set the password.0000 (4 Digit)

0000 (4 Digit)

04 Operation Prohibit Set

01 Lock/Delete Mode MemoryLock/unlock or Delete a mode memory that has beenprogrammed.• Copy Mode Memory• Scan Mode Memory

02 Change Prohibit SettingSpecify whether to permit or prohibit the modificationof settings for [Change Send Address], [Change UserLens Mode], and [Change Program Image Overlay].• Change Send Address: Permission/ Prohibition• Change User Lens Mode: Permission/ Prohibition• Change Program Image Overlay: Permission/ Prohi-

bition

Change Send Address: Per-missionChange User Lens Mode:PermissionChange Program ImageOverlay: Prohibition








03 Scanner Prohibit SettingSpecify whether to permit or prohibit the selection of[E-Mail], [HDD], [FTP], [SMB], [QUEUE], or [Manual In-put] for scanning functions.• E-Mail: Permission/ Prohibition• FTP: Permeation/ Prohibition

• HDD: Permeation/ Prohibition• SMB: Permeation/ Prohibition• QUEUE: Permeation/ Prohibition• Manual Input: Permeation/ Prohibition

E-Mail: PermissionFTP: PermeationHDD: PermeationSMB: PermeationQUEUE: PermeationManual Input: Permeation

05 Expert Adjustment

01 AES Level AdjustmentChange the density level to be applied when selecting[Auto] from [Image Quality \ Copy Density] on the Copyscreen.Color: -5 to +5, Black: -5 to +5

Color: 0Black: 0

02 Erase AdjustmentSpecify the conditions to be applied to [Non-Image

Area Erase of orig.], the density level for erase opera-tions, and the amount of frame erase when copying in ADF mode.• None-Image Area Erase:

Erase Outside of Original/ On - APS/AMS Only/ Ex-cept Orig. Glass (1:1)

• Erase Operating Setting: Auto/ Dark+/ Dark/ Normal/ Light/ Light+

• ADF Frame Erase:None/ 1mm/ 2mm/ 3mm/ 4mm/ 5mm

None-Image Area Erase:Erase Outside of Original

Erase Operating Setting:Dark ADF Frame Erase: 3mm

03 Printer Adjustment Adjust the settings related to printing.• Restart Timing Adjustment: -60 to +60 (1 step =

0.1mm)

• Centering Adjustment: -40 to +40 (1 step = 0.1mm)• FD-Mag. Adjustment: -100 to +100 (1 step = 0.01%)• CD-Mag. Adjustment: -100 to +100 (1 step =

0.01%)• Lead Edge Erase Adjustment: -20 to +40 (1 step =

0.1mm)• Registration Loop Adj.: -99 to +99 (1 step = 0.1mm)• Pre-registration Adj.: -99 to +99 (1 step = 0.1mm)

04 Finisher Adjustment Adjust the settings related to the finisher.

01 Stapler Position Adj. Adjust the settings related to the Staple FinisherFS-503.• Staple Center Position: -20 to +20 (1 step =

0.1mm)• Paper Width (staple): -20 to +20 (1 step =

0.1mm)• Paper Width (straight): -20 to +20 (1 step =

0.1mm)









02 Multi Folder (Punch) Adj. Adjust the settings related to the punch functionof the folding unit FD-501.• Paper Width Adjustment: -20 to +20 (1 step =

0.1mm)• Hole-Punch Vertical Pos.:

2-Hole Punch -40 to +40 (1 step = 0.1mm)4-Hole Punch -40 to +40 (1 step = 0.1mm)

03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj. Adjust the settings related to the folding functionof the folding unit FD-501.• Half Fold Position Adj.: -50 to +50 (1 step =

0.1mm)• Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj.: -50 to +50 (1 step =

0.1mm)• Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj.: -50 to +50 (1 step =

0.1mm)• Double Parallel Pos. Adj.: -50 to +50 (1 step =

0.1mm)• Z-Fold Position Adj.: -50 to +50 (1 step =

0.1mm)• Gate Fold Position Adj.: -50 to +50 (1 step =

0.1mm)

05 Stacker Adjustment• Paper Width Adjustment: -20 to +20 (1 step =

0.1mm)• Paper Length Adjustment: -20 to +20 (1 step =

0.1mm)

06 Saddle Stitcher Adj. Adjust the settings related to the Saddle StitcherSD-501.• Staple Center Adj.: -20 to +20 (1 step =

0.1mm)• Staple Paper Width Adj.: -20 to +20 (1 step =0.1mm)

• Staple Pitch Adjustment: -20 to +20 (1 step =0.1mm)

• Half Fold Position Adj.: -50 to +50 (1 step =0.1mm)

• Tri-Fold Position Adj.: -50 to +50 (1 step =0.1mm)

• Fold Paper Width Adj.: -50 to +50 (1 step =0.1mm)

• Trimming Adjustment:-400 to +400 (1 step =0.1mm)

• Trimmer Receiver Adj.: Trimmer Count, MovePitch, Execute Compulsive Movement

07 RU Adjustment Adjust the settings related to the Relay Unit RU-503/ RU-504.Curl Reform Direction: Off/ Upper/ Lower

Off









04 Finisher Adjustment Adjust the settings related to the finisher (FS-607).

01 Saddle Stitcher Stopper Adj. Adjust the staple positions in widthwise directionof paper using Fold & Staple mode.

-128 to +127 (1 step = 0.1mm)

02 Half Fold Stopper Adjustment Adjust the double-folding position using MultiHalf Fold mode.-128 to +127 (1 step = 0.1mm)

03 Punch Adjustment Adjust the punch position operated by Punch KitPK-512/513.• Vertical Position Adj.:-128 to +127 (1 step =

0.1mm)• Horizontal Position Adj.:-50 to +50 (1 step =

0.1mm)• Registration Adjustment:-20 to +20 (1 step =

0.8mm)• Paper Edge Detect Sensor Adj.

04 Tri-Fold Adjustment Adjust the three-folding positions using Multi Tri-Fold mode.-128 to +127 (1 step = 0.1mm)

05 2 Position Staple Pitch Adjustment Adjust the staple pitch in Staple and Fold & Sta-ple modes.-128 to +160 (1 step = 1mm)

06 Paper Inserter Tray Size Adj. Adjust the tray size of upper/lower tray of the Pa-

per Inserter PI-502.

07 Output Quantity LimitSpecify the quantity limit for each of Staple, Fold& Staple, Multi Half Fold, and Multi Tri-Foldmodes.

05 Scanner Adjustment Adjust the settings related to the scanner.• Restart Timing Adjustment: -10 to +20 (1 step =

0.1mm)• Centering Adjustment: -30 to +30 (1 step = 0.1mm)• FD-Mag. Adjustment: -40 to +40 (1 step = 0.05%)









06 Process Adjustment Adjust the settings related to the process.• Front & Back Density• Toner Density Sensor• Toner Quantity/Exposure

07 Quality Adjustment Adjust the image quality.• Printer Gamma Offset Adj.• Printer Gamma Offset Auto Adj.• Printer Gamma Sensor Adj.• Image Quality Stability• Custom Screen

08 Execute Adjust OperationExecute adjustment operations. Automatic Gamma Adj., Color Registration Adj., TonerRefresh Mode, Belt Refresh Mode

06 List/CountPrint the mode memory list or the audit log report.

Mode Memory List, User Management List, Use Manage-ment List, Font Pattern List, Audit Log Report

07 Size SettingSpecify the settings related to paper sizes of the originals tobe placed on the original glass or ADF, or of the paperplaced in the post inserter.

01 Orig. Glass Size DetectSpecify the size of the originals which needs to be de-tectable on the original glass.Full size/ AB/ Inch/ Only A series

Only A series

02 ADF Original Size DetectSpecify the size of the originals which needs to be de-

tectable on the ADF.Full size/ AB/ Inch/ Only A series

Only A series

03 Orig. Glass Minimum DetectSet the smallest size when copying by placing the orig-inal on the original glass.Post / A5 w / 5.5 e 8.5 v / B5 v / A4 v / 8.5 e 11 v

Post / A5 w

04 K SizeSpecify whether to use the K size, for instance, "8K"and "16K".K size on / K size off

K size off

05 ADF/Orig. Glass PrioritySpecify the standard size which cannot be detectable

on the ADF or the original glass.8.5 e 14 w / 8 e 13 w / 8.12 e 13.2 w / 8.25 e 13 w /8.5 e 13 A5 v, A4 w / 5.5 e 8.5 v, 8.5 e 11 wB4 w, B5 w, B5 v, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 11 v / 8K w,16K w, 16K v A5 w / B6 w / 5.5 e 8.5 wPost / A6 w

8.5 e 14 / w A5 v, A4 wB4 w, B5 w, B5 v,

11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 11v / A5 w / Post









06 PI Size PrioritySpecify the standard size which cannot be detectableon the upper/lower tray of the post inserter of the Fold-ing Unit FD-501.FD-501: A5 v / 5.5 e 8.5 v

SRA4 w / A4 w / 8.5 e 11 w, 8.5 e 14 w / 8 e 13 w /8.12 e 13.2 w / 8.25 e 13 w / 8.5 e 13 wB4 w, B5 w, B5 v, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 11 v / 8K w, 16Kw, 16K vSRA3 w / 13 e 19 wPI-502: A5 v / 5.5 e 8.5 vSRA4 w / A4 w / 8.5 e 11 w, 8.5 e 14 w / 8 e 13 w /8.12 e 13.2 w / 8.25 e 13 w / 8.5 e 13 wB4 w, B5 w, B5 v, 11 e 17 w, 8.5 e 11 v / 8K w, 16Kw, 16K v A3 w / 12 e 18 w

FD-501: A5 v / A4 w B4 w, B5 w, B5 v, 11 e 17w, 8.5 e 11 v / SRA3 w

PI-502:

A5 v / A4 w B4 w, B5 w, B5 v, 11 e 17w, 8.5 e 11 v / A3 w

02 Administrator Register

Register the name of the machine administrator and the ex-tension number. The registered contents are displayed onthe Counter screen.Name Input: 8 digits/Extension Number Input: 5 digits

03 Scanner Send Address

01 Address Edit Add, change or delete the destination of the scanned im-age.

02 E-Mail Title SettingRegister up to 5 templates which can optionally be used asa title when transmitting scanned data.

03 E-Mail Text SettingRegister up to 5 templates which can optionally be used asbody text when transmitting scanned data.

04 User Auth./Account Track

Specify whether to use the user authentication or accounttrack function, and set/modify relevant conditions whichneeds to be used in authentication.

01 Authentication MethodSet the authentication method and the number of sectionsto be managed. And set the section management againsteach mode and the machine condition when reaching thecopy limit.

• User Authentication: On (External Serv)/ On (MFP)/ Off• Public User: Permission/ Prohibition• Account Track: Manage/ Not Manage• Account Track Auth. Method: Account + Password/

Password• User/Section Auth. Connect: Connected/ Un-Connected• User Distribute Number: 0000• Upper Limit Achieve Movement: Immediately/ After Print

/ Warning Only

User Authentication: OffPublic User: Prohibition Account Track: Not Manage Account Track Auth. Meth-od: Account + Password

User/Section Auth. Connect:ConnectedUser Distribute Number: 500Upper Limit Achieve Move-ment: Immediately









02 User Authentication Set

01 Management SettingSpecify whether to display the user list when settingthe user authentication, and as select the functionsavailable to authenticated users as well as the maxi-

mum number of users displayed in the list.• User Name / Section name list: Display/ Not Display• Initial-setting restrictions

User Name List: Display

02 User RegisterRegister, modify, add, or delete users who require userauthentication.User No., User Name, Password, Belong Section, Out-put Permission (Color, Black, and their Upper LimitSet), Useable Function (Copy, Scanner, Printer), From Address

03 User Counter View or reset the count for copying, printing, and scan-ning operations by authenticated users.

03 Account Track

01 Account RegisterChange add, or delete accounts being tracked.Section No., Section Name, Password, Name, OutputPermission (Color, Black, and their Upper Limit Set),Useable Function (Copy, Scanner, Printer)

02 Account Counter View or reset the count for copying, printing, and scan-ning operations by accounts being tracked.

04 Without AuthenticationSpecify whether to make functions available to users with-

out authentication.• Print: Permission/ Prohibition• Pull scan: Permission/ Prohibition

Print: ProhibitionPull scan: Prohibition

05 Network Setting

01 Machine NIC SettingSet the NIC settings.IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway Address, Line SpeedSetting

02 E-Mail Initial SettingSpecify the initial settings for e-mail.

06 Common Setting

1SHOT indication timeSelect the SHOT indication time to be displayed in the mes-sage indication area of the touch panel.3 seconds/ 5 seconds

3 seconds

Job Offset ModeSet the machine to offset the copies/printouts of different jobs.On/ Off

Off









Continuation printSet the machine to output multiple reserve jobs in succes-sion.Copy on/ Copy off/ Printer on/ Printer off

Copy off/ Printer on

STOP Key Function

Specify whether to pause or abort a job when [Stop] ispressed.Job Temp. Stop/ Job Stop Function

Job Temp. Stop

Side 2 Lens Adjustment ModeSpecify whether to enable the lens adjustment mode.On/ Off

Off

Tray Change TimeWhen selecting the tray which sets different paper type,specify the time when it becomes the copy possible.Short/ Standard

Short

Priority Paper TypeSelect whether maintain the Temperature which is suited for

the coated paper by turning the fixing unit roller.Others/ Coated Paper

Others

Un-compressing modeSpecify when storing to HDD is not completed with memoryoverflow.Off/ On

Off

07 Copy Setting

Fold & Staple auto selectSet the machine to automatically select the Booklet modewhen Stapling & Folding mode is selected.Yes/ No

Yes

Fine Adjust Margin

Select On/Off to enter a decimal point for image shift.Yes/ No

No

Orig. Glass Auto Size SelectSet the machine to automatically select the same size ofcopy paper as the original placed on the original glass.On/ Off

On

Auto Detect Orig. Size in ADFSet the machine to automatically select the same size ofcopy paper as the original placed on the ADF.On/ Off

On

Original Glass AMSSet the machine to detect the size of the original and select

the appropriate magnification ratio to correspond to the se-lected paper size.On/ Off

On

ADF AMSSet the machine to automatically select an appropriate ratiofor copying when detecting the original size placed on the ADF.On/ Off

On









Non-Image Area Erase of orig.Specify the conditions to be applied to [Non-Image AreaErase of orig].Yes/ APS/AMS/ Except Orig. Glass (1:1)

Yes

ADF Frame Erase

Set to erase the frame when copying in ADF mode.None/ 1mm/ 2mm/ 3mm/ 4mm/ 5mm

3mm

RotationWhen the trays contain only the paper size different fromthe original, rotate the image of the original and adjust to fitinto the copying paper size.On - Always/ APS/AMS/ APS/AMS/ Reduce

APS/AMS

Suspend InterruptionSet the timing to interrupt the present job when pressing [In-terrupt] while copying.Stop Immediately/ When Current Comp.

When Current Comp.

Change Page Print Pos. (Booklet)

Set the page number position when using Booklet withPage Numbering in Stamp.Off/ On (Outside Print)

Off

Printer Prohibit TimerSelect the interval time that printing via PC is prohibited af-ter touching the touch keys.Off/ 15 seconds/ 30 seconds/ 60 seconds/ 90 seconds

Off

Bookmark functionSpecify whether to delete the set bookmarks or not, or se-lect to disable the bookmark function.Off/ Release Every Job/ Not release

Release Every Job

Orig./Out Bind Direction Set

Set the machine to conform the binding direction of theoriginals and printed sets each other.On/ Off

On

Choose Default Tray when APS OffSelect the tray to be automatically selected when APS is re-leased. APS Tray/ Tray1/ Tray2/ Tray3/ Tray4/ Tray5

APS Tray

Scan prohibit (pull out tray)Set to stop scanning when pulling out the tray.On/ Off

On

08 Scan Setting

File Form Default E-Mail

Select the default file form when transmitting in E-Mail.Packaged TIFF/ Divided TIFF/ Packaged PDF/ JPEG

Packaged PDF

File Form Default FTP Select the default destination to bedisplayed when selecting the Scanner screen.Select the default file form when transmitting to FTP.Packaged TIFF/ Divided TIFF/ Packaged PDF/ JPEG

Packaged PDF

File Form Default SMBSelect the default file form when transmitting in SMB.Packaged TIFF/ Divided TIFF/ Packaged PDF/ JPEG

Packaged PDF









Default AddressSelect the default destination to be displayed when select-ing the Scanner screen.E-Mail/ HDD/ FTP/ SMB/ QUEUE

E-Mail

Compress Method Color/Gray

Select the default destination to be displayed when select-ing the Scanner screen.High Compress/ Standard/ Low Compress

Standard

09 System Connection

01 AdministratorTouch Start when calling CSRC.Start

Start

10 Security Setting

01 Administrator PasswordChange the machine administrator password which is reg-istered in the Service mode menu.12345678

12345678

02 HDD Lock PasswordChange the password when accessing data stored in HDD.

03 Overwrite image dataSpecify whether to overwrite image data.Yes/ No

No

04 Security Strengthen SetSet the Security Strengthen mode.On/ Off

Off







16User setting






User setting 16


16 User setting

This section describes the items which the users can set on the Utility

screen.

16.1 User setting outlines

The top menu, referred to as Utility/Counter screen, appears right after

[Utility/Counter] is pressed.

The User Setting Menu screen is the screen which is displayed by touching[User Setting] on the Utility/Counter screen.

The Machine Administrator Menu screen is the screen which is displayed bytouching [Machine Admin. Setting] on the Utility/Counter screen.

The Machine Administrator Menu screen can optionally be set so as to beavailable to only those who enter the valid Administrator password.

This section describes the user setting.






16 User setting


How to display User Setting Menu screen

1 Press the [Utility/Counter] on thecontrol panel.


2 Touch [User Setting].

The User Setting Menu screen will be displayed.






User setting 16


How to use [Close], layer keys, and [Exit]

Touch [Close] to return to the previous screen.Touch the desired layer key on the left side area of the screen to jump to that

screen.

Touch [Exit] to restore the Copy screen.






16 User setting


16.2 01 System Setting

01 Language Setting

Select the language used in the touch panel.

The initial setting is English.

1 Follow the procedure on page 16-3 to display the User Setting Menuscreen.

2 Touch [01 System Setting], and then [01 Language Setting].

3 Select the desired language key to highlight it.






User setting 16



– To cancel the change, touch [Cancel].

In either case, the System Setting Menu screen will be restored.

5 If further changes are required, touch the desired key.






16 User setting


02 Unit Setting

Select the unit of measurement for the value to be entered by user and to bedisplayed on the touch panel.


2 Touch [01 System Setting], [02 Unit Setting] in sequence.

3 Select the desired unit key to highlight it.










User setting 16


03 Feed Tray Setting \ 01 Paper Setting

Please refer to "13 Paper setting" for the overview of, and instruction on,setting paper.

03 Feed Tray Setting \ 02 Paper Feed Auto Selection

When the selected paper tray becomes empty while copying is in progress,automatic tray switching detects the same copy paper size loaded in anothertray to allow copying to continue without interruption. (Auto Tray Switching:

ATS)

Select the tray size setting to be detected when ATS functions. You may alsoselect the priority of the detection for each tray.


2 Touch [01 System Setting], [03 Feed Tray Setting], and then [02 FeedTray Auto Selection].






16 User setting


3 Touch to highlight the desired tray key under ATS/APS Switch.

The selected tray is automatically detected when ATS functions. The

trays not selected will not be detected even when ATS functions.

4 The selected tray will be displayed under Tray Priority as the tray key.

– Touch to highlight the desired tray key under Tray Priority, thenchange its priority by using the arrow keys [+] and [,].



In either case, the Feed Tray Setting Menu screen will be restored.







User setting 16


03 Feed Tray Setting \ 03 ATS Permit Setting

Set ATS On or Off.


2 Touch [01 System Setting], [03 Feed Tray Setting], and then [03 ATSPermit Setting].

3 Touch [On] when ATS is used, and [Off] when ATS is not used.










16 User setting


03 Feed Tray Setting \ 04 Auto Paper Type

Select the paper type setting of the tray which is automatically selected when ATS functions. When the paper type that is not specified with this function is

designated to the tray that is automatically selected by ATS, the machineindicates the paper type unmatched.


2 Touch [01 System Setting], [03 Feed Tray Setting], and then [04 Auto

Paper Type].

3 Select the paper type of the tray which is automatically selected when ATS functions.






User setting 16


– Touch to highlight the desired type of keys under "Paper Type","Weight", "Hole-Punch", "Tab Paper", and "Color Paper". You maychoose more than one key for each item.

Switch the displayed unit for weight by touching [Unit Change].










16 User setting


03 Feed Tray Setting \ 05 Dehumidification Fan

If the dehumidification fan heater HT-504 is attached to the paper feeder unitPF-601, specify the on/off setting for dryness preparation and the fun heater

function for each tray.

1Follow the procedure on page 16-3 to display the User Setting Menuscreen.

2 Touch [01 System Setting], [03 Feed Tray Setting], and then[05 Dehumidification Fan].

3 To enable the dryness preparation function, touch [On], otherwise

touch [Off]. The selection becomes highlighted.

– Select [Automatic], [On (compulsory)], or [Off (compulsory)] tocontrol the fun heater attached to each tray of the paper feeder unit.






User setting 16











16 User setting


04 Reset Setting \ 01 Auto Reset Setting

Set the reset interval starting from the completion of a copying job until themachine returns to the initial screen, without selecting any key on the touch

panel or the control panel.

Use this setting mode to specify the period of time to be elapsed before Auto

Reset is activated.

1 Follow the procedure on page 16-3 to display the User Setting Menu

screen.

2 Touch [01 System Setting], [04 Reset Setting], and then [01 Auto ResetSetting].

3 Select the desired time to highlight it.






User setting 16




In either case, the Reset Setting Menu screen will be restored.







16 User setting


04 Reset Setting \ 02 Mode Reset Setting

The following features can be provided by switching the setting.- Change user

Select whether or not to initialize the settings currently specified when themachine takes it that the user has changed.This machine considers the following cases as user change (Changeuser):

– When the optional key counter or magnetic card of the data controller isremoved.

– When [Access] is pressed after the User Authentication/ Account Track

setting has one bee performed.- ADF original direction

Select whether or not to initialize the settings currently specified when themachine takes it that the original document is loaded into the ADF.

- Reset button function

When the machine is reset, select the copying conditions from the factory

default setting (Full Auto), or Initial Set which is set the desired copycondition.For the Full Auto setting, the finisher mode can be changed to [FinisherMode by Full-auto] as required.

- Mode memory auto call

Specify the subsequent operation when selecting [Initial] for the Resetbutton function. Select [OFF] to reset to the initial setting which has beenspecified by selecting [02 User Setting] > [02 Initial Setting] > [01 Copy

Initial setting], or [ON] to use the copy conditions written to ModeMemory 30 as the initial setting.

- Finisher Mode by Full-auto Specify the initial setting for the finisher when selecting [Full Auto] in theReset button function.

- Initial by Key Counter Insert

Select to reset or not when inserting the key counter or magnetic card of

the data controller.

- Status Hold When Auto Reset

When Reset functions select to reset the Platen/ADF mode to the initialsetting, or save the previous setting.

- Next Job Staple Setting

Staple mode is automatically canceled after a job is completed with

Staple sort mode On.- Original Set/Bind Direction

Select to reset or save the original direction setting made on the SpecialOriginal screen and the binding position setting made on the OutputMode screen after completion of each copying job.






User setting 16



2 Touch [01 System Setting], [04 Reset Setting], and then [02 ModeReset Setting].

3 Touch the desired key to each item on the left side of the screen.

– There are two setting screens. Touch [Next] and [Previous] toswitch between the screens.










16 User setting


05 Default Screen Setting

Select the initial screen to be displayed when the power switch is turned on.

[Machine]: The Machine Status screen will be displayed.

[Job List]: The Job List screen will be displayed.

[Copy]: Copy screen will be displayed.


2 Touch [01 System Setting], and then [05 Default Screen Setting].

3 Select the desired initial screen to highlight it.






User setting 16











16 User setting


06 Preset Zoom Setting

The initial setting for Preset Zoom1 is 4.000, Preset Zoom2 is 2.000, andPreset Zoom3 is 0.500.


2 Touch [01 System Setting], and then [06 Preset Zoom Setting].

3 Touch the desired preset zoom key (from 1 to 3) and display thedesired zoom ratio on the right side of the keys using the touch panelkeypad.






User setting 16











16 User setting



Specify Auto Low Power or Auto Shut Off when setting the Power Savemode manually, and select the interval of time that must elapse before Auto

Low Power and Auto Shut Off.

Auto Low Power:

5 min. / 10 min. / 15 min. / 30 min. / 60 min. / 90 min. / 120 min. / 240 min.

Auto Shut Off:30 min. / 60 min. /90 min. / 120 min. / 240 min.


2 Touch [01 System Setting], and then [07 Power Save Setting].






User setting 16


3 Specify the Power Save mode to be set manually by pressing [PowerSave] on the control panel, by selecting [Auto Low Power] or [Auto ShutOff].

4 Select the interval of time that must elapse before turning to Auto LowPower automatically.The initial setting is 15 minutes.

– Touch the arrow keys [+] and [,] in each area to select a specificwaiting period before activating Auto Low Power.

5 Select the interval of time that must elapse before turning to Auto ShutOff automatically.

The initial setting is 90 minutes.

– Touch the arrow keys [+] and [,] in each area to select a specific

waiting period before activating Auto Shut Off.










16 User setting


2

NoteThe period of time selected for Auto Low Power cannot exceed the Auto

Shut Off setting.

If the same period of time as Auto Shut Off is selected for Auto LowPower, Auto Shut Off will function instead of Auto Low Power.

2

NoteIf the period of time selected for Auto Shut Off is shorter than that of for

Auto Low Power, the period of time for Auto Low Power will be forcibly

reset to the same period of time as Auto Shut Off. Auto Low Power will

not function.






User setting 16


08 Time and Date Setting

Set the current date and time, the summer time, and also the time difference.The default setting for the summer time is off.


2 Touch [01 System Setting], and then [08 Time and Date Setting].

3 Adjust the time.

The time indicated by the machine is displayed in the upper line and

ordered by date, month, year, and time (in 24-hour expression).

– Enter the time by using the touch panel keypad.– Touch [Set] to move the highlighted section to the number to be

changed. Repeat the same procedure for month, date, and time.






16 User setting


4 Set the summer time.

– The summer time is initially deactivated. To activate the summertime (Daylight Savings Time) function, touch [Summer Time] tohighlight it. The Present time will gain one hour.

5 The Difference in time setting is provided in order to give the time

difference information at the same time when an e-mail is received. Thetime difference is predefined for each country or region.

To set this function, follow the procedure below.

– Touch [Diff. time setting] to display the Difference in Time Setting

screen.– Touch [+ <-> -] to display "+" when the local time is earlier than the

Universal time, or "-" when the local time is later.– Use the touch panel keypad to enter the time difference between

the Universal time and the local time in the machine setting area.(e.g. Enter "-0600" for six hours later than the Universal time.)

– Touch [OK] to return to the Time and Date Setting screen.










User setting 16


09 Buzzer Setting

Specify the following 2 settings.- 01 Buzzer Volume Regulation

Set the buzzer sound (the touch key sound) as touching the screen, andalso select the buzzer volume.

- 02 Buzzer for Job Stop Set

Select the duration of the buzzer sound when the machine stops due tono paper and mishandled paper.


screen.

2 Touch [01 System Setting], [09 Buzzer Setting], and then [01 Buzzer Volume Regulation].






16 User setting


3 Touch [On] to highlight it. Adjust the Buzzer volume, as desired. Touch[Small] or [Big] to regulate the buzzer volume of the touch keys.

– Touch [Off] to highlight it. The buzzer will go off.




5 Touch [02 Buzzer for Job Stop Set].






User setting 16





In either case, the Buzzer Setting Menu screen will be restored.







16 User setting


10 Key Response Time

Select the response time between touching the key and the machineresponses to it.


2 Touch [01 System Setting], and then [10 Key Response Time].











User setting 16


11 Short Cut Key Setting

Select up to 3 short cut keys to be displayed under [Application] and [Quality Adjust.] on the Copy screen, and under [Quality Adjust] on the Scan Settings

screen of the Scanner screen, for easy access to the desired setting screens.[Short Cut Display] under [Quality Adjust.] on the Copy screen can also bechanged to [Density Setting Display].


2 Touch [01 System Setting], and then [11 Short cut Key Setting].






16 User setting


3 To display the short cut keys under [Application] on the Copy screen,touch [01 Application] to display the Short cut Key Setting screen(Application).

– Touch appropriate keys to select up to 3 short cuts for[Application].


The Short Cut Key Setting Menu screen will be restored.

5 To set short cut keys to be displayed under [Quality Adjust.] on theCopy screen, touch [02 Quality Adjust. (Copy) ]to display the Short cutKey Setting screen (Quality).

– Touch appropriate keys to select up to 3 short cuts for [Quality Adjust.].






User setting 16




7 To set short cut keys to be displayed under [Quality Adjust.] on theScan Settings screen of the Scanner screen, touch [03 Quality Adjust.(Scanner)] to display the Short cut Key Setting screen (Quality)

– Touch appropriate keys to select up to 3 short cuts for [Quality Adjust.].








16 User setting


9 To change the short cut keys displayed under [Quality Adjust.] on theCopy screen to [Density Setting Display], touch [04 Quality Adjust. AreaSet] to display the Short cut Key Setting screen (Quality)

– Select either [Short Cut Display] or [Density Setting Display].









User setting 16


12 Service Port Device

Specify whether to use the service port device or not, and select thekeyboard type if the service port device is used.


2 Touch [01 System Setting], and then [12 Service Port Device].

3 Select either [On] or [Off].

– When selecting [On], touch [Keyboard Type] to select a keyboard

type.






16 User setting






2

NoteWhen using the service port device, contact your service representative.






User setting 16


16.3 02 Initial Setting

01 Copy Initial setting

Besides the factory default setting (Full Auto), you may set the copyingcondition as the initial setting as desired.

To specify the copy conditions set here to be used as the initial setting whenthe Reset function is used, select [User Setting \ 01 System Setting \ 04Reset Setting \ 02 Mode Reset Setting], and then select [Initial] for the Reset

button function and [OFF] for the Mode memory auto call.


2 Touch [02 Initial Setting], and then [01 Copy Initial setting].






16 User setting


3 Set the following setting items in initial conditions: Original Setting,Color, Zoom, Application, Image Quality, Output Appli.,Simplex/Duplex, Paper Setting, and Rotation On/Off.

– Follow the same procedure as setting it on the Copy screen. Touch[ADF] to select the ADF mode as the initial setting.










User setting 16


02 Scan Initial setting

Besides the factory default setting (Full Auto), you may set the scanningcondition as the initial setting as desired.

To specify the scanning conditions set here to be used as the initial settingwhen the Reset function is used, select [User Setting \ 01 System Setting \

04 Reset Setting \ 02 Mode Reset Setting], and then select [Initial] for theReset button function.


2 Touch [02 Initial Setting], and then [02 Scan Initial setting].






16 User setting


3 Set the following setting items in initial conditions: Original Setting,Color, Zoom, Color Space, Image Adjust., Scan Size, Resolution, andDefault Server.

– Follow the same procedure as setting it on the Copy screen. Touch[ADF] to select the ADF mode as the initial setting.










User setting 16


16.4 03 Common Setting

The following features can be provided by switching the setting.

Feature Description Available options

1SHOT indication time Select the SHOT indication time to be dis-

played in the message area of the touchpanel, such as "Original size 8.5 × 11".

3 seconds/5 seconds

Job Offset Mode Set the machine to offset the copies/print-outs of different jobs.

On/Off

Continuation print Set the machine to output multiple reserve jobs in succession.

Copy on/Copyoff/Printer on/Printeroff

STOP Key Function Specify whether to pause or abort a jobwhen [Stop] is pressed on the control pan-el.

Job Temp. Stop/JobStop Function

Side 2 Lens Adjustment

mode

Specify whether to enable the lens adjust-

ment mode.

On/Off

Tray Change Time When selecting the tray which sets differ-ent paper type, specify the time when it be-comes the copy possible.

Short/Standard

Priority Paper Type Select whether to maintain the temperaturewhich is suited for the coated paper byturning the fixing unit roller.

Others/Coated Paper

Un-compressing mode Specify when storing to HDD is not com-pleted with memory overflow.

Off/On






16 User setting



2 Touch [03 Common Setting].


– There are two setting screens. Touch [Next] and [Previous] toswitch between the screens.










User setting 16


16.5 04 Copy Setting



Fold & Staple auto select Set the machine to automatically select the

Booklet mode when Stapling & Foldingmode is selected.

Yes/No

Fine Adjust Margin Select On/Off to enter a decimal point forimage shift.

Yes/No

Orig. Glass Auto Size Se-lect

Set the machine to automatically select thesame size of copy paper as the originalplaced on the original glass.

On/Off

Auto Detect Orig. Size in ADF

Set the machine to automatically select thesame size of copy paper as the originalplaced on the ADF.

On/Off

Original Glass AMS Set the machine to detect the size of the

original and select the appropriate magnifi-cation ratio to correspond to the selectedpaper size.

On/Off

ADF AMS Set the machine to automatically select anappropriate ratio for copying when detect-ing the original size placed on the ADF.

On/Off

Non-Image Area Erase oforig

Specify the conditions to be applied to[Non-Image Area Erase of orig].

Yes/ APS/AMS /Ex-cept Orig. Glass (1:1)

ADF Frame Erase Set to erase the frame when copying in ADF mode.

None/1mm/2mm/3mm/4mm/5mm

Rotation When the trays contain only the paper size

different from the original, rotate the imageof the original and adjust to fit into the cop-ying paper size.

On-Always /APS/AMS

/APS/AMS /Reduce

Suspend Interruption Set the timing to interrupt the present jobwhen pressing [Interrupt] while copying.

Stop Immediate-ly/When CurrentComp.

Change Page Print Pos(Booklet)

Set the page number position when usingBooklet with Page Numbering in Stamp.

Off/On (Outside Print)

Printer Prohibit Timer Select the interval time that printing via PCis prohibited after touching the touch keys.

Off/15 seconds/30seconds/60 sec-onds/90 seconds

Bookmark function Specify whether to delete the set book-

mark or not, or select to disable the book-mark function.

Off/Release Every

Job/Not release






16 User setting


Orig./Out Bind DirectionSet

Set the machine to conform the binding di-rection of the originals and printed setseach other.

On/Off

Choose Default Traywhen APS Off

Select the tray to be automatically selectedwhen APS is released.

APSTray/Tray1/Tray2/Tray

3/Tray4/Tray5

Scan prohibit (pull outtray)

Set to stop scanning when pulling out thetray.

On/Off







User setting 16



2 Touch [04 Copy Setting].


– There are five setting screens. Touch [Next] and [Previous] to switchbetween the screens.










16 User setting


16.6 05 Scan Setting



File Form Default E-Mail Select the default file form when transmit-

ting in E-Mail.

Packaged TIFF/Divid-

ed TIFF/PackagedPDF/JPEG

File Form Default FTP Select the default file form when transmit-ting to FTP.

Packaged TIFF/Divid-ed TIFF/PackagedPDF/JPEG

File Form Default SMB Select the default file form when transmit-ting in SMB.


Default Address Select the default destination to be dis-played when selecting the Scanner screen.

E-Mail/HDD/FTP/SMB/ QUEUE

Compress MethodColor/Gray

Select the default destination to be dis-played when selecting the Scanner screen.

High Com-press/Standard/LowCompress






User setting 16



2 Touch [05 Scan Setting].


– There are three setting screens. Touch [Next] and [Previous] toswitch between the screens.










16 User setting


16.7 06 Printer Setting

Specify the following 4 settings.

Setting items to be specified varies depending on the printer controllerinstalled in the machine.


2 Touch [06 Printer Setting], and then [01 Gray Text Outline Enhance].


01 Gray Text Outline En-hance

Select to enable gray text outline enhance-ment for printing.

Strong+/Nor-mal/Weak+

02 Thin Line Enhance-ment

Specify the level of thin line enhancementfor printing.

Strong+/Strong/Nor-mal/Weak/Weak+

03 Reversed Text En-hancement

Specify the level of reversed text enhance-ment for printing.

Strong+/Nor-mal/Weak+

04 Blur Prevention Specify whether to use the function to pre-vent blur for lines which is caused by thinline enhancement.

Off/On






User setting 16


3 Select the desired key to highlight it.



In either case, the Printer Setting Menu screen will be restored.

5 Touch [06 Printer Setting], and then [02 Thin Line Enhancement].






16 User setting






8 Touch [06 Printer Setting], and then [03 Reserved Text Enhancement].






User setting 16






11 Touch [06 Printer Setting], and then [04 Blur Prevention].






16 User setting












User setting 16


16.8 07 Image Quality Setting

01 Screen

Enable the selections of settings other than [Line 1] when selecting [Text &Photo] or [Photo] for image quality.

Line 2: Permission/Prohibition

Dot 1: Permission/Prohibition

Dot 2: Permission/Prohibition


2 Touch [07 Image Quality Setting], and then [01 Screen].







16 User setting




In either case, the Image Quality Setting Menu screen will be restored.







User setting 16


02 Screen Initial setting

Select then screen to be displayed when selecting [Text & Photo] or [Photo]for image quality.

Full color-Text/Photo: Line 1/Line 2/Dot 1/Dot 2/Compression

Full color-Photo: Line 1/Line 2/Dot 1/Dot 2/Compression

Black-Text/Photo: Line 1/Line 2/Dot 1/Dot 2/Compression

Black-Photo: Line 1/Line 2/Dot 1/Dot 2/Compression

Single Color-Text/Photo: Line 1/Line 2/Dot 1/Dot 2/Compression

Single Color-Photo: Line 1/Line 2/Dot 1/Dot 2/Compression


2 Touch [07 Image Quality Setting], and then [02 Screen Initial setting].






16 User setting



– There are six setting screens. Touch [Next] and [Previous] to switchbetween the screens.










User setting 16


03 Original Density shift

Specify the default density setting for each image quality mode.

0 - 6 (Text & Photo:3, Map:3, Photo:3, Text:3)


screen.

2 Touch [07 Image Quality Setting], and then [03 Original Density shift].



Available range: 0 to +6






16 User setting











User setting 16


04 ACS adjustment

Adjust the automatic color detection function if a colored original is identifiedas monochrome or a monochrome original is identified as colored with this

function.

1Follow the procedure on page 16-3 to display the User Setting Menuscreen.

2 Touch [07 Image Quality Setting], and then [04 ACS adjustment].

3 Place the original onto the original glass, and touch [Scan].

Scanned result is displayed in the message area.






16 User setting


4 If the colored original is read as monochrome, use the keypad to entera higher value, and then touch [<<SET]. If the monochrome original isread as colored, use the keypad to enter a lower value, and then touch[<<SET].

Available range: -5 to +5











User setting 16


16.9 08 Change Password

Change a user password which the user has registered for userauthentication. The changed password is reflected to the user authenticationsetting description.


2 Touch [08 Change Password].

3 Enter current password, then touch [OK].






16 User setting


4 Touch [New Password], then enter a new user password.

– Reenter the new user password in [Check Input].



In either case, the User Setting Menu screen will be restored.


2

NoteBe sure to make the user authentication before accessing the User

Setting screen. The user password can not be changed without any user

authentication made or if logged in user is different from the one who

wants to change the password.






17Machine administrator

setting






Machine administrator setting 17



This section provides information on, and instruction for, setting the items

which the machine administrator can specify in the Machine AdministratorMenu screen. It also provides information on how to adjust the position of thetouch sensor using the Touch Screen Adjustment screen when it ismisaligned with the screen.

17.1 Machine administrator setting outlines

The top menu, referred to as Utility/Counter screen, appears right after[Utility/Counter] is pressed.

Touching [Machine Admin. Setting] on the Utility/Counter screen will displaythe Machine Administrator Menu screen.

2

NoteThe Machine Administrator Menu screen can optionally be set so as to

be available to only those who enter the valid Administrator password.

Contact your service representative for setting the password.








How to access the Machine Administrator Setting screen



2 Touch [03 Machine Admin. Setting].








– If the Password Input screen is displayed, enter the eight-digitmachine administrator password, then touch [OK].

The Machine Administrator Setting Menu screen will be displayed.








How to use [Close], layer keys, and [Exit]

Touch [Close] to return to the previous screen.Touch the desired layer key on the left side area of the screen to jump to that

screen.

Touch [Exit] to restore the Copy screen.








17.2 01 System Setting


Specify Auto Low Power or Auto Shut Off when setting the Power Savemode manually, and select the interval of time that must elapse before Auto

Low Power and Auto Shut Off. Auto Low Power5 min. / 10 min. / 15 min. / 30 min. / 60 min. / 90 min. / 120 min. / 240 min.

Auto Shut Off30 min. / 60 min. /90 min. / 120 min. / 240 min.

1 Follow the procedure on page 17-4 to display the Machine Administrator Setting Menu screen.

2 Touch [01 System Setting], and then [01 Power Save Setting].








Power Save Setting screen will be displayed.

!DetailThe following operation is equivalent to selecting [User Setting \ 01

System Setting \ 07 Power Save Setting]. Please refer to page 16-18 for

more information.








02 Time and Date Setting

Set the current date and time, the summer time, and also the time difference.The default setting for the summer time is off.


2 Touch [01 System Setting], and then [02 Time and Date Setting].

– Time and Date Setting screen will be displayed.

!DetailThe following operation is equivalent to selecting [User Setting \ 01

System Setting \ 08 Time and Date Setting]. Please refer to page 16-27

for more information.








03 Weekly Timer Setting \ 01 Weekly Timer On/Off Set

Enable and disable the Weekly Timer function.

Conditions required to use the Weekly Timer

- The power plug is inserted into the socket (the Weekly Timer is notoperational when the power plug is disconnected, while the data such as

the On/Off time settings are stored).- The power switch is turned on.- The current date and time are correctly set.


2 Touch [01 System Setting], [03 Weekly Timer Setting], and then[01 Weekly Timer On/Off Set].








3 Touch [Weekly timer On] to activate Weekly Timer, or touch [Weeklytimer Off] to deactivate Weekly Timer.The selected key will be highlighted.

– The default setting is [Weekly Timer Off].Touching [Weekly Timer On] will enable the Weekly Timer. Themachine which is set to [Weekly Timer On] should have main andsub power supplies sustained.Touching [Weekly Timer Off] will disable the Weekly Timer. Powersupply can be managed by switching on/off the main and sub

power plugs.



In either case, the Weekly Timer Setting Menu screen will be restored.









03 Weekly Timer Setting \ 02 Timer Setting

Use this function to set the On/Off times in hours and minutes for each dayof the week or set the collective time for the entire week, i.e., the same On/Off

time for a certain day of the week.

2NoteEven if On/Off times are specified here, [Timer Action On/Off Set] (see

page 17-15) still needs to be specified in order to activate the timer,

meaning that, for example, setting On/Off times for holidays here will not

turn on the machine on those holidays. Specifying the identical time

settings to On and Off times will not turn on the machine even if the timer

is set operational.

1 Follow the procedure on page 17-3 to display the Machine

Administrator Setting Menu screen.

2 Touch [01 System Setting], [03 Weekly Timer Setting], and then[02 Timer Setting].








3 Set the collective time for the entire week.

– Touch [Block Set] to display the Weekly Timer On/Off TimeCollective Setting screen.

– Touch to highlight the day(s) of the week to be set. More than one

can be selected at a time.– Enter the On-time and Off-time using the touch panel keypad, and

then touch Set after each entry.– Touch [OK] to restore the Weekly Timer On/Off Time Setting

screen.

4Enter the On/Off times for each day.

– Touch [Set] to highlight the On time for the day of the week that you

want to activate the machine.– User the touch panel keypad to enter the On time, and then touch

[Set]. The Off time for the day becomes highlighted.








– When setting Sunday Off-time, Monday On-time is highlightedagain.

– Repeat these steps to specify On and Off times through Monday toSunday. Even if On/Off times are specified here, [Timer ActionOn/Off Set] (see page 17-15) still needs to be specified in order toactivate the timer, meaning that, for example, setting On/Off times

for holidays here will not turn on the machine on those holidays.Enter a two-digit On-hour (ex. 8 a.m. is 08) and a two-digit On-minute (ex. 7 min. is 07) using the touch panel keypad, and thentouch Set.












03 Weekly Timer Setting \ 03 Timer Action On/Off Set

Use this function to set the timer On/Off for a given day of a given month. Setthe On-Off condition for specific days individually or collectively for all

Mondays through Sundays of the given month.

2NoteThe default setting is collective: On for mondays through saturdays, and

Off for sundays.


2 Touch [01 System Setting], [03 Weekly Timer Set], and then [03 Timer Action On/Off Set].








3 To collectively set the on/off data for the entire month by the day of theweek, touch [On] or [Off] for the desired day at the bottom of thescreen. If you touch an already-highlighted key, it will not be changed.

– If any change is made in the collective setting area, the Timer ActionChange Confirmation popup screen will be displayed.

– The settings specified collective to days of the weeks will

supersede settings specified to individual days.Touch [Yes] to change the timer action, or touch [No] to cancel.

4 Use the arrow keys [+] and [,] to scroll to the desired month.

– Touch the key for the desired day to activate the timer on thecalendar displayed on the center of the screen.








03 Weekly Timer Setting \ 04 Lunch Hour Off Setting

Select the paper type setting of the tray which is automatically selected when ATS functions. When the paper type that is not specified with this function is

designated to the tray that is automatically selected by ATS, the machineindicates the paper type unmatched.

2

NoteThe Lunch Hour Off Setting does not apply to the time during which the

timer is not set to On.

The factory default setting is Function Invalid.


2 Touch [01 System Setting], [03 Weekly Timer Setting], and then[04 Lunch Hour Off Setting].








3 Touch [Function Valid] to activate the Lunch hour off function.

– Enter Off-time using the touch panel keypad and touch [OK], thenenter Restart time and touch [Set].

– Touch [Function Invalid] to deactivate the Lunch Hour Off function.












03 Weekly Timer Setting \ 05 Timer Interrupt Password Set

Use this password setting mode to establish a four-digit password requiredfor using the Timer Interrupt function.


2 Touch [01 System Setting], [03 Weekly Timer Setting], and then[05 Timer Interrupt Password Set].

3 Use the touch panel keypad to enter a four-digit password.












2

NoteWhen the password setting is 0000, Timer Interrupt can be used simply

by pressing [Power Save] on the control panel, then on. In this case, youwill be asked to enter the duration of use (a period of time to turn the

machine power on).








04 Operation Prohibit Set \ 01 Lock/Delete Mode Memory

Lock/unlock or delete a mode memory that has been programmed. Thesettings of a locked mode memory cannot be changed.


2 Touch [01 System Setting], [04 Operation Prohibit Set], and then[01 Lock/Delete Mode Memory].

3 Touch [Copy Mode Memory] or [Scan Mode Memory].








4 Lock/unlock a mode memory.

– The programmed name is displayed on the right side of the Modememory number, when the setting is already programmed.Touch the key on the left side of the desired Mode memory number.Use the arrow keys to scroll to the desired Mode memory number,if required.

Touching the locked key will clear the locking mark and releaselocking.Touching the key with a name not entered will not lock the key andwill not display the lock mark

5 Delete a mode memory.

– Touch the Mode memory number you want to delete. Use the arrowkeys to scroll to the desired Job number, if required. Touch [Delete].

Selected programs and the name will be deleted from the Modememory.Locked Mode memory is deleted. Note that Mode memory oncedeleted cannot be recalled.30 Mode memory can be stored. Use [Next] or [Previous] to displaythe desired Mode memory.



In either case, the Lock/Delete Mode Memory Menu screen will berestored.









04 Operation Prohibit Set \ 02 Change Prohibit Setting

Specify whether to permit or prohibit the modification of the followingsettings.

Specify whether to permit or prohibit the modification of the followingsettings.

- Change Send Address: Permit/prohibit to enter send address manually on the Scanner screen.

- Change User Lens Mode:

Permit/prohibit to alter already programmed magnification ratio.

- Change Program Image Overlay:

Permit/prohibit to delete or overwrite a title of programmed overlayimage.


2 Touch [01 System Setting], [04 Operation Prohibit Set], and then[02 Change Prohibit Setting].








3 Touch to highlight [Permission] or [Prohibition] for each item.












04 Operation Prohibit Set \ 03 Scanner Prohibit Setting

Permit/prohibit to transmit scanned data to the following device.- E-Mail

- HDD- FTP- SMB

- QUEUE

- Manual Input



2 Touch [01 System Setting], [04 Operation Prohibit Set], and then[03 Scanner Prohibit Setting].

3 Touch to highlight [Permit] or [Prohibit] for each item.










In either case, the Operation Prohibit Setting Menu screen will berestored.









05 Expert Adjustment \ 01 AES Level Adjustment

Change the density level of [Color]/[Black] to be applied when selecting[Auto] for [Image Quality \ Copy Density] on the Copy screen.


2 Touch [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], and then [01 AESLevel Adjustment].

3 Touch appropriate keys to set required levels separately for [Color] and[Black].



In either case, the Expert Adjustment Menu screen will be restored.








05 Expert Adjustment \ 02 Erase Adjustment

Specify the detailed setting for erase operations used when reading theoriginals.

- 01 Non-Image Area Erase

Select to delete or not the outside area of the original from the followingthree ways:

– Erase Outside of Original:Set the machine any time to delete the outside area of the original.

– On - APS/AMS Only:Set the machine to delete the outside area of the original only when APS

or AMS is activated.– Except Orig. Glass (1:1):

Set the machine to delete the outside area of the original except whencopying in real size on the original glass.

- 02 Erase Operating Setting

Use this function to select the erase mode, and set the density level of

the original (five levels). The default setting is Auto.- 03 ADF Frame Erasure

Set Frame Erasure to function anytime when copying in ADF mode, andset the amount of the outside area to be deleted.









2 Touch [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], and then [02 Erase Adjustment].

The Erase Adjustment Menu screen will be displayed.

3 Touch [01 Non-Image Area Erase].

– Touch the desired key to highlight it.



In either case, the Operation Prohibit Setting Menu screen will berestored.








5 Touch [02 Erase Operating Setting].

– Touch [Auto] to automatically select the appropriate settings for theoriginal placed on the original glass for either mode. Touch any keyfrom five exposure levels to manually select the density level.



In either case, the Erase Adjustment Menu screen will be restored.

7 Touch [03 ADF Frame Erase].

– Touch the desired amount of outside area to be deleted. Touch

[None] if deleting the outside area is not necessary.








05 Expert Adjustment \ 03 Printer Adjustment \ 01 Restart Timing

Adjustment

Perform this adjustment to control the restart timing.

This operation is equivalent to selecting [Adjustment \ 01 Machine

Adjustment \ 01 Printer Adjustment \ 01 Restart Timing Adjustment] on the


2

ReminderPerform this adjustment after completing FD-Mag. Adjustment.


2 Touch [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], [03 Printer

Adjustment], and then [01 Restart Timing Adjustment].








The Restart Timing Adjustment screen will be displayed.

!DetailPlease refer to page 14-6 for the details on the subsequent operations.








05 Expert Adjustment \ 03 Printer Adjustment \ 02 Centering Adjustment

Perform this adjustment to control image centering centring to the directionof paper feed.

This operation is equivalent to selecting [Adjustment \ 01 Machine Adjustment \ 01 Printer Adjustment \ 02 Centering Adjustment] on the




2 Touch [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], [03 Printer Adjustment], and then [02 Centering Adjustment].









05 Expert Adjustment \ 03 Printer Adjustment \ 03 FD-Mag. Adjustment

Perform this adjustment to control the magnification to the direction of paperfeed.

This operation is equivalent to selecting [Adjustment \ 01 Machine Adjustment \ 01 Printer Adjustment \ 03 FD-Mag. Adjustment] on the




2 Touch [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], [03 Printer Adjustment], and then [03 FD-Mag. Adjustment].









05 Expert Adjustment \ 03 Printer Adjustment \ 04 CD-Mag. Adjustment

Perform this adjustment to control the magnification perpendicular to thedirection of paper feed.

This operation is equivalent to selecting [Adjustment \ 01 Machine Adjustment \ 01 Printer Adjustment \ 04 CD-Mag. Adjustment] on the




2 Touch [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], [03 Printer Adjustment], and then [04 CD-Mag. Adjustment].

The CD-Mag. Adjustment screen will be displayed.








05 Expert Adjustment \ 03 Printer Adjustment \ 05 Lead Edge Erase

Adjustment

Adjust the amount of image erase from the edge of the sheet.



2 Touch [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], [03 Printer Adjustment], and then [05 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment].

The Lead Edge Erase Adjustment screen will be displayed.

3 Touch [COPY] tab.











5 Measure the resultant restart timing.

6 If the desired result cannot be obtained, touch the [UTILITY] tab.

The Lead Edge Erase Adjustment screen will be restored.

7 Touch [+ <-> -] to specify the value to be positive or negative.Use the touch panel keypad to enter the desired adjustment value, thentouch [<<SET].



9 Touch [Return] to restore the Printer Adjustment Menu screen.


20








05 Expert Adjustment \ 03 Printer Adjustment \ 06 Registration Loop

Adj.

Adjust the amount of registered loop based on a paper feed unit, a bypasstray, and ADU.


2 Touch [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], [03 Printer Adjustment], and then [06 Registration Loop Adj.].

The Registration Loop Adjustment screen will be displayed.

3 Touch [COPY] tab.











5 Check the sample pattern.


The Registration Loop Adjustment screen will be restored.


8 Touch [+ <-> -] to specify the value to be positive or negative. Use the touch panel keypad to enter the desired adjustment value,then touch [<<SET].












05 Expert Adjustment \ 03 Printer Adjustment \ 07 Pre-registration Adj.

Adjust the amount to pre-register based on paper feed tray, a bypass tray,and ADU.


2 Touch [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], [03 Printer Adjustment], and then [07 Pre-registration Adj.].

The Pre-registration Adjustment screen will be displayed.

3 Touch [COPY] tab.











5 Check the sample pattern.


The Pre-registration Adjustment screen will be restored.


8 Touch [+ <-> -] to specify the value to be positive or negative.Use the touch panel keypad to enter the desired adjustment value, thentouch [<<SET].












05 Expert Adjustment \ 04 Finisher Adjustment

Adjust the settings related to the finisher.

This operation is equivalent to selecting [Adjustment \ 04 Finisher Adjustment] on the Machine Status screen.


2 Touch [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], and then[04 Finisher Adjustment].

The Finisher Adjustment screen will be displayed.








05 Expert Adjustment \ 05 Scanner Adjustment

Adjust the settings related to the scanner.

This operation is equivalent to selecting [Adjustment \ 01 Machine Adjustment \ 02 Scanner Adjustment] on the Machine Status screen.


2 Touch [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], and then[05 Scanner Adjustment].

The Scanner Adjustment screen will be displayed.








05 Expert Adjustment \ 06 Process Adjustment \ 01 Front & Back

Density

Specify the front & back density setting for CMYK, front, back, and postcard.



2 Touch [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], [06 Process Adjustment], and then [01Front & Back Density].


4 Touch [+ <-> -] to specify the value to be positive or negative.

Use the touch panel keypad to enter the desired adjustment value, thentouch [<<SET].

Available range: -3 to +3








5 Touch [Return] to restore the Process Adjustment Menu screen.









05 Expert Adjustment \ 06 Process Adjustment \ 02 Toner Density

Sensor

Check the value of the toner density sensor in CMYK.



2 Touch [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], [06 Process Adjustment], and then [02 Toner Density Sensor].

3 Touch [Start] to display the value of toner density sensor.

– To cancel the sensor, touch [Stop].










05 Expert Adjustment \ 06 Process Adjustment \ 03 Toner

Quality/Exposure

Adjust the toner quantity and exposure for each CMYK value.



2 Touch [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], [06 Process Adjustment], and then [03 Toner Quality/Exposure].

3 Touch [Next] or [Previous] to display the relevant screen for the coloryou want to adjust.

4 Touch appropriate level keys under [Toner Quality] and [Exposure] tospecify toner quantity and exposure.











In either case, the Process Adjustment Menu screen will be restored.









05 Expert Adjustment \ 07 Quality Adjustment \ 01 Printer Gamma Offset

Adj.

Manually adjust the settings related to printer gamma offset. Manually adjustthe CMYK values separately for Line 1, Line 2, Dot 1, Dot 2, CONTONE, andED.



2 Touch [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], [07 Quality Adjustment], and then [01 Printer Gamma Offset Adj.].

The Printer Gamma Offset Adjustment screen will be displayed.

3 Touch [COPY] tab.









4 Select A4 v /8.5" e 11" v paper, then press [START] on the controlpanel.

The sample pattern will be output. The Printer Gamma Offset Adjustment screen will be restored.

5 Touch [Next] or [Previous] to display the relevant screen on which youwant to make adjustments.

6 Touch to highlight [Y], [M], [C], or [K] as required, and enter values usingthe screen keypad, then touch [<<SET].











05 Expert Adjustment \ 07 Quality Adjustment \ 02 Printer Gamma Offset

Auto Adj.

Automatically adjust the settings related to printer gamma offset. Automatically adjust the CMYK values separately for Line 1, Line 2, Dot 1,Dot 2, CONTONE, and ED.

2

NoteBe sure to out put the chart in Printer Gamma Offset Adj. in order to

check the printed position of the chart both before and after operating

Printer Gamma Offset Auto Adj.


2 Touch [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], [07 Quality Adjustment], and then [02 Printer Gamma Offset Auto Adj.].

The Printer Gamma Offset Automatic Adjustment screen will bedisplayed.








3 Touch [COPY] tab.


4 Select A4 v /8.5" e 11" v paper, then press [START] on the controlpanel.

The test chart will be output. The Printer Gamma Offset Automatic Adjustment screen will be restored.

5 Touch [Next] or [Previous] to display the relevant screen on which youwant to make adjustments.








6 Place the test chart on the original glass.

– Place the test chart face down on the original glass with greenarrow pointing at the left side as shown below, and put about 10sheets of blank copy paper on top of the chart.Close the ADF/original cover.

7 Touch [Start] on the screen. The machine starts the adjustmentautomatically.

The message "Completed" will be displayed.If an error code (Error 1, 2, or 10) is displayed, check that the test chartis placed properly.

If any other error code is displayed, please contact your service

representative.

8 If you want to make readjustments, press [Readjust] to display thepopup menu to confirm whether to readjust or not.


– Touching [Adj. data reset] will display the Reset Confirmationpopup menu. Touch [YES] to reset the adjustment value to thefactory setting, or touch [NO] to cancel.

10 Touch [Return] to restore the Quality Adjustment Menu screen.









05 Expert Adjustment \ 07 Quality Adjustment \ 03 Printer Gamma

Sensor Adj.

Automatically adjust the settings related to printer gamma sensor. AdjustLine 1, Line 2, Dot 1, Dot 2, CONTONE, and ED.


2 Touch [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], [07 Quality Adjustment], and then [03 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj.].

The Printer Gamma Offset Automatic Adjustment screen will be

displayed.

3 Touch [COPY] tab.









4 Select A4 v /8.5" e11" v paper, then press [START] on the controlpanel.

The test chart will be output. The Printer Gamma Offset Automatic Adjustment screen will be restored.

5 Touch the desired item key to highlight it.

6 Place the test cart on the original glass.

– Place the test chart face down on the original glass with greenarrow pointing at the left side as shown below, and put about 10sheets of blank copy paper on top of the chart.Close the ADF/original cover.

7 Touch [Start] on the screen. The machine starts the adjustmentautomatically.

The message "Completed" will be displayed.If an error code (Error 1, 2, or 10) is displayed, check that the test chartis placed properly.

If any other error code is displayed, please contact your servicerepresentative.








8 If you want to make readjustments, press [Readjust] to display thepopup menu to confirm whether to readjust or not.


– Touching [Adj. data reset] will display the Reset Confirmation

popup menu. Touch [YES] to reset the adjustment value to thefactory setting, or touch [NO] to cancel.

10 Touch [Return] to restore the Quality Adjustment Menu screen.









05 Expert Adjustment \ 07 Quality Adjustment \ 04 Image Quality

Stability

Set priority to either the output speed for copying and printing operations orthe image quality stability in a copying or printing job. Adjustment operationscan be set to the jobs whose priority is set to image quality stability.

The selection of [Speed] or [Stability] here is equivalent to selecting[Adjustment \ 02 Image Quality Stability] on the Machine Status screen.


2 Touch [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], [07 Quality Adjustment], and then [04 Image Quality Stability].

The Image Quality Stability screen will be displayed.

3 Select [Speed] or [Stability] separately for a copying and printing job.








4 Adjustment operations can be set to the jobs whose priority is set to[Stability].



In either case, the Quality Adjustment Menu screen will be restored.









05 Expert Adjustment \ 07 Quality Adjustment \ 05 Custom Screen

Select Line 1 or Line 2 for the Line screen. When [Line 2] is selected, furtherselection can be made for the low line screen (type 2).

For the Dot screen select Line 1 or Line 2. When [Line 2] is selected, furtherselection can be made for the low line screen (type 2).

If screen type has been changed, gamma automatic adjustment will beperformed after returning to the user mode. After completing gammaautomatic adjustment, please perform printer gamma offset adjustment

against the changed screen.

!DetailFor details, see "01 Printer Gamma Offset Adj." on page 17-57 and "02

Printer Gamma Offset Auto Adj." on page 17-59.


2 Touch [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], [07 Quality Adjustment], and then [05 Custom Screen].

The Custom Screen Setting screen will be displayed.








3 Specify [type 1] or [type 2] separately for screens whose priority is setto [Line 2] or [Dot 2].



To cancel the change, touch [Cancel].

5 If screen type was changed, touch [Exit] on the Quality Adjustmentscreen to display the Copy screen.

The gamma automatic adjustment will be performed.

6 After the gamma adjustment is complete, adjust the printer gammaoffset setting for the screen which was modified in the machineadministrator setting.








05 Expert Adjustment \ 08 Execute Adjust Operation

Execute adjustment operations for [Automatic Gamma Adj.], [ColorRegistration Adj.], [Toner Refresh Mode], and [Belt Refresh Mode].

This operation is equivalent to selecting [Adjustment \ 03 Execute AdjustOperation] on the Machine Status screen.


2 Touch [01 System Setting], [05 Expert Adjustment], and then[08 Execute Adjust Operation].

The Execute Adjustment Operation screen will be displayed.

3 Touch an appropriate key to select the adjustment operation.








4 Touch [OK] to complete the operation.











06 List/Count

Use this function to print out the list selected from the following items.- Mode memory list

Programmed contents of Mode memory- User management list

Home position settings selected by user

- Use management list

Information controlled by user authentication or division authentication- Font pattern list

Font patterns used in the machine

- Audit log report

Audited log


2 Touch [01 System Setting], and then [06 List/Count].








3 Touch any key to print the list.

4 Touch [COPY] tab to display the Copy screen.

– Press Start on the control panel to start printing the selected list.To suspend printing, press [Stop]. Touch [UTILITY] tab to return tothe List Print screen.

5 Touch Return to restore the Machine Administrator Setting Menuscreen.









07 Size Setting

Use this function to select the detected paper type of the original and theminimum size of the original placed on the original glass.

- Orig. Glass Size Detect

Specify the size system of the original to be detected on the originalglass.

- ADF Original Size Detect

Specify the size system of the original to be detected in the ADF.- Orig.Glass Minimum Detect

Specify the minimum original size to be detected on the original glass.

- K Size

Specify whether to use the K size, for instance, "8K" and "16K".

- ADF/Orig. Glass Priority

Identify the standard sizes to be detected on the ADF or the original glassso as to prevent other similar sizes from being detected instead.

- PI Size Priority

Identify the standard sizes to be detected on the upper/lower tray of thepost inserter of the folding unit FD-501 so as to prevent other similar sizesfrom being detected instead.


2 Touch [01 System Setting], and then [07 Size Setting].








The Size Setting Menu screen will be displayed.

3 Touch [01 Orig. Glass Size Detect].




In either case, the Size Setting Menu screen will be restored.








5 Touch [02 ADF Original Size Detect].





7 Touch [03 Orig.Glass Minimum Detect].

– Touch the desired size key to highlight it.











9 Touch [04 K Size].

– Touch [K size on] or [K size off] to highlight it.




11 Touch [05 ADF/Orig. Glass Priority].












13 Touch [06 PI Size Priority].













17.3 02 Administrator Register

Use this function to register the machine administrator name and theextension number which are displayed on the left side of the Utility/Counterscreen.


2 Touch [02 Administrator Register].

The Machine Administrator Registration screen will be displayed.








3 Touch [Name Input] to display the Machine Administrator Name Inputscreen. Use the touch panel keypad to register the machineadministrator name. The eight characters including a hyphen (-) can beentered.

4 Touch [Extension Number Input], and enter the extension number ofthe machine administrator using the touch panel keypad.

– The five-digit numbers including a hyphen (-) can be entered.When the extension number is below five digits, enter hyphens to

make it five. If the hyphen is entered as the first number, it isdisplayed as a space on the Utility menu screen. The number whichis entered will be displayed from the last digit, and it is shifted

leftward as a next number is entered.



In either case, the Machine Administrator Setting Menu screen will berestored.









17.4 03 Scanner Send Address

Add, change or delete the destination of transmission for the image scannedby this machine. Also register up to 5 templates which can optionally be usedas a title or body text when transmitting scanned data.

01 Address Edit Add, change or delete the destination of the scanned image.

The following four addresses can be registered:- E-Mail (mail address)

- HDD (box No.)

- FTP (FTP server address)- SMB

The Group of registered addresses can be added, changed or deleted.


2 Touch [01 Scanner Send Address], and then [01 Address Edit].

The Register/Edit Destination Address screen will be displayed.








3 Add, change or delete the E-Mail destination address.

– To add the E-Mail destination address:

Touch [E-Mail], and touch [Add] to display the Input Destination Address screen.

Touch [Address] and display the screen for input. Repeat thisoperation for [Register Name] and [Search Character].Set Daily Use by touching [On] or [Off].

Touch [OK] to restore the Register/Edit Destination Address screen.








– To change the E-Mail destination address:

Touch [E-Mail].

Touch the search key, [Other], [Common], or the arrow keys [+] and[,] to display the Register Name to be changed, and touch tohighlight it.Touch [Change] to display the Input Destination Address screen.

Select the changing item from [Address], [Register name] and[Search Character], and change it in the input screen.Set Daily Use by touching [On] or [Off].









– To delete the E-Mail destination address:

Touch [E-Mail].Touch the search key, [Other], [Common], or the arrow keys [+] and[,] to display the Register Name to be deleted, and touch tohighlight it.Touch [Delete]. The Delete Confirmation popup screen will be

displayed.Touch [Yes]. To suspend deleting, touch [No].


4 Add, change or delete the HDD destination address.

– To add the HDD destination address:

Touch [HDD], and touch [Add] to display the Input Destination Address screen.








Touch [Box Name] and display the screen for input.Repeat this operation for [Register Name] and [Search Character].Set Daily Use by touching [On] or [Off].


– To change the HDD destination address:

Touch [HDD].


Select the changing item from [Address], [Name] and [ReferenceName], and change it in the input screen.








Set Daily Use by touching [On] or [Off].


– To delete the HDD destination address:

Touch [HDD].Touch the search key, [Other], [Common], or the arrow keys [+] and

[,] to display the Register Name to be deleted, and touch tohighlight it.Touch [Delete]. The Delete Confirmation popup screen will bedisplayed.Touch [Yes]. To suspend deleting, touch [No].









5 Add, change or delete the FTP destination address.

– To add the FTP destination address:

Touch [FTP], and touch [Add] to display the Input Destination Address screen.

Touch [Register Name] and display the screen for input. Repeat thisoperation for [Search Character], [Host Address], [File Path], [LoginName] and [Password]. Touch [Anonymous] to log in asanonymous.The port number is assigned automatically.Select proxy by touching [On] or [Off].Set Daily Use by touching [On] or [Off].









– To change the FTP destination address:

Touch [FTP].


Select the changing item from [Register Name], [Search Character],[Host Address], [File Path], [Login Name] and [Password], andchange it in the input screen.Select proxy by touching [On] or [Off].Set Daily Use by touching [On] or [Off].









– To delete the FTP destination address:

Touch [FTP].Touch the search key, [Other], [Common], or the arrow keys [+] and[,] to display the Register Name to be deleted, and touch tohighlight it.Touch [Delete]. The Delete Confirmation popup screen will be










6 Add, change or delete the SMB destination address.

– To add the SMB destination address:

Touch [SMB], and touch [Add] to display the Input Destination Address screen.

Touch [Register Name] and display the screen for input. Repeat thisoperation for [Search Character], [Host Address], [File Path], [LoginName] and [Password].Set Daily Use by touching [On] or [Off].









– To change the SMB destination address:

Touch [SMB].

Touch the search key, [Other], [Common], or the arrow keys[+] and[,] to display the Register Name to be changed, and touch tohighlight it.Touch [Change] to display the Input Destination Address screen.

Select the changing item from [Register Name], [Search Character],[Host Address], [File Path], [Login Name] and [Password], andchange it in the input screen.Set Daily Use by touching [On] or [Off].









– To delete the SMB destination address

Touch [SMB].Touch the search key, [Other], [Common], or the arrow keys [+] and[,] to display the Register Name to be deleted, and touch tohighlight it.Touch [Delete]. The Delete Confirmation popup screen will be



7 Add, change or delete Group.

– To add Group

Touch [Group], and touch [Add] to display the Register/ EditDestination Address screen.








Touch [Group Name], input the group name on the input screen,and then touch [OK].Touch [E-Mail] to display the E-Mail Destination List screen. Touchthe search key, [Other], [Common], or the arrow keys [+] and [,] todisplay the Register Name to be changed, and touch to highlight it.More than one can be selected at a time.

Repeat this operation for [HDD], [FTP], and [SMB]. Multipleselection of [HDD], [FTP], or [SMB] is not permitted for a singlegroup.Touch [List] to view the e-mail address, HDD, FTP, and SMB whichhave been selected. Touch [OK] to return to the Destination List

screen.









– To change Group

Touch [Group].

Touch the arrow keys [+] and [,] to display the Register Name tobe changed, and touch to highlight it.Touch [Change] to display the Destination List screen.Touch [E-Mail], [HDD], [FTP], or [SMB] to select the item to modify,

and make appropriated changes on the relevant screen.Touch [List] to view the e-mail address, HDD, FTP, and SMB whichhave been selected. Touch [OK] to return to the Destination Listscreen.









– To delete Group

Touch [Group].Touch the arrow keys [+] and [,] to display the Register Name tobe deleted, and touch to highlight it.Touch [Delete]. The Delete Confirmation popup screen will be


8 Touch [Return] to restore the Scan Send Address Menu screen.









02 E-Mail Title Setting

Up to 5 e-mail titles can be registered, which can be used to transmitscanned data by e-mail.


2 Touch [01 Scanner Send Address], and then [02 E-Mail Title Setting].

The E-Mail Title Setting screen will be displayed.

3 Input the E-Mail title.

– Touch an appropriate key by selecting from [1] to [5] to display thescreen to input appropriate titles, and then touch [OK].










In either case, the Scan Send Address Menu screen will be restored.









03 E-Mail Text Setting


2 Touch [01 Scanner Send Address], and then [03 E-Mail Text Setting].

3 Input the E-Mail text.

– Touch an appropriate key by selecting from [1] to [5] to display thescreen to input appropriate body text, and then touch [OK].



In either case, the Scan Send Address Menu screen will be restored.









17.5 04 User Auth./Account Track

Use this function to select any function of User Authentication and Section Authentication settings can be altered according to the user authenticationand account track settings.

01 Authentication MethodEstablish the authentication settings by combining the following sevenelements.

- User Authentication

On (External Serv.) / On (MFP) / Off

- Public User

Permission / Prohibition- Account Track

Manage / Not Manage(Account Track cannot be selected when the User Authentication is set

to [On (External Serv.)].)- Account Track Auth. Method

Account + Password/ Password(Account Track Auth. Method cannot be selected when the AccountTrack is set to [Not Manage].)

- User/Section Auth. Connect

When User Authentication is set to [On (MFP)] and Account Track is set

to [Manage] and User/Section Auth. Connect is set to [Connected],Section Authentication is not required to enter.

- User Distribute Number

Enter the number of user authentication. The total number of

authentication to be distributed is 1,000 for both a user and a section.The remaining number from which the number of users is subtractedfrom 1,000 will be distributed as section authentication.

- Upper Limit Achieve Movement

Select the machine condition in which the machine stops due to reachingthe upper limit.[Immediately]: The job is immediately suspended as soon as the upperlimit is reached. In this case, copying conditions, output data, andscanned data will not be hold.

[After Print]: The machine stops after completing the job as reaching the

upper limit. The next job cannot be executed.[Warning Only]: The message "Copy limit reached" is displayed asreaching the upper limit, and the next job can be continuously executed.

!DetailIt is recommended to distribute authentication for both the user and the

section, otherwise either party cannot be assigned authentication if it is

distributed to only one party.









2 Touch [04 User Auth./Account Track], and then [01 AuthenticationMethod].

The Authentication Method Setting screen will be displayed.

3 Select the desired key on the right side of "User Authentication","Public User", "Account Track", "Account Track Auth. Method", and

"User/Section Auth. Connect".

4 Touch [User Distribute Number] to display the touch panel keypad.

– Enter the number to distribute using the keypad or the arrow keys[+] and [,], then touch [OK].








5 Touch [Next], and then select the desired key on the right side of"Upper Limit Achieve Movement".



In either case, the User Auth./Account Track Menu screen will berestored.









02 User Authentication Set \ 01 Management Setting

If authentication mode is enabled, [List] can be displayed on the User Authentication Setting screen and the User Registration screen.

When [List] is touched, user names/section names registered in the unit willbe displayed, so you can set a user name/section name simply by selecting

from the list.

Also, the functions available and output quantity to authenticated users canbe limited.


2 Touch [04 User Auth./Account Track], [02 User Authentication Set], and

then [01 Management Setting].

The Management Setting screen will be displayed.








3 Touch [Display] or [Not Display] on the right side of the "User NameList".

4 Touch [Initial-setting restrictions] to display the Initial Limit Setting

screen.

– Touch an appropriate key to specify the copy functions which youwant to make available to the user after authentication.

– Selecting [Individual] in the "Management System" enables the

upper limit to be separately specified for color output and blackoutput. Touch [Upper] to display the keypad which can be used toenter the upper limit.

– Touch [OK] to complete the setting.

– To cancel the change, touch [Cancel].– In either case, the Management Setting screen will be restored.










In either case, the User Authentication Setting screen will be restored.









02 User Authentication Set \ 02 User Register

Use this function to assign a number to each user, and set a user name,password and limit value to each number etc. The registered user setting is

listed on the screen. Select the user setting from the list and change or deletethe setting.


2 Touch [04 User Auth./Account Track], [02 User Authentication Set], and

then [02 User Register].

The User Registration screen will be displayed.








3 Follow the instructions below for adding, changing and deleting theuser setting.

– To change user settings:

Touch [Next] or [Previous] to display the user name to be changedand touch to highlight it.

Touch [Change] to display the Change Registered User screen.

Touch [User Name] to display the input screen. Enter the user name

and touch [OK]. You may enter 64 letters for the user name. For thedetails on entering texts in the input screen, see "26 Appendix".

Touch [Password] to display the input screen. Enter the passwordand touch [OK]. You may enter 64 digits for the password. For thedetails on entering texts in the input screen, see "26 Appendix".

Touch [Belong Section] to display the screen to select a sectionbelong to.








Touch [Next] or [Previous] to display the desired section name,touch to highlight it, then touch [OK].

Touch [Color] or [Black] in the "Output Permission" to select thetype of printing operation made available to the user.

Touch [Upper Limit Set] to display the Upper Limit Setting screen.

Touch an appropriate key to specify the copy functions which you

want to make available to the user after authentication.Selecting [Individual] in the "Management System" enables theupper limit to be separately specified for color output and blackoutput. Touch [Upper] to display the keypad which can be used toenter the upper limit.

Touch [Copy], [Scanner], or [Printer] in the "Useable Function" tospecify the functions made available to the user.








Touch [From Address] to display the screen for entering the Fromaddress. Select an appropriate address or register a new address,and then touch [OK].Touch [OK] to complete the setting.

– To add user settings:

Touch [Add] to display the Add Registered User screen.

Touch [User No.] to display the input screen. Enter the user numberand touch [OK]. You may enter four digits for the section number.

Touch [User Name] to display the input screen. Enter the user nameand touch [OK]. You may enter eight letters for the section name.For the details on entering texts in the input screen, see

"26 Appendix".

Touch [Password] to display the input screen. Enter the passwordand touch [OK]. You may enter eight digits for the password. Forthe details on entering texts in the input screen, see "26 Appendix".

Touch [Belong Section] to display the screen to select a section

belong to.

Touch [Next] or [Previous] to display the desired section name,touch to highlight it, then touch [OK].

Touch [Color] or [Black] in the "Output Permission" to select thetype of printing operation made available to the user.









Touch an appropriate key to specify the copy functions which youwant to make available to the user after authentication.Selecting [Individual] in the "Management System" enables theupper limit to be separately specified for color output and blackoutput. Touch [Upper] to display the keypad which can be used to

enter the upper limit.

Touch [Copy], [Scanner], or [Printer] in the "Useable Function" tospecify the functions made available to the user.

Touch [From Address] to display the screen for entering the Fromaddress. Select an appropriate address or register a new address,and then touch [OK].

Touch [OK] to complete the setting.








– To delete user settings:

Touch [Next] or [Previous] to display the user name to be deleted

and touch to highlight it.Touch [Delete] to display the Delete Confirmation popup menu.Touch [Yes] to delete, or touch [No] to cancel.








– To change uniformly output permission, upper limit set and

useable function:

Touch [Package change] to display the Reset Confirmation popupscreen.Touch [Color] or [Black] in the "Output Permission" to select thetype of printing operation made available to all users.


Touch an appropriate key to specify the copy functions which youwant to make available to all users after authentication.

Selecting [Individual] in the "Management System" enables theupper limit to be separately specified for color output and blackoutput. Touch [Upper] to display the keypad which can be used toenter the upper limit.

Touch [Copy], [Scanner], or [Printer] in the "Useable Function" tospecify the functions made available to all users.Touch [OK] to complete the setting.








4 Touch [Return] to restore the Machine Administrator Setting Menuscreen.









02 User Authentication Set \ 03 User Counter

Reset individual counters for copying, scanning, and printing, forauthenticated users and public users, or reset these counters collectively.


2 Touch [04 User Auth./Account Track], [02 User Authentication Set], andthen [03 User Counter].

The User Counter List screen will be displayed.








3 Follow the instructions below to reset the counter.

– To reset counter individually:

Touch [Next] or [Previous] to display the user name to reset thecounter and touch to highlight it.Touch [Public] to reset the counter of the public user.The Counter List screen will be displayed.

Touch [Delete] to display the Delete Confirmation popup menu.Touch [Yes] to delete, or touch [No] to cancel.Touch [Yes] to display the screen to select the count to reset. Touch

an appropriate key.Touch [Return] to restore the User Counter List screen.








– To reset user counter uniformly:

Touch [Clear (Package)] to display the All Reset CounterConfirmation popup menu.Touch [Yes] to reset, or touch [No] to cancel.

4 Touch [Return] to restore the User Authentication Setting Menu screen.









03 Account Track \ 01 Account Register

Use this function to assign a number to each section, and set a sectionname, password and limit value to each number.

The registered section management setting is listed on the screen. Select thesection management setting from the list and change or delete the setting.


2 Touch [04 User Auth./Account Track], [03 Account Track], and then

[01 Account Register].

The Registered Section screen will be displayed.








3 Follow the instructions below for adding, changing and deleting thesection management setting.

– To change registered section settings:

Touch [Change] to display the Change Registered Section screen.Touch [Section Name] to display the input screen. Enter the sectionname and touch [OK]. You may enter eight letters for the section

name. For the details on entering texts in the input screen, see"How to input characters" on page 26-3.

Touch [Password] to display the input screen. Enter the passwordand touch [OK]. You may enter eight digits for the password. Forthe details on entering texts in the input screen, see "How to input

characters" on page 26-3.

Touch [Name] to display the input screen. Enter the section nameand touch [OK]. You may enter twenty letters for the section name.For the details on entering texts in the input screen, see "How toinput characters" on page 26-3.








Touch [Color] or [Black] in the "Output Permission" to select thetype of printing operation made available to the account.


Touch an appropriate key to specify the copy functions which youwant to make available to the account after authentication.


Touch [Copy], [Scanner], or [Printer] in the "Useable Function" tospecify the functions made available to the account.









– To add section settings:

Touch [Add] to display the Add Registered Section screen.

Touch [Section No.] to display the input screen. Enter the sectionnumber and touch [OK]. You may enter four digits for the sectionnumber.

Touch [Section Name] to display the input screen. Enter the sectionname and touch [OK]. You may enter eight letters for the section

name. For the details on entering texts in the input screen, see"How to input characters" on page 26-3.

Touch [Password] to display the input screen. Enter the passwordand touch [OK]. You may enter eight digits for the password. Forthe details on entering texts in the input screen, see "How to input

characters" on page 26-3.Touch [Name] to display the input screen. Enter the section nameand touch [OK]. You may enter twenty letters for the section name.








For the details on entering texts in the input screen, see "How toinput characters" on page 26-3.

Touch [Color] or [Black] in the "Output Permission" to select thetype of printing operation made available to the account.


Touch an appropriate key to specify the copy functions which youwant to make available to the account after authentication.Selecting [Individual] in the "Management System" enables theupper limit to be separately specified for color output and blackoutput. Touch [Upper] to display the keypad which can be used to

enter the upper limit.

Touch [Copy], [Scanner], or [Printer] in the "Useable Function" to

specify the functions made available to the account.









– To delete registered section settings:

Touch [Next] or [Previous] to display the section name to be deletedand touch to highlight it.Touch [Delete] to display the Delete Confirmation popup menu.

Touch [Yes] to delete, or touch [No] to cancel.








– To change uniformly output permission, upper limit set and

useable function:

Touch [Package change] to display the Reset Confirmation popupscreen.Touch [Color] or [Black] in the "Output Permission" to select thetype of printing operation made available to all users.


Touch an appropriate key to specify the copy functions which youwant to make available to all users after authentication.


Touch [Copy], [Scanner], or [Printer] in the "Useable Function" to

specify the functions made available to all users.Touch [OK] to complete the setting.








4 Touch [Return] to restore the Machine Administrator Setting Menuscreen.









03 Account Track \ 02 Account Counter

Reset individual counters for copying, scanning, and printing, forauthenticated accounts and public users, or reset these counters

collectively.

1Follow the procedure on page 17-4 to display the Machine


2 Touch [04 User Auth./Account Track], [03 Account Track], and then [02 Account Counter].

The Section Counter List screen will be displayed.








3 Follow the instruction below to reset the counter.

– To reset counter individually:

Touch [Delete] to display the Delete Confirmation popup menu.Touch [Yes] to delete, or touch [No] to cancel.Touch [Yes] to display the screen to select the count to reset. Touchan appropriate key.

Touch [Return] to restore the User Counter List screen.








Touch [Clear (Package)] to display the All Reset CounterConfirmation popup menu.Touch [Yes] to reset, or touch [No] to cancel.

4 Touch [Return] to restore the Account Track Setting Menu screen.









04 Without Authentication

Specify whether to make printing and pull scanning available without userauthentication or account track.


2 Touch [04 User Auth./Account Track], and then [04 Without Authentication].

The Without Authentication Setting screen will be displayed.

3 Touch [Permission] or [Prohibition] separately under "Print" and the"Pull Scan".










In either case, the User Auth./Account Track Setting screen will berestored.









17.6 05 Network Setting

01 Machine NIC Setting

Control the NIC settings such as the IP address and line speed of themachine.


2 Touch [05 Network Setting], and then [01 Machine NIC Setting].

The Machine NIC Setting screen will be displayed.








3 Specify the following items.

– Enter numeric values using the touch panel keypad. After enteringa value, touch Set. The next item becomes highlighted for setting.Continue in this manner.IP Address: Enter the IP address of the machine.Subnet Mask: Enter the subnet mask.

Gateway Address: Enter the gateway address.Line Speed Setting: Specify the line speed of the network. Choosefrom the options provided.



In either case, the Network Setting Menu screen will be restored.









02 E-Mail Initial Setting

Specify the initial settings for e-mail.


2 Touch [05 Network Setting], and then [02 E-Mail Initial Setting].

The E-Mail Initial Setting screen will be displayed.

3 Specify the following items.

– Enter numeric values using the touch panel keypad. After entering

a value, touch Set. The next item becomes highlighted for setting.Continue in this manner.










In either case, the Network Setting Menu screen will be restored.









17.7 06 Common Setting


2

NoteThis setting is equivalent to the setting specified in [03 Common Setting]

in the User Setting.


1SHOT indication time Select the SHOT indication time to be dis-played in the message area of the touchpanel, such as "Original size A4".

3 seconds/5 seconds

Job Offset Mode Set the machine to offset the copies/print-outs of different jobs.

On/Off

Continuation print Set the machine to output multiple reserve jobs in succession. Copy on/Copyoff/Printer on/Printeroff

STOP Key Function Specify whether to pause or abort a jobwhen [Stop] is pressed on the control pan-el.

Job Temp. Stop/JobStop Function

Side 2 Lens Adjustmentmode

Specify whether to enable the lens adjust-ment mode.

On/Off

Tray Change Time When selecting the tray which sets differ-ent paper type, specify the time when it be-comes the copy possible.

Short/Standard

Priority Paper Type Select whether to maintain the temperature

which is suited for the coated paper byturning the fixing unit roller.

Others/Coated Paper

Un-compressing mode Specify when storing to HDD is not com-pleted with memory overflow.

Off/On









2 Touch [06 Common Setting].

The Common Setting screen will be displayed.

!Detail

The following operation is equivalent to selecting [User Setting \ 03Common Setting]. Please refer to page 16-43 for more information.








17.8 07 Copy Setting


2

NoteThis setting is equivalent to the setting specified in [04 Copy Setting] in

the User Setting.


Fold & Staple auto select Set the machine to automatically select theBooklet mode when Stapling & Foldingmode is selected.

Yes/No

Fine Adjust Margin Select On/Off to enter a decimal point forimage shift.

Yes/No

Orig. Glass Auto Size Se-lect Set the machine to automatically select thesame size of copy paper as the originalplaced on the original glass.

On/Off

Auto Detect Orig. Size in ADF

Set the machine to automatically select thesame size of copy paper as the originalplaced on the ADF.

On/Off

Original Glass AMS Set the machine to detect the size of theoriginal and select the appropriate magnifi-cation ratio to correspond to the selectedpaper size.

On/Off

ADF AMS Set the machine to automatically select anappropriate ratio for copying when detect-ing the original size placed on the ADF.

On/Off

Non-Image Area Erase oforig

Specify the conditions to be applied to[Non-Image Area Erase of orig].

Yes/ APS/AMS /Ex-cept Orig. Glass (1:1)

ADF Frame Erase Set to erase the frame when copying in ADF mode.

None/1mm/2mm/3mm/4mm/5mm

Rotation When the trays contain only the paper sizedifferent from the original, rotate the imageof the original and adjust to fit into the cop-ying paper size.

On-Always /APS/AMS /APS/AMS /Reduce

Suspend Interruption Set the timing to interrupt the present jobwhen pressing [Interrupt] while copying.

Stop Immediate-ly/When CurrentComp.

Change Page Print Pos(Booklet)

Set the page number position when usingBooklet with Page Numbering in Stamp.

Off/On (Outside Print)

Printer Prohibit Timer Select the interval time that printing via PCis prohibited after touching the touch keys.

Off/15 seconds/30seconds/60 sec-onds/90 seconds

Bookmark function Specify whether to delete the set book-mark or not, or select to disable the book-mark function.

Off/Release EveryJob/Not release








Orig./Out Bind DirectionSet

Set the machine to conform the binding di-rection of the originals and printed setseach other.

On/Off

Choose Default Traywhen APS Off

Select the tray to be automatically selectedwhen APS is released.

APSTray/Tray1/Tray2/Tray

3/Tray4/Tray5

Scan prohibit (pull outtray)

Set to stop scanning when pulling out thetray.

On/Off










2 Touch [07 Copy Setting].

The Copy Setting screen will be displayed.

!Detail

The following operation is equivalent to selecting [User Setting \ 04 CopySetting]. Please refer to page 16-45 for more information.








17.9 08 Scan Setting


2

NoteThis setting is equivalent to the setting specified in [05 Scan Setting] in

the User Setting.


File Form Default E-Mail Select the default file form when transmit-ting in E-Mail.


File Form Default FTP Select the default file form when transmit-ting to FTP.


File Form Default SMB Select the default file form when transmit-ting in SMB.


Default Address Select the default destination to be dis-played when selecting the Scanner screen.

E-Mail/HDD/FTP/SMB/ QUEUE

Compress MethodColor/Gray

Select the default destination to be dis-played when selecting the Scanner screen.

High Com-press/Standard/LowCompress









2 Touch [08 Scan Setting].

The Scan Setting screen will be displayed.

!Detail

The following operation is equivalent to selecting [User Setting \ 05 ScanSetting]. Please refer to page 16-48 for more information.








17.10 09 System Connection

01 Administrator

Use this function to call your service representative for maintenance. Yourservice representative is monitoring the machine status as needed basis. The

monitored information will be useful for maintenance.


2 Touch [09 System Connection], and then [01 Administrator].

The Administrator Call screen will be displayed.

3 Touch [Start].








4 Touch [Return] to restore the System Connection Menu screen.









17.11 10 Security Setting

01 Administrator Password

Set the new machine administrator password.


2 Touch [10 Security Setting], and then [01 Administrator Password].

The Administrator Password Input screen will be displayed.








3 Enter the new password.



In either case, the Security Setting Menu screen will be restored.









02 HDD Lock Password

Change the HDD lock password.

The HDD Lock Password cannot be changed unless the Security Strengthenmode is set to On.


2 Touch [10 Security Setting], and then [02 Change HDD LockPassword].

The Change HDD Lock Password Menu screen will be displayed.

3 Touch [Current Password] to display the Password Input screen. Enterthe current password and touch [OK].








4 Touch [New Password] to display the Password Input screen. Enter thenew password and touch [OK].

– Touch [Check Input] to enter the same new password, then touch[OK].












03 Overwrite image data

Specify whether to overwrite image data.


2 Touch [10 Security Setting], and then [01 Administrator Password].

The Overwrite screen will be displayed.

3 Touch [Yes] or [No].












04 Security Strengthen Set

Set the Security Strengthen mode On/Off.

In order to set the Security Strengthen mode to On, it is required by yourservice representative to set a CE password and a machine administratorpassword to your machine.


2 Touch [10 Security Setting], and then [04 Security Strengthen Set].

The Security Strengthen Setting screen will be displayed.

3 Touch [On] when activating this mode, or touch [Off] when deactivatingthis mode.








4 Touch [OK] at the lower right side of the screen to display theConfirmation popup screen.

5 Touch [Yes] to complete the setting. The machine power will be turnedoff, then on.

– Touch [No] to cancel the setting. Touch [Cancel] at the lower right

side of the screen to restore the Machine Administrator SettingMenu screen.






18Touch Screen

adjustment






Touch Screen adjustment 18



Use this function to check the touch screen and realign the position of the

touch sensor that may have shifted.

2

NoteThe Touch Screen Adjustment screen can be accessed also by pressing

[4] of the control panel keypad with the Utility menu screen displayed.

Service can set the machine to forbid users to access this function from

the menu and to display the Touch Screen Adjustment screen only when

pressing [4] with the Utility menu screen displayed. Contact your service

representative for details.



2 Touch [04 Touch Screen Adjustment].

The Touch Screen Adjustment screen will be displayed.








3 Touch the "+" symbol at the upper right corner, then lower left corneron the screen.

The present coordinates will be displayed in the message area of thescreen.

4 Check that the X coordinate and Y coordinate displayed in the first line

of the message area fall within the standard value displayed in thesecond line.

– If the coordinates fall out of the range of the standard value, repeatthe adjustment procedure or contact your service representative.

5 Touch each Check Button at the upper left and lower right corners onthe screen to check if the buzzer tone functions normally.

– If the buzzer tone does not sound, repeat the adjustment procedureor contact your service representative.

6 Press [0] on the control panel keypad to complete the setting.

– To cancel the change, press [1] on the control panel keypad.

In either case, the Utility menu screen will be restored.






19Web Utilities setting






Web Utilities setting 19



19.1 Web Utilities outlines

When the machine is connected with a PC over a network, the web browseractivated on the PC provides the following functions.- Volume Track Setting

Make the account track settings concerning the administrator setting

using the web browser on a PC.- Remote Panel Setting

Make the remote panel settings to control using the web browser on aPC.

- Scan transmission settingRegister the address for the transmission of the scanned image data

concerning the administrator using the web browser. (Available when themachine is mounted with the optional printer controller.)

- Setting Data Import/ExportTransmit the setting data from the machine to a PC (export) using the webbrowser, then return the data to the machine (import).

Prerequisites:- Browser: Internet Explorer 6.02 / Netscape Navigator 7.1 / FireFox1.0 or

later

- Contact your network manager for details on the network system, the IPaddress or host name of the machine.

- The user name "admin" (for accessing to the Administrator Setting Menu)cannot be changed.Enter the administrator password previously specified on the machine.12345678 is initially applied.Once entered, the user name and password are not necessary to be re-entered unless the web browser is restarted.

2

NoteTo clear the text boxes, click on [Reset].

To cancel adding a new account track data, click on [Back] or any

Administrator Setting menu item to jump to the desired window.








Follow the procedure below to access the Web Utilities of the machine usingthe web browser.

1 Turn on the power to the PC connected with the machine over anetwork.

2 Activate the web browser, then select [Open] from the File menu.

3 Enter the URL (http:// [IP address or host name of the machine]), then

click on [OK].

The Main Page of the Web Utilities will be displayed.

2

NoteThe Web Utilities window is subject to change without notice.








19.2 Setting account track data

Make the account track settings concerning the administrator setting usingthe web browser on a PC.- Adding Account Track

Add a new account track data (password, name, and limit value).

- Editing Account Track DataChange or delete the account track data (password, section name, or

limit value, or reset the counters).

2

ReminderThe volume track setting is available only when the machine is under thefollowing conditions.The User Distribute Number is assigned "0".

Account Track is set "Manage".User authentication data is not yet registered.

19.2.1 Adding account track

1 Open the Web Utilities window.

2 Click on [Machine Manager Setting].

The Enter Network Password dialogue box will be displayed.








3 Enter "admin" in the User Name text box, and an 8-digit administratorin the password text box, then click on [OK].

The Machine Manager Setting menu will be displayed.

4 Click on [Volume Track setting].

The Volume Track Setting menu will be displayed.

5 Click on [Volume Track data add].

The Volume Track Data Add window will be displayed.








6 Enter a new account track data.

– Section Name (Account Name): Up to 8 characters– Password: Up to 8 characters– Name: Up to 20 characters– Upper Limit Setting:

Color Up to 99999999

Black Up to 99999999 Only effect Individual Management– Management System: Total Management/ Individual Management– Output Permission: Prohibit Color/ Prohibit Black– Useable Function: Prohibit Copy/ Prohibit Scanner/ Prohibit print








7 Click on [Registration].

The registered content will be displayed in the window.

The new account track data will be transmitted to the machineimmediately so that is valid for the user operations.

8 Click on [Back] to return to the Volume Track Setting menu or any menuitem to jump to the desired window.








2

Note A duplicate password or name will be rejected with an error message.

However, duplicating a password is possible using the administrator

setting.

The Section Name (Account Name) entry box accepts letters, numbers.

Any symbols will be rejected with an error message displayed in the

window.

Max. 1,000 account entries can be registered. An error message will be

displayed if the above limit is exceeded.

An error message may be displayed when the data entry has not been

completed due to the machine operation in progress. Please click on

[Apply] while the machine is in an idle state.

2

NoteTo clear the text boxes, click on [Reset].

To cancel adding a new account track data, click on [Back] or any Ad-

ministrator Setting menu item to jump to the desired window.








19.2.2 Editing account track data




3 Enter "admin" in the User Name text box, and an 8-digit administratorpassword in the password text box, then click on [OK].









4 Click on [Volume Track setting].

The Volume Track Setting menu will be displayed.

5 Click on [Volume Track data list].

The Volume Track Data List will be displayed.








6 Change the Volume Track Data.

– Click on the number of the data to be edited.

The Volume Track Data Change window will be displayed.








– Change the Section Name (account name), Password, Name,Upper Limit Setting, Management System, Output Permission, orUseable Function, as desired. For details in entering procedure,refer to page 8-6.

– Click on [Registration].

The edited content will be displayed in the window.The edited data will be transmitted to the machine immediately sothat is valid for the user operations.

– Click on [Back] to return to the Volume Track Data List window.








7 Reset Counter.

– Click on the check box(es) to select the account track data of thecounter to be cleared. If all the counters are to be cleared, click on[Select All].

– Click on the radio button (a white circle) heading the "Copy/PrinterCount reset." or "Scan Count reset."

– Click on [Apply].

The Counter Reset Confirmation window will be displayed.








– Click on [Apply] to immediately reset the counters to zero.

The message "Setting was changed" will be displayed.– Click on [Back] to return to the Account Track Data List or any menu

item to jump to the desired window.








8 Delete Counter.

– Click on the check box(es) to select the account track data to bedeleted. If all the data are to be cleared, click on [Select All].

– Click on the radio button (a white circle) heading the "Delete(Except for Another user count)".

– Click on [Apply].

The Delete Confirmation window will be displayed.– Click on [Apply] to immediately delete the data.








The message "Setting was deleted" will be displayed.

– Click on [Back] to return to the Volume Track Data List or any menuitem to jump to the desired window.

9 Save Counter.

– Click on [Save this table as a file].








– Click on [Save].








– In the dialogue box, designate the folder for saving the data, thenclick on [Save].

2

NoteThe account track data will be stored in CSV format.

The data cannot be saved while the machine is in operation. In this case,

try this procedure again after the machine starts idling. Click on [Back] in

the browser window to return to the Account Track Data List for starting

over.








Example: Account track data list stored as a file

The "Public User" will be stored by the name of "PUBLIC" in the last line.








19.3 Remote panel setting

When the machine is connected with a PC over a network, the web browseractivated on the PC enables you to operate the machine.Specify the IP address of the PC to be used for Remote Panel function, usingWeb Utilities setting on a PC.

Remote Panel functions:- Touch panel screens can be displayed on the web browser and operated

using a mouse.- Control panel keys can be displayed on the web browser and operated

using a mouse.

- Passwords can be entered using PC keyboard.

Prerequisites:

- JavaScript must be active.- The machine should be connected with a PC over a network with TCP/IP

enabled.

- Set the Enhance Security mode OFF on the machine.












The Administrator Setting menu will be displayed.

4 Click on [Remote Panel setting].

The Remote Panel Setting menu will be displayed.

5 Specify the IP address of the PC to be used for Remote Panel function.Max. 3 IP addresses can be specified.








6 Click on [Registration].The IP address will be applied to the machine immediately so that isvalid for the user operations.

7 Click on [Administrator Setup Menu] to restore the AdministratorSetting menu.








19.4 Setting scan transmission function

Follow the procedure below to register, change, or delete the address for thetransmission of the scanned image data using the web browser. For detailsof the Scan Transmission Setting, contact your service representative.

The Scan Transmission Setting is available in the following condition:

- Using Scan Transmission Setting in the administrator setting, you cannotnewly register an E-mail/HDD/FTP/SMB address or group the entries.

- The [Scan transmission setting] key appears in the Scan TransmissionSetting window only when the optional Image Controller is installed in themachine.

- Click on the DAILY USE check box in the E-mail Registration table, if thedata is frequently used.

- The symbols that cannot be displayed in the entry box will be ignored, ifentered.

- The HDD Box No. will be registered as a 9-digit number.

For example, entering [1] will be registered as [000000001].












The Administrator Setting menu will be displayed.

4 Click on [Scan transmission setting].

The Scan Transmission Setting window will be displayed.








5 Register the E-Mail, HDD, FTP, and SMB, as required.








6 Click on [Registration] to complete the entry.The registered content will be displayed.

Click on [Back] to return to the Scan Transmission Setting window.

7 Display the Entry List.Click on [Entry List] of the desired item under the entry box to displaythe Entry List.









8 Change the registered contents.Display the Entry List of the desired item as described in step 7.

Click on the entry name to be changed.The window for changing the selected item will be displayed.Change the contents as desired, then click on [Registration].

The registered content will be displayed.









9 Delete the registered contents.Display the Entry List of the desired item as described in step 7.

Click on the check box in the Delete column of the item to be deleted,then click on [Delete]. If all the data are to be cleared, click on [Select

All].

The window for deleting the selected item will be displayed.Confirm the registered name to be deleted, then click on [Yes].

Click on [Back] to return to the Entry List window.Click on [Back] to return to the Scan Transmission Setting window.








19.5 Transmitting machine setting file

Follow the procedure below to transmit the following setting file from themachine to a PC (export) using the web browser, edit the setting data on thePC, then return the file to the machine (import).

Account track data (max. 1,000 files)

Two Paper Setting data

- Custom size data (max. 20 files)- Paper information data (max. 60 files)

Four Scan Transmission Setting data (max. 500 files in total)- E-mail data (E-Mail address)

- HDD (Box No.)

- FTP (FTP server address)- SMB (shared folder)

Prerequisites:

- The machine setting file can be stored in a PC so that it may be returnedto the machine at any time, and is available for common use if you havetwo or more machines.

- The file transmitted to a PC, being converted to a file type for batch

processing, can be edited efficiently and returned to the machine.- The file transmitted to a PC normally contains the four data types

mentioned above, however, each data type can be made into a file andtransmitted separately.

- Scan Transmission Setting data can be transferred if the machine ismounted with the optional printer controller.

!DetailThe exported setting file of this machine can be imported to another

model, and vice versa. For details, contact your service representative.

The file name is automatically assigned as described below. Select the

data to be exported, changing the name if desired.

vt_tab.txt (Account Track data)

paper_setting.txt (Paper Setting data)

ip_email.txt (E-mail data of Scan Transmission Setting data)

ip_hdd.txt (HDD data of Scan Transmission Setting data) ip_ftp.txt (FTP data of Scan Transmission Setting data)

ip_smb.txt (SMB data of Scan Transmission Setting data)













4 Click on [Setting data Import/Export].

The Setting Data Import/Export window will be displayed.








5 Export the machine setting file.Select the desired file type from the pull-down menu, then click on[Export….]

The File Download dialogue box will be displayed.Click on [Save].








In the dialogue box, designate the folder for saving the machine settingfile, then click on [Save].

A dialogue box will be displayed when the saving operation is

completed.

Click on [Close].

6 Edit the machine setting file.The machine setting file transmitted to a PC is a TAB separated text file

which can be edited using an application software such as Text Editoror Table Editor. A new setting file can also be created according to thespecifications for each file type. See page 19-36 for details.








7 Import the machine setting file.Click on [Browse…] to designate the machine setting file to beimported, then click on [Import].

The result message will be displayed when the registration iscompleted.

2

NoteThe file cannot be accessed when the machine is operating. If an error

message is displayed, try again to save the file after the current machine

operation is completed.








2

NoteIf the registration cannot be completed successfully, error messages will

be displayed as follows.

Can’t transfer data (The machine is busy) Try again to import the data after the machine operation in progress is

completed.

The data cannot be recognized

Confirm that the data is the machine setting file.

Data size is too large

Confirm that the data is the machine setting file.

Check if the file size exceeds 100,000 bytes.

The data cannot be registered Check if inappropriate description is made in the machine setting file.

Check if the file entries are already over the limit.

To Edit the Machine Setting File

- Save the file as a text.- Begin the file with a specified tag. (ex. #EKC_TAB)

- A line should be 300 bytes or less.

- The file size should be 100,000 bytes or less.- The line that begins with "#" is a comment.

ex. Machine setting file of an account track data








Specifications for each machine setting file type

Account track data setting file:- Begin the file with #EKC_TAB.

- Max. 1,000 files can be edited.- A line should include PASSWORD, NAME, and LIMIT, separated by a tab.- Use up to 8 digits numbers (0 - 9) and alphabets only to specify

PASSWORD.

- Use numbers and alphabets only to specify NAME.- Use up to 8 digits numbers (0 - 9) only to specify LIMIT (0 – 99,999,999).

E-mail data setting file:- Begin the file with #IP_EMAIL.

- A line should include NAME, ADDRESS, REFERENCE, and DAILY,separated by a tab.

- NAME should be 24 bytes or less.

- ADDRESS should be 250 bytes or less.

- REFERENCE should be 250 bytes or less.- Mark DAILY USE with "1" or DAILY NOT USE with "0" in each column.

HDD data setting file:- Begin the file name with #IP_HDD.

- A line should include NAME, NUMBER, REFERENCE, or DAILY,separated by a tab.


- Use up to 9 digits numbers (0 - 9) only to specify a NUMBER.


FTP data setting file:- Begin the file name with #IP_FTP.

- A line should include NAME, ADDRESS, PORT, FILEPATH, LOGINNAME,PASSWORD, REFERENCE, or DAILY being separated by a tab.


- ADDRESS should be 63 bytes or less.

- Use up to 5 digits numbers (0 - 9) only to specify PORT (1 – 65,535).

- FILEPATH should be 96 bytes or less.- LOGINNAME should be 47 bytes or less.

- PASSWORD should be 24 bytes or less.









SMB data setting file:

- Begin the file name with #IP_SMB.- A line should include NAME, ADDRESS, FILEPATH, LOGINNAME,

PASSWORD, REFERENCE, or DAILY being separated by a tab.

- NAME should be 24 bytes or less.- ADDRESS should be 63 bytes or less.

- FILEPATH should be 96 bytes or less.- LOGINNAME should be 47 bytes or less.- PASSWORD should be 14 bytes or less.

- REFERENCE should be 24 bytes or less.

- Mark DAILY USE with "1" or DAILY NOT USE with "0" in each column.






20Security functions






Security functions 20



The Control Software version is as follows.

Image control program (Image Control l1) version: A03U0Y0-00I1-G00-11, A03U0Y0-00l1-G00-12

About the Firmware version display function

The bizhub PRO Control Software (Image control program) version

mentioned above can be confirmed by using the service representative (CE)service mode ROM version display function.

When you display the firmware version, the Image control program versionwill be displayed as follows.

Image control program (Image Control l1) version:G00 + 2 digits following the hyphen (Ex: G00-**)

Please keep this in mind when checking the software version.

Copyright © 2006 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, Inc.








20.1 Security modes

The bizhub PRO C6500 device has two security modes.

Normal mode

Use this mode if the machine is used by a single person and there is a low

possibility of illicit access and operations. This is the default mode whenshipped from the factory.

To use regular mode, please see the user manual for each individualmachine.

Security Strengthen mode

Use this mode if the machine is connected to a local area network, or toexternal networks through a telephone line or other means. A machineadministrator manages the device according to this user manual, so that

users can have a safe operating environment.Your machine administrator is the only one who can turn the SecurityStrengthen mode ON and OFF, and make other changes, and your servicerepresentative will designate an machine administrator.

To turn the Security Strengthen mode ON, the service representative shouldset a CE authentication password and machine administrator password forthe device.Please contact your service representative when using the SecurityStrengthen mode.

Please be sure to use the Security Strengthen mode to prevent data from

being accessed or tampered with.

The Security icon is displayed on the touch panel if the SecurityStrengthen mode is activated.

Environments in which Security Strengthen mode is recommended

- The machine is monitored by a telephone line or a network.






Security functions 20


Creating a secure environment

For security, we recommend that supervisors and a machine administratoruse Security Strengthen mode and establish an environment as follows.

- Qualifications to be a machine administrator A supervisor must select a reliable person who has adequate knowledge,technical ability, and experience as a machine administrator, to whom todelegate administration of the device.

- Guarantee of service representative (CE) A supervisor or a machine administrator can use Security Strengthenmode after confirming that a service contract was signed with the service

representative (CE). Clearly state in the service contract that the servicerepresentative will not engage in any fraudulent actions.

- Secure LANBe sure to connect the machine to the LAN protected by firewall in orderto prevent access from an external network.






21Security strengthen

mode






Security strengthen mode 21



21.1 Description of security strengthen mode

The following items will have enhanced security.

- Machine NIC settingWhile the Security Strengthen mode is activated, available function islimited to CS Remote Care.

- External access prohibitedNo access is allowed over telephone lines other than CS Remote Care.

- Create, save and analyze an audit log A history of security function operations will be created and saved. Dateand time, information identifying the person who made the operation,details of the operation, and results of the operation will be saved,

enabling analysis of unauthorized access. This log will be overwritten ifthe audit area is depleted.

- Machine Administrator authentication A service representative will set up an authentication data for a machineadministrator.The machine administrator must input a password to gain authorizedaccess. Only one authentication string can be registered per machine.

- Machine Administrator Setting mode

If the machine administrator Setting mode has been entered bysuccessful Administrator authentication, the setting change of variousmachine functions will be available on the machine.Be sure to exit the machine administrator Setting mode if you leave infront of the machine while using the machine administrator Setting mode.








21.2 Data protected by security strengthen mode

The data protected by Security Strengthen mode is the document datastored in the machin.

To turn security strengthen mode on/off

The machine administrator can turn Security Strengthen mode ON/OFF.

If Security Strengthen mode is OFF, data can potentially be accessed, so becareful.






22Machine administrator

security functions






Machine administrator security functions 22


22 Machine administrator securityfunctions

The machine administrator turns Security Strengthen mode ON/OFF.

To do so, an 8-digit CE authentication password and Machine Administratorpassword must be set for the machine. Ask your authorized servicerepresentative to set up a Machine Administrator password. To change thispassword, the machine administrator himself should operate the proceduredescribed in chapter "17 Machine administrator setting".

To protect data in the machine from access and tampering, please be sureto designate a machine administrator and use Security Strengthen mode.

2ReminderDo not use your name, birthday, employee number, etc. for a password

that others can easily figure out.

Be careful not to inform anybody else of the password, or not to let it

known to others.








22.1 Turn security strengthen mode on/off

The following is an explanation of how to turn Security Strengthen modeON/OFF.

2

NotePasswords are case sensitive.

If a wrong password or fewer than 8 alphanumerical characters are

entered and the [OK] key is touched, the warning message "Password

does not match" will appear, and no key will work for five seconds. Enter

the right password after five seconds.

If authentication fails, the information will be saved in the audit log.

1 Press [Utility/Counter] on the control panel to display the Utility screen.


The Input Password screen will be displayed.








3 Enter the password.Use the touch screen keypad to enter the 8-digit Machine

Administrator password, then touch [OK].


4 Touch [10 Security Setting].








5 Touch [04 Security Strengthen Set].

6 Turn Security Strengthen mode ON or OFFIf you want to turn Security Strengthen mode ON, touch [On] to

highlight it. If you want to turn it OFF, touch [Off] to highlight it.








7 Touch [OK].

The Restart Confirmation popup screen will appear

8 Touch [Yes].

The machine will restart and the new setting will be activated.








22.2 HDD lock password

While the Security Strengthen mode is turned ON, a lock password (8 to 32alphanumerical characters, case sensitive) can be set up on the HDD toprotect the data stored on it.

If the HDD itself is externally accessed, the data readout will not be available

until the correct lock password is entered.

2

ReminderDo not use your name, birthday, employee number, etc. for a password

that others can easily figure out.

Be careful not to inform anybody else of the password, or not to let it

known to others.

2

NoteThe HDD lock password functions only when the Security Strengthen

mode is ON. When turned OFF, the message "Please set Security

Strengthen mode" will be displayed.

2

NotePasswords are case sensitive.






!Detail

The main body serial number will be printed at the upper right corner ofthe audit log. For details, see the next section "Print audit log" and p. 17

for the sample log.


The current password cannot be used again as a new password.











3 Enter the password.Use the touch screen keypad to enter the 8-digit Machine










4 Touch [10 Security Setting].

5 Touch [02 HDD Lock Password].

The HDD Lock Password Menu screen will be displayed.








6 Touch [Current Password] to enter the password currently used, thentouch [OK].The first password: 13-digit alphanumeric serial number of the mainbody

7 If authentication is succeeded, touch [New Password] to enter the newpassword.The key will not be active until authentication is succeeded.

– Touch [OK] to return to the previous screen.

8 Touch [Check Input] to re-enter the same password as above.

– Touch [OK] to return to the previous screen.

9 Touch [OK].








22.3 Print audit log

An audit log will be automatically created when the data saved in themachine have been accessed.

All the audit log data can be output as follows.

2NotePasswords are case sensitive.






2

NoteTo stop printing, press [Stop] on the control panel, then touch [Cancel] on

the confirmation popup screen.











3 Enter the [password].Use the touch screen keypad to enter the 8-digit Machine



4 Touch [01 System Setting].








5 Touch [06 List/Count].

The Management List Print screen will be displayed.

6 Touch [Audit Log Report], then touch [COPY].









22.4 Analyze audit log

Audit logs need to be analyzed by the Machine Administrator regularly (onceper month) or when unauthorized access and tampering of data saved in themachine in Security Strengthen mode is noticed.

The machine is supposed to store up 750 logs per month.

If more than 750 logs are assumed to be stored in a month, carry out theanalysis in a shorter period before the unanalyzed logs reach that number.








Audit log information

The audit log contains the following information.- date/time: date and time when an operation was made that results in the

creation of a log entry.- id: the person who made the operation or who is subject to security

protection can be specified."-1": Operation by CE (service representative)."-2": Operation by the machine administrator.Other integer: Indicates subjects for security protection.

- action: Used to specify the operation.

Check details of operation that action indicates in the following table.- result: Result of an operation.

For password authentication, success or failure will be indicated as OKand NG.For operations without password authentication, all log entries will beindicated as OK.








22.5 Table of items saved in audit log

The purpose of analyzing the audit log is to understand the following andimplement countermeasures:

Whether or not data was accessed or tampered with

- Subject of attack

- Details of attack- Results of attack

- For specific analysis methods, see the next page.

No. Operation ID Storedaction

Result

1 CE authentication CE ID 01 OK/NG

2 Manager authentication Machine AdministratorID

02 OK/NG

3 Set/change Security Strengthenmode

Machine AdministratorID

03 OK

4 Print audit log Machine AdministratorID

04 OK

5 Change/register CE password CE ID 05 OK

6 Change/register Machine Adminis-trator password password

CE ID/ Machine Admin-istrator ID

06 OK

13 Change HDD lock password Machine AdministratorID

19 OK








Specify unauthorized actions: password authentication

If logs have NG as the result of password authentication (action: 01, 02),items protected by passwords may have been attacked.

- Failed password authentication (NG) log entries specify who made theoperation, and show if unauthorized actions were made when passwordauthentication failed.

- Even if password authentication succeeded (OK), it shows whether alegitimate user created the action. You need to check carefully whensuccessful authentication occurs after series of failures especially duringtimes other than normal operating hours.

Specify unauthorized actions: actions other than password

authentication under security

All operation results other than password authentication will be indicated assuccessful (OK), so determine if there were any unauthorized actions by ID

and action.- Check the time, and see if the user who operated the specific subjectmade any unauthorized actions.

Actions to take if unauthorized operations are found

If it's found that a password has been leaked after analyzing the audit log,change the password immediately.






23Troubleshooting






Troubleshooting 23


23 Troubleshooting

23.1 If “Please Call Service C-####” message is displayed

A "Please Call Service C-####" message indicates a machine condition thatrequires the attention of your service representative.

The Call for Service screen usually displays the telephone and facsimilenumbers of your service representative.

Be sure to contact your service representative immediately by following the

procedure below.






23 Troubleshooting


To contact service representative

1 Make note of the report code number "C-####" indicated in the secondline of the message area.

2 Turn OFF the sub power switch and main power switch.

3 Unplug the machine.

4 Contact your service representative and report the condition and reportcode number.

!DetailThe machine administrator can call for service using the Utility setting.

For details, see page 17-139.

In this case, you don’t have to make a call for the report code, because your machine has been monitored automatically by your service

representative.

After calling for service using the Utility setting, be sure to turn OFF the

power immediately, then unplug the machine as described here.






Troubleshooting 23


Limited use of the copier in trouble

If the message shown below is displayed on the Call for Service screen, youmay continue operating the copier on a limited function basis and utilize thetrays and ADU that are not affected by the trouble. To obtain this limitedfunctionality of the copier, consult your service representative. Be sure toutilize the limited function only temporarily, and arrange for machine repair

immediately.

1 If the limited use of the copier is available, the following message isdisplayed in the message area instead of the report code.

ex.

-- Tray 2 failure --Press Reset to select except this tray

2 Press [Reset].

– Make note of the report code.Please switch Off/OnC-0202

3 Turn OFF then ON the sub power switch.

A copying job can continue without using the troubled portion of themachine (ex. Tray 2).

7 CAUTIONPrecaution for limited useThe machine should not keep operating by limited use for long time.

% Be sure to contact your service representative immediately when the

Call for Service screen is displayed.






23 Troubleshooting


23.2 Clearing mishandled paper

When a paper misfeed occurs, the machine stops making copies and theJam Position screen displays to indicate misfeed area(s).

The [Start] LED turns red on the control panel, and copying operation cannot

be continued until all the misfeed locations are cleared.

All the misfeed locations will be indicated by flashing/lighting numbers and

arrows on this screen. Flashing number and arrow indicate the jammedposition of the highest priority.

Action to remove mishandled paper is displayed in the message area, andtouching Illustration will display subsequent screens for the disposal action.

Follow the procedure below to remove mishandled paper.

!Detail

A jam code can be displayed in the message area of the Jam Position

screen. Contact your service representative, if desired.

Before performing the clearing procedure, see page 1-52 for the caution

label locations inside the machine.

Illustration key

Touch to display the subsequentscreens for the disposal action.

Message area An action will bedisplayed.

Paper jam positiondisplay

Numbers flashing orlighting indicate the jammed positions.






Troubleshooting 23


To remove mishandled paper

1 Touch Illustration on the screen.

The screen illustrating the method for the disposal action will bedisplayed.

2 Follow the procedure on the screen to remove misfed paper.

– Touch [Next] to go to the next page of a series of illustrations, ifprovided.

– Touch [Jam Position] to return to the Jam Position screen.– When removing mishandled paper, be sure to leave no torn paper

inside the machine.– Do not touch or damage the drum surface.

3 When completed, the Machine Status screen will be restored.

– If any misfeed location is left, the Jam Position screen will berestored with the next disposal procedure in the message area andthe location number in the jam position display. Repeat steps 1 to

2 until all the locations are cleared.

7 CAUTIONPrecaution for high temperatureThe internal fixing unit is very hot.

% To avoid getting burned, DO NOT TOUCH.

% Be especially careful not to put your hand into the fixing unit area whenwithdrawing the fixing conveyance unit to remove mishandled paper.






23 Troubleshooting


7 CAUTIONPrecaution for getting injured% Be careful of removing staples stuck inside the machine so as not to

get injured.






Troubleshooting 23


23.3 If [MACHINE] tab blinks in orange

If any trouble occurs in the machine, one of the following messages will bedisplayed in the message area and the [MACHINE] tab will blink in orange.- Paper misfeed: "Mishandled paper"

- Tray empty: "Please load ## paper"

With the above message, the [Detail Check] key will be displayed on theMachine Status screen.

Touch [Detail Check], and follow the instruction on the screen.

Paper misfeed

If a paper misfeed occurs with the print/scan job in progress while you aresetting a reserve job, the machine stops operation and the [MACHINE] tab

may blink in orange.

If the Jam Position screen is displayed after touching [Detail Check], followthe procedure on page 23-6 to remove mishandled paper.






23 Troubleshooting


Tray empty

If the popup screen shown below is displayed after touching [Detail Check],the selected tray has become empty.

Follow the procedure below to change the tray selection for the current job,or supply the empty tray with copy paper.






Troubleshooting 23


To change the tray selection

1 Touch the desired tray key.

2 Touch [OK] to restore the Machine Status screen.

3 Press [Start].

Copy paper will be delivered from newly selected tray to continue theprinting operation.

To supply the empty tray with paper

1 Load paper in the empty tray.

2 Touch [Close] to restore the Machine Status screen.

3 Press [Start].

Printing operation will resume using the tray supplied with paper.

!DetailFor details of loading paper, see page 4-3.






23 Troubleshooting


Inconformity in paper setting

The machine automatically stops when copy paper in the selected trayshould be replaced according to the paper setting specified in print data

setting, and displays the following popup screen.

Follow the procedure for each to continue the machine operation.

1 Replace paper in the tray with that specified in the paper setting, thentouch [Change].

2 Press [Start] to start the printing operation.






Troubleshooting 23


23.4 If “Memory Full” message is displayed: Memoryoverflow

In certain modes, this machine uses memory to make operations convenientand smooth flowing.

Occasional memory overflow may occur if the installed memory is

inadequate for the copy conditions selected, and the machine will stop itsoperation with the following popup screen displayed.






23 Troubleshooting


% Touch [Stop]. All the scanned data will be cleared to terminate the job.






Troubleshooting 23


23.5 If Power off/on screen is displayed

When any trouble affects the electrical signal of the copier, "Please turnpower Off/On" will be displayed in the message area.

Follow the procedure below to turn the machine power off then on.

To turn machine power off/on

1 Turn OFF the sub power switch.

2 Turn OFF the main power switch.

3 Wait about 10 seconds.

4 Turn ON the main power switch andsub power switch.






23 Troubleshooting


23.6 Troubleshooting tips

Symptom Remedy

COPIER DOES NOT OPER- ATE WHEN SUB POWERSWITCH IS ON

Check to be sure power plug is firmly inserted in electrical socket.Check to be sure main power switch is ON.Check to see if Weekly Timer function is activated. See page 2-31

for details.Check to see if User Authentication is required on the screen. Seepage 2-33 for details.

COPY IMAGE IS TOOLIGHT

Manually adjust copy density to darker density.Check toner message and add toner, if required.Check paper for dampness. Do not leave paper in copier whenhumidity is high.Check to see if Photo, Text, or Map mode is required.

COPY IMAGE IS TOODARK

Manually adjust copy density to lighter density.Check to see if Photo, Text, or Map mode is required.

COPY IMAGE IS NOTCLEAN OR SHOWS SPOTS

Use clean originals since dirt marks may be copied.Keep original glass and inner surface of document feeder clean.

Call for service if "Please call service" is displayed in the messagearea.Check density indicator and lighten if required.

COPY PAPER MISHAN-DLES DURING COPYING

Fan copy paper and load it with curl side in proper location. Donot exceed the tray capacity.

MAGNIFICATION CANNOTBE CHANGED

Reduce & Shift is incompatible with magnification.Press [Reset] and set desired copying conditions without usingReduce & Shift.

DUPLEX MODES CANNOTBE SELECTED

Fully close ADF, then select the desired duplex mode again.

COPYING DOES NOT BE-

GIN AFTER PRESSING[Start]

Close Front door of main body.

Insert or adjust the appropriate paper tray for paper size selected.Be sure the print quantity is entered.Close Finisher door/Folding unit door/Large capacity stackerdoor completely.

COPYING DOES NOTRESUME AFTER MISHAN-DLED PAPER IS REMOVED

Check copier diagram on touch panel for additional indications ofmishandled paper.

COPY QUALITY IS POOR Check paper for dampness, and replace it if necessary.Contact your service representative.

USING USER AUTHENTI-CATION, COPIES CANNOTBE MADE AFTER PASS-

WORD IS ENTERED

Check to see if the message "Copy limit reached" is displayed.Contact the machine manager to reset limit.

THE ORIGINAL PAPER ISMISHANDLED ORSKEWED IN THE DOCU-MENT FEEDER

Originals should conform to the recommended size and weight.Be sure originals are not stapled. Align originals evenly in the ADF.Check to make sure paper guides meet the width of mixed sizeoriginals.

ADF CANNOT BE USED AFTER [Reset] IS PRESSED

Fully close ADF.Originals should conform to the recommended size and weight.Position originals properly in the ADF.Set to use ADF in the Initial Setting. For details, see page 16-39.






Troubleshooting 23


FINISHER/FOLDING UNITDOES NOT OPERATE

Check for a paper misfeed and remove it, as required.Properly close finisher door/Folding unit door.

ADD TONER MESSAGE ISDISPLAYED

New toner supply is needed. Follow instructions for adding toner.

CALL FOR PM IS DIS-PLAYED IN MESSAGE AREA

Contact your service representative for Preventive Maintenance.

APS SELECTS THEWRONG PAPER SIZE

Paper guides must be adjusted exactly to the size of originals.

IN MIXED ORIGINALMODE, A MESSAGE TOLOAD A REQUIRED PAPERSIZE DISPLAYS, EVENTHOUGH THAT SIZE ISLOADED IN ONE OF THETRAYS

Paper sizes loaded in the trays must be consistent with the trayposition size; otherwise, the tray key on the Copy screen willblink.

THE COPY SCREEN DOESNOT DISPLAY SETTINGS AS DESCRIBED IN USERMANUAL

Check with the machine manager, as Initial Settings may havebeen changed.

"PLEASE CHECK ORIGI-NAL"

This message appears when the copier detects a non-standardpaper size on the original glass.Select paper size and press [Start]. 1.000 magnification will be se-lected automatically.If this message continues to be displayed after selecting papersize, select 1.000 magnification, even if it is already indicated,then press [Start]. If desired, ask your service representative toenable the machine to default to 1.000 magnification in this situ-ation.

SHEET INSERTION RE-SULT IS NOT AS EXPECT-ED

Blank insertion: Be sure manuscript originals do not already in-clude blank sheets in the locations designated for sheet insertion.

Print insertion: To ensure that chapter sheets in 1-2 mode alwaysappear on the right hand side in the finished set, insertion sheetsmust be designated on the page setting screen with odd num-bers, not even. If required, make an even numbered original pageodd by inserting a blank sheet in front of that page, so that theblank sheet is even and the insertion sheet is odd.

FINISHER STAPLE RE-SULT IS NOT AS EXPECT-ED

The 2 staple position functions only on copy paper that is loadedvertically (portrait style).Check to see if Rotation functions. Release it, if necessary.

COPIES SKEW IN THE

STAPLED SETS

Check to see if copy paper is excessively curled in the tray. Re-

load the copy paper upside down.Check to see if large-sized copies meet the secondary (sub) traywhen fully output before being stapled. Release the lock of thesecondary (sub) tray, then slightly lift it upward.

USING PUNCH, COPIESCANNOT BE PUNCHED

Check to see if the Punch Waste Basket indicator lights in red onthe Machine Status screen.Empty the waste basket.

COPIES CANNOT BE STA-PLED OR PUNCHED INPOSITION

Check to make sure the side guide plates are securely aligned tothe copy paper in the paper tray to be used.

Symptom Remedy






23 Troubleshooting


USING TRIMMING, COP-IES CANNOT BE TRIMMED

Check to see if the Trim Waste indicator lights in red on the Ma-chine Status screen.Empty the waste basket of saddle stitcher, or contact the ma-chine manager.

Symptom Remedy






24Maintenance






Maintenance 24


24 Maintenance

24.1 Cleaning the machine

In order to maintain optimum copy quality, always keep the following areasclean.

2

ReminderNever use paint solvents, such as benzene or thinners, to clean the

following areas.

Cleaning the original glass

% Raise the ADF, then clean the originalglass with a soft, dry cloth.– The glass may also clean with a

soft cloth dampened slightly withwater, if it is difficult to clean.

Cleaning the ADF guide cover

Keep the ADF guide cover clean; otherwisesoil marks may be copied or the original sizecannot be detected correctly.

% Raise the ADF, then clean the coverwith a soft, dry cloth.






24 Maintenance


Cleaning the original cover

Keep the original cover clean; otherwise soilmarks may be copied, resulting in dark lineson the copies.

% Raise the original cover, then clean it

with a soft, dry cloth.

Cleaning the machine external

% Clean the external surface of themachine with a soft cloth dampened

with a mild household detergent.

2

ReminderBe sure to turn off the main power switch before cleaning it.






Maintenance 24


Cleaning the control panel

% Clean the control panel with a soft, drycloth.

2

ReminderPressing too hard on the control panel or the touch panel may damage

them.

Never use a household detergent, glass cleaner, benzine, or thinner to

clean the control panel and touch panel.






24 Maintenance


24.2 Checking copy count

The Utility menu screen allows you to view the current indication of thefollowing counters as a list.- Total count

- Full color count

- Single color count- Black count

- Printer total count

- Copy total count- Scanner total count

The product life cycle such as of the drum, developer, transfer belt, chargedelectrode, etc. can also be checked and printed from the Copy screen, if

desired.

!DetailMachine can be set to display the Utility menu screen available for

displaying and editing the CMS part count list (part name, P/N, limit), and

also resetting the count. For details, please contact your service

representative.






Maintenance 24


To check the counters

1 Press [Utility/Counter] on the control panel.

The Utility menu screen will be displayed.

2 Check the counter information.

– The counter information is displayed on the left side of the screen.

Touching [Exit] will exit the Utility mode and restore the previousscreen.

3 Touch [Detail].

The product life cycle such as of the drum, developer, transfer belt,charged electrode, etc. will be displayed.If printed list is not desired, touch [Exit] to exit the Utility mode andrestore the previous screen.






24 Maintenance


4 Print the counter list.

– Touch [COPY] tab to display the Copy screen.Select the desired paper size, then press [Start].

After the Counter list is printed out, the Utility mode will be releasedautomatically and the previous screen will be restored.






Maintenance 24


24.3 Cleaning conveyance belt of saddle stitcher tray

The conveyance belt of saddle stitcher tray should be kept clean, otherwisesoil marks may be copied. Follow the procedure below to clean theconveyance belt.

In order to maintain optimum copy quality, we recommend to clean it every

time before using the saddle stitcher tray.

To clean the conveyance belt

1 Fully withdraw the saddle stitcher tray, then open the tray stand.

– Never fail to open the tray stand, otherwise the machine may bedamaged.






24 Maintenance


2 Clean the surface of the twoconveyance belts with a soft clothdampened slightly with alcohol(cleaner).

3 Move the conveyance belt to cleanthe whole length.

– Raise the two belts lightly, thenpull them both frontward at the

same time in order to show thehidden parts.– Do not raise the belt higher than

need be, or never fail to pull thetwo belts at the same time;otherwise machine trouble may becaused.

– Clean the belts in the same way as above, using a soft clothdampened with alcohol.

– Repeat steps 2 and 3 (about three times) to clean the whole round

of the belt.

4 Clean the bottom plate of the saddlestitcher tray.

– Wipe the whole surface of thebottom plate with a soft clothslightly dampened with alcohol(cleaner).

5 Return the tray stand to its original position, then return the saddle

stitcher tray.






Maintenance 24


2

ReminderBe sure to clean the whole round of the conveyance belt.

Never return the saddle stitcher tray to its original position with the tray

stand opened.






24 Maintenance


24.4 If “Trim receiver exchange” message is displayed

This machine trims the printed sets using a cutting blade and its receiver,which may require replacement in a long period of use.

When replacement is due, the "Trim Receiver exchange" message appears

on the right side of Trim Waste indicator in the option status area of Machine

Status screen.

If the above message is displayed, please contact your servicerepresentative.

!DetailThe machine manager can call for service using the Utility setting. For


In this case, you don’t have to make a call for preventive maintenance,

because your machine has been monitored automatically by your service

representative.






Maintenance 24


24.5 Preventive maintenance

After a set number of copies (200,000 copies) have been made on yourmachine, Preventive Maintenance (PM) will be required for maintainingoptimal performance.

When preventive maintenance is due, a message and the PM icon ( ) will

prompt you to contact your service representative for maintenance.

!DetailThe machine manager can call for service using the Utility setting. For


In this case, you don’t have to make a call for preventive maintenance,

because your machine has been monitored automatically by your service

representative.






24 Maintenance






25Specifications






Specifications 25


25 Specifications

25.1 Main body specifications

Main body

Item Description

Name bizhub PRO C6500

Type Console type

Document holder Stationary

Photoconductor OPC

Luminous source Xenon lamp

Copying system Laser electrostatic transfer method

Developing system Dry-type dual-component reverse magnetic brush devel-oping

Fusing system Belt fixed

Density adjustment Copy density: automatic and manual (9 levels)Background adjustment: manual (9 levels)

Magnification ratios Full size: e 1.000 ± 1.0% or lessEnlargement (Fixed zoom): e 1.154, e 1.224, e 1.414,e 2.000Reduction (Fixed zoom): e 0.500, e 0.866, e 0.816,

e 0.707Zoom with constant X and Y ratio: e 0.250 to 4.000 (in0.001 increments)Independent zoom: vertical e 0.250 to 4.000 (in 0.001 in-crements), horizontal e 0.250 to 4.000 (in 0.001 incre-ments)User-set zoom ratio: 3

Scanning resolution 600 dpi e 600 dpi

Printing resolution 600 dpi e 600 dpi (1,800 dpi: when selecting printersmoothing function)

Gradation/color 256 (8 bits) / C, M, Y, K

Paper types Main body trays (tray1 to 3): 64 g/m2 to 209 g/m2, 64 g/m2 to 256 g/m2 (A4/8.5"e11" or larger)Bypass tray: 64 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 (simplex mode),64 g/m2 to 256 g/m2 (duplex mode)envelopes, labels, tab paper, coated paper

Copy speed 65 sheets/min. (A4 v ), 36 sheets/min. (A3 w ), 41sheets/min. (B4 w ), 50 sheets/min. (A4w ), 56 sheets/min.(B5 w ), 66 sheets/min. (B5 v )

Multiple copies/sets 1 to 9,999 copies/1 to 9,999 sets

Memory 256 MB per each color (C, M, Y, K)






25 Specifications


In order to incorporate improvements, these product specifications aresubject to change without notice.

Document Types: sheets, books (spread), three-dimensional objectsSize: max. 303 mm e 438 mmThickness: max. 30 mm, Weight: 6.8 kgDetectable sizes for original glass: A3 w, B4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 w / v, A6 wDetectable sizes for ADF:

A3 w, B4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 w/v, 11" e 17" w,8" e13" w, 8.5"e 11" v

Paper sizes Trays 1, 2, and 3Standard sizes: SRA3 w, SRA4 w / v, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 w, 12"e 18"w, 11" e17" w,8.5"e 11" vCustom sizes: Max. 330 e 487 mm to min. 140 e 182mmBypass trayStandard sizes: SRA3 w, SRA4 w / v, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 w / v, B6 w, A6 w, 13"e19" w,12"e 18"w, 11"e 17" w, 8.5" e 11" w / vCustom sizes: Max. 330 e 487 mm to min. 100 e 148mm

Image blank Leading edge, front and rear: Less than 2.0 mm ± 2.0 mm

Trailing edge: Less than 1.5 mm ± 1.5 mm

Paper tray capacity 1, 2 and 3500 sheets (80 g/m2 paper)Bypass tray250 sheets (80 g/m2 paper)

Warm-up time Approx. 7 minutes

First copy Approx. 5.0 seconds (A4) in black mode Approx. 6.5 seconds (A4) in full color/single color mode

Noise 78 dB (main body)

Power requirements AC 230 V, 16 A, 50 Hz

Power consumption Max. 4,060 W (main body with DF-609, PF-601, RU-503,FD-501 and SD-501)

Weight Approx. 360 kg

Dimensions 786 (W) e 992 (D) e 1056 (H) mm (main body and originalcover without control panel)

Space requirements 293 mm or more on the back100 mm or more on both sides

Item Description






Specifications 25


25.2 Option specifications

Automatic document feeder DF-609

Paper feeder unit PF-601

Item Description

Name DF-609

Document feed methods Standard original: single-sided, double-sidedMixed original: single-sided, double-sided

Original paper types Single-sided original: 35 to 200 g/m2

Double-sided original: 50 to 200 g/m2

Original sizes 128 mme139.7mm to 297 mme431.8 mmDetectable sizes: A3 w, B4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 w / v, 11"e17" w,8"e 13" w, 8.5" e 11" v

Capacity of document feeder Max. 100 sheets (80 g/m2 )

Power source Supplied from main body

Dimensions 588 (W) e 519 (D) e 135 (H) mm

Weight Approx. 14.5 kg

Item Description

Name PF-601

Function Feed paper into main body

Configuration 2 paper trays

Paper sizes SRA3 w, SRA4 w / v, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5v, B6w 13" e 19" w, 12" e 18" w, 11" e 17" w, 8.5" e 14"w, 8.5" e 11" w / v, 5.5 e 8.5 w (A5 v and B6 w are onlyloaded in tray 5)

Paper type Plain paper, High quality paper, Coated paper

Paper weight Upper tray (tray 4): 64 g/m2 to 256 g/m2

Lower tray (tray 5): 64 g/m2 to 300 g/m2

Paper tray capacity Upper tray (tray 4): 3,000 sheets (80 g/m2 )Lower tray (tray 5): 3,000 sheets (80 g/m2 )

Dimensions 947 (W) e 750 (D) e 1,045(H) mm








25 Specifications


Large Capacity Unit LU-202

Large capacity stacker LS-501

Item Description

Name LU-202

Function Feed paper into main body

Configuration 1 paper tray

Paper sizes SRA3 w, SRA4 w / v, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w / v, B5 / v, 13" e 19" w, 11" e 17" w, 8.5" e 11" v

Paper type Plain paper, High quality paper, Coated paper

Paper weight 64 g/m2 to 300 g/m2

Paper tray capacity 2,500 sheets (80 g/m2 )

Dimensions 710 (W) e 639 (D) e 477(H) mm



Item Description

Name LS-501

Function Stack printed paper

Paper types Stacker: 50 to 244 g/m2

Secondary (sub) tray: 50 to 300 g/m2

Paper sizes Stacker: SRA3 w, SRA4 w / v, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w / v,B5 w / v, A5 w, 13" e19" w, 12"e 18"w, 11" e17" w,8.5"e 14" w, 8.5" e11" w / v and custom sizes (max.331mme488 mm to min. 210 mme148mm)Secondary (sub) tray: SRA3 w, SRA4 w / v, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 w / v, B6 w, A6 w, 13"e19" w,12"e 18"w, 11"e 17" w, 8.5" e 14" w, 8.5" e11" w / v,5.5"e 8.5"w / v and custom sizes (max. 331 mme 488mmto min. 100 mme 139mm)Tabbed paper is output to the secondary (sub) tray. (See "Paper information" on page 3-3 for details.)

Capacity Stacker:5,000 sheets2,000 sheets for B5 w and A5 w

3,000 sheets for Coated paper and 380 mm or longer pa-perSecondary (sub) tray: 200 sheets

Power source Supplied from internal battery

Dimensions 785 (W) e 723 (D) e 1,020 (H) mm







Specifications 25


Finisher FS-503

Item Description

Name FS-503

Finisher type Offset catch tray

Function Straight delivery (collated, uncollated)Offset delivery (collate and offset, uncollate and offset)Staple delivery (corner staple, 2 staples)

Output tray Primary (main) and secondary (sub) trays

Paper types 50 to 300 g/m2

Paper sizes Staple:SRA3 w, SRA4 w / v, A3 w, B4 w, F4 w, A4 w / v, B5 v, A5 v, 8K w, 16K v, 12" e18"w, 11" e 17" w, 8.5"e14" w,8.5" e 11" w / v, 5.5" e 8.5" v, custom size, and tab paperStraight and offset delivery:SRA3w, SRA4 w / v, A3w, B4 w, F4 w, A4 w / v, B5 w / v, A5 w / v, B6 w*1, A6 w, 8K w, 16K w / v, 13"e 19" w*1,12" e18"w, 11" e 17" w, 8.5" e14" w, 8.5"e 11" w / v,5.5" e 8.5" w / v, custom size, and tab paper*1: 13"e19" w and B6 w are available for straight outputonly.(See "Paper information" on page 3-3 for further details.)

Stapling capacity 100 sheets max. (80 g/m2 )

Output tray capacity Primary (main) tray: 3,000 sheets max.Secondary (sub) tray: 200 sheets max. (See "Paper information" on page 3-3 for details.)

Staple cartridge Contains 5,000 staples


Dimensions 544 (W) e 723 (D) e 1,020 (H) mmWidth including primary (main) tray: 798mm/ 915mm(pulled out)







25 Specifications


Folding unit FD-501

Saddle stitcher SD-501

Item Description

Name FD-501

Function Distributes output

Number of punch holes 2 or 4

Hole diameter 6.5 ± 0.5 mm

Hole pitch 80 ± 0.5 mm (2/4 holes)70± 0.5mm; (29mm ± 0.5) e 2 (Swedish)

Fold type Z-Fold, Tri-Fold-in, Tri-Fold-out, Half-Fold, Double Paral-lel, Gate Fold

Paper types Primary (main) tray: 50 to 244 g/m2 paperSecondary (sub) tray: 50 to 300 g/m2 paper(See p. 3-3 for details.)

Paper sizes See "Paper information" on page 3-3 for details.

Output tray capacity Primary (main) tray: 2,500 sheets max.Secondary (sub) tray: 200 sheets max.(See p. 3-3 for details.)

Power source Supplied from finisher

Dimensions 400 (W) e 723 (D) e 1,231 (H) mmWidth including primary (main) tray: 667 mm/ 784mm(pulled out)


Item Description

Name SD-501

Function Multi half fold, Fold & staple, Multi tri-fold

Binding pitch 90 to 165 mm

Binding capacity Max. 50 sheets

Paper Types Fold & staple, Trimming: 50 to 244 g/m2

(See"Paper information" on page 3-3 for details.)

Paper Sizes Fold & staple, Trimming:SRA3 w, SRA4 w / v, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, B5 w, F4 w,8K w, 16K w, 12" e 18" w, 11" e 17" w, 8.5" e 14" w,8.5" e 11" w(See p. 3-3 for details.)

Paper tray capacity See "Paper information" on page 3-3 for details.

Maximum power consumption 270VA

Dimensions 1,170 (W) e 775 (1,441 when tray is pulled out) (D) e 1,020 (H) mm

Power source Supplied from internal battery






Specifications 25


Finisher FS-607

Punch Kit PK-512/513

Item Description

Name FS-607

Finisher type Offset catch tray

Output tray Primary (main), secondary (sub), and fold & staple trays

Function Straight delivery (collated, uncollated)Offset delivery (collate and offset, uncollate and offset)Staple delivery (corner staple, 2 staples)Multi half fold, Fold & staple, Multi tri-fold

Fold & Staple binding pitch 128 to 160 mm

Fold & Staple binding capacity Max. 20 sheets (60 g/m2 to 105 g/m2, 60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 color paper, coated paper)Max 16 sheets (81 g/m2 to 105g/m2 color paper, coatedpaper)

Paper Types Primary (main) tray: 60 to 105 g/m2

(See "Paper information" on page 3-3 for details.)

Paper Sizes See "Paper size" on page 3-9 for details.

Paper tray capacity See "Paper tray/ exit tray capacity" on page 3-6 for de-tails.

Maximum power consumption 80 W or less

Dimensions 424 (W) e 656 (674.5 when primary (main) tray is attached/790.5 when the tray is pulled out) (D) e 990 (H) mm


Item Description

Name PK-512/513

Function Punch file holes

Number of holes PK-512: 2 or 4 holesPK-513: Swedish 4 holes

Hole pitch PK-512: 80 ± 0.5 mmPK-513: 21/70/21 ± 0.5 mm Adjustable range: ± 5 mm

Hole diameter 6.5 ± 0.5 mm

Maximum power consumption 40 W or less

Dimensions 130 (W) e 470 (D) e 115 (H) mm

Power source Supplied from Finisher FS-607

Weight Approx. 3 kg






25 Specifications


Output tray OT-502

Other options

- Original cover OC-506

- Dehumidification fan heater HT-503/504

- Hard disk unit HD-506- Relay unit RU-503/504

- Image controller

Item Description

Name OT-502

Function Paper output tray for main body

Output tray capacity 150 sheets

Dimensions 342 (470 when tray is pulled out) (W) x 456 (D) x 170 (H)mm

Weight Approx. 1.85 kg






26 Appendix






Appendix 26


26 Appendix

26.1 How to input characters

As touching the item where you can input characters, the character inputscreen appears.You can input alphanumerics and symbols. A character array is the samewith the computer keyboards.

About keys on the caracter input screen

Keys on the character input screen are described here.

* / )This key moves a cursor.

[Delete]

This key deletes the character on the left of the cursor.

[OK]This key determines the characters you input, and the character input screencloses.

[Cancel]This key cancels the characters you input, and the character input screencloses.

[Shift]This key switches between an upper case letter and a lower case letter, andbetween numbers and signs.






26 Appendix


About character input

The followings describe basic steps to input characters on the characterinput screen.

1 Touch the corresponding key to input the desired character.

2 Touch [OK].

The character input screen closes. The input characters are displayedon the corresponding column.






Appendix 26


26.2 Index

Numerics1.000 magnification mode 6-28

1SHOT indication time 16-43 ,

17-132 2 in 1 8-18

2 Position Staple Pitch Adjustment 14-98

4 in 1 8-18

8 in 1 8-19

A A5/B6/A6 size paper 4-11

About colors 7-3 Access key 5-4

Accessibility 10-20

Accessibility key 5-4

Account Counter 17-123

Account Register 17-115

Account Track 17-115

ACS adjustment 16-61

Adding account track 19-5

Adding toner 4-25

Address Edit 17-80

ADF 2-4

ADF AMS 16-45 , 17-134

ADF Frame Erase 16-45 , 17-134

ADF Frame Erasure 17-30

ADF guide cover 24-3

ADF original direction 16-18

ADF originals 3-16

Adjustment 12-6

Administrator 17-139

Administrator Password 17-141

Advanced information 10-3

AES Level Adjustment 17-28

Air assist 13-5

Application functions 8-3

Applying filters 7-12

ATS Permit Setting 16-11

Audit log Analyze 22-15

Print 22-12 Authentication Method 17-98

Auto Detect Orig. Size in ADF 16-45 , 17-134

Auto Low Power 2-28

Auto Paper Select 6-44

Auto Paper Type 16-12

Auto Reset 2-26

Auto Reset Setting 16-16

Auto Shut-Off 2-29

Auto tray switch function 3-13

Auto Zoom 6-32

Automatic document feeder 2-4

Automatic exposure 7-15

Available features 1-27

BBackground 7-18

Bind Direction 6-3

Binding Direction 9-7

Black (K) 7-9

Black print counter 2-5

Blue (B) 7-8

Blur Prevention 16-50

Book Copy 8-29

Booklet 9-27

Booklet Pagination 8-22

Bookmark function 16-45 , 17-134

Bookmark key 8-5 , 10-5

Both Sides Adj. 12-5 , 13-4

Brightness 7-7 , 7-32

Brightness (B) 7-5

Browser 10-21






26 Appendix


B-side prevent 7-21

Built-in Stamp 8-71

Buzzer Setting 16-29

Bypass tray 4-8

CCall for Service Screen 23-3

Caution notations and labels 1-52

CD-Mag. Adjustment 14-11 , 17-40

Centering Adjustment 14-6 , 14-16 ,17-36

Change Page Print Pos (Booklet) 16-45 , 17-134

Change Password 16-63

Change Prohibit Setting 17-24 Change user 16-18

Chapters 8-14

Chart Adjustment Screen 6-60

Chart of setting items 15-3

Checking Copy Count 24-6

Choose Default Tray when APS Off 16-46 , 17-135

Cleaning conveyance belt 24-9

Cleaning the machine 24-3

Clear key 5-4

Clearing mishandled paper 23-6

CMYK model 7-3

CMYK value 7-44

Collate 9-9 , 9-36

Collate/ Uncollate Output to theSecondary (Sub) Tray 9-43

Collate/uncollate output to thesecondary (sub) tray 9-16

Color adjustment 7-3

Color Balance 7-44

Color copy quality 7-6

Color Mode 6-26

Combine Originals 8-18

Common Setting 16-43 , 17-132

Compress Method Color/Gray 16-48 , 17-137

Compression 7-41

Continuation print 16-43 , 17-132

Contrast 7-12 , 7-36 Control panel 5-3

Controller 12-7

Controlling copier from browser 10-21

Conveyance fixing unit 2-5

Copy count 24-6

Copy density 7-15

Copy Initial setting 16-39

Copy screen 5-6

Copy Setting 16-45 , 17-134

Cover sheet 9-24

Cover Sheet Feeding 9-52

CSV format 19-19

Curl Reform Direction 14-79

Custom 6-15

Custom Screen 17-67

Cyan (C) 7-9

DData LED 5-4

Date/Time 8-77

Default Address 16-48 , 17-137

Default Screen Setting 16-20

Dehumidification Fan 16-14

Delete paper setting 13-18

Density level 7-15

Detailed Setting inStamp/Watermark 8-83

Direction 6-5

Disposing punch waste 4-41

Disposing trimmings 4-45

Dither (Error Diffusion) method 7-10






Appendix 26


Dot screen 7-10 , 7-41

Double Parallel 9-18 , 9-22

Double Parallel Pos. Adj. 14-46

E

Editing account track data 19-10 E-Mail Initial Setting 17-130

E-Mail Text Setting 17-97

E-Mail Title Setting 17-95

Enhanced security mode Audit log 21-3

Normal mode 20-4

Enlarge/Reduce 6-30

Erase Adjustment 17-30

Erase Operating Setting 17-30 Exchanging toner recovery box 4-30

Execute Adjust Operation 14-22 ,17-69

Expert Adjustment 17-28

FFace down 9-10 , 9-37

Face up 9-10 , 9-37

FD-Mag. Adjustment 14-8 , 14-18 ,17-38

Feed Tray Setting 16-9

File Form Default E-Mail 16-48 ,17-137

File Form Default FTP 16-48 ,17-137

File Form Default SMB 16-48 ,17-137

Fine Adjust Margin 16-45 , 17-134 Finisher Adjustment 17-48

Finisher Adjustment (FD-501) 14-32

Finisher Adjustment (FS-503) 14-23

Finisher Adjustment (FS-607) 14-81

Finisher Adjustment (LS-501) 14-55

Finisher Adjustment (RU-503/ RU-504) 14-79

Finisher Adjustment (SD-501) 14-59

Finisher FS-503 2-8

Finisher FS-607 2-16

Finisher Mode by Full-auto 16-18

Fixing pressure 6-61

Fixing unit 2-5 , 6-61

Fold & Staple 9-28 , 9-45

Fold & Staple auto select 16-45 ,17-134

Fold Paper Width Adj. 14-73

Folding 9-18

Folding copies 9-22 , 9-30

Folding mode tray 2-17

Folding unit FD-501

2-12

Frame Center Erase 8-54

Front & Back Density 17-52

Front door 2-4

Full-auto 2-26

Function list of machineadministrator setting 15-21

Function list of user setting 15-14

GGate Fold 9-18 , 9-22

Gate Fold Position Adj. 14-52

General copy operation 5-10

Glossy 7-13 , 7-46

Gray Text Outline Enhance 16-50

Green (G) 7-8

H

Half Fold 9-18 , 9-22 Half Fold Position Adj. 14-38 , 14-68

Half Fold Stopper Adjustmen 14-84

HDD Lock Password 17-143

Help key 5-4

Help mode 10-18

Help Screen 10-19






26 Appendix


Hole-Punch 9-20 , 9-50

Hole-Punch Vertical Pos. 14-35

Horizontcal Position Adj. 14-88

HSB model 7-5

HSB value 7-26

Hue 7-7 , 7-26

Hue (H) 7-5

IImage Centering 8-59

Image distinction level 7-11 , 7-38

Image Overlay 8-89

Image Quality Setting 16-55

Image Quality Stability 14-21 , 17-65

Image Repeat 8-46

Image/Type 6-7

Incomplete job 11-9

Inconformity in paper setting 23-12

Initial by Key Counter Insert 16-18

Initial Setting 16-39

Insert Image 8-25

Insert Sheet 8-6

Interrupt key 5-4

Interrupt mode 10-9

JJob List screen 11-3

Job Management 11-3

Job Offset Mode 16-43 , 17-132

K

Key Response Time 16-32 Keypad 5-4

LLanguage Setting 16-6

Large capacity stacker LS-501 2-10

Large Capacity Unit LU-202 2-19

Laser safety 1-48

Lead Edge Erase Adjustment 17-42

Legal restrictions on copying 1-35

Limited use of the copier in trouble 23-5

Line screen 7-10 , 7-41

List/Count 17-71 Loading paper 4-3

Loading tabbed sheets 4-20

Loading/sorting a volume of copies 9-56

Lock/Delete Mode Memory 17-22

Lunch Hour Off Setting 17-18

M

Machine Adjustment 14-3 Machine Administrator SecurityFunctions

HDD lock password 22-8

Machine administrator security

functions 22-3

Machine administrator setting 17-3

Machine configuration 2-3

Machine NIC Setting 17-128

Machine Status screen 5-8

Magenta (M) 7-9

Main power switch 2-5 , 2-23

Main unit specifications 25-3

Maintenance 24-3

Management Setting 17-101

Manually conserving energy 2-30

Memory overflow 23-13

Mixed 6-11 Mode Check 10-3

Mode Check key 5-4

Mode Memory 10-11

Mode memory auto call 16-18

Mode Memory key 5-4

Mode Reset Setting 16-18

Modifying colors 7-6






Appendix 26


Multi Folder (Fold) Adj. 14-38

Multi Folder (Punch) Adj. 14-32

Multi Half Fold 9-30 , 9-45

Multi Tri-Fold 9-30 , 9-47

Multi-folding mode tray 2-15

Multi-Page Enlargement 8-39

Multi-sheet bypass tray 2-4

Munsell color system 7-5

NNeg./Positive Reverse 8-44

Network Setting 17-128

Next Job Staple Setting 16-18

Non-Image Area Erase 8-42 , 17-30

Non-Image Area Erase of orig 16-45 , 17-134

Non-sort 9-9 , 9-36

Non-sort/ Collate/ Uncollate Outputto the Primary (Main) Tray 9-38

Non-sort/collate/uncollate output tothe primary (main) tray 9-11

O

Operating environment 1-61

Operation precautions 1-61

Operation Prohibit Set 17-22

Option Specifications 25-5

Orig. Glass Auto Size Select 16-45 ,17-134

Orig./Out Bind Direction Set 16-46 ,17-135

Original cover 24-4

Original Density shift 16-59

Original Glass AMS 16-45 , 17-134

Original information 3-14

Original Set/Bind Direction 16-18

Original setting 6-3

Output Applications 9-3

Output history 11-7

Output modes using folding unitFD-501 9-18

Output modes using saddle stitcherSD-501 9-27

Output Quantity Limit 14-102

Output tray 9-3 Overwrite image data 17-145

PPage Margin 8-61 , 8-66

Page No. 8-75

Page Space 8-65

Paper Edge Detect Sensor Adj. 14-94

Paper Feed Auto Selection 16-9 Paper feeder unit PF-601 2-6

Paper feeder unit tray 4-9

Paper indicator 4-3

Paper information 3-3

Paper Inserter PI-502 2-18

Paper Inserter Tray Size Adj. 14-100

Paper Length Adjustment 14-57

Paper misfeed 23-9

Paper name 13-4

Paper setting 6-43 , 6-48 , 12-4 ,13-3 , 16-9

Paper size 3-9

Paper tray/ exit tray capacity 3-6

Paper type 13-4

Paper weight 3-4

Paper Width (Staple) 14-26

Paper Width (Straight) 14-29 Paper Width Adjustment 14-32 ,14-55

Please Call Service 23-3

PM icon 24-13

Positioning the original 5-15

Positioning the original in mixedmode 5-17






26 Appendix


Positioning the original in Z-foldedmode 5-18

Positioning the original on originalglass 5-19

Post inserter 9-24

Power LED 5-4 Power off/on screen 23-15

Power Save key 5-4

Power Save LED 2-27

Power Save Setting 16-24 , 17-7

Power source 1-61

Pre-registration Adj. 17-46

Preset Zoom 6-31

Preset Zoom Setting 16-22

Preventive Maintenance 24-13

Primary (main) tray 9-9 , 9-36

Primary (Main) tray (Finisher) 2-17

Primary (main) tray (finisher) 2-9

Primary (main) tray (folding unit) 2-13

Print quantity 5-20

Printer Adjustment 14-3 , 17-34

Printer Gamma Offset Adj. 17-57 Printer Gamma Offset Auto Adj. 17-59

Printer Gamma Sensor Adj. 17-62

Printer Prohibit Timer 16-45 , 17-134

Printer Setting 16-50

Priority Paper Type 16-43 , 17-132

Process Adjustment 13-5 , 17-52

Program Job 8-35

Program Overlay 8-91

Proof Copy 10-7

Proof Copy key 5-4 , 10-6 , 10-7

Punch 9-18 , 9-49

Punch Adjustment 14-86

Punch Waste Basket indicator 4-41 ,4-43

Punching file holes 9-19

QQuality Adjustment 17-57

RRecalling previous job settings 10-16

Recalling stored job settings 10-14

Red (R) 7-8

Reduce & Shift 8-66

Register paper type/weight 13-10

Registration Adjustment

14-91

Registration Loop Adj. 17-44

Regulation notices 1-46

Remote Panel 10-21

Remote Panel setting 19-21

Removing finished sets 4-48

Replenishing staples 4-33

Reproducing images 7-10

Reserve job 6-63

Reserved job 11-4

Reset button function 16-18

Reset key 5-4

Reset Setting 16-16

Restart Timing Adjustment 14-3 ,14-14 , 17-34

Reversed Text Enhancement 16-50

RGB model 7-3

RGB value 7-23 Rotation 6-46 , 16-45 , 17-134

RU Adjustment 14-79

SSaddle Stitcher Adj. 14-59

Saddle stitcher SD-501 2-14

Saddle Stitcher Stopper Adj. 14-81






Appendix 26

Saddle stitcher tray 2-15

Safety information 1-37

Saturation 7-7 , 7-29

Saturation (S) 7-5

Scan Initial setting 16-41

Scan prohibit (pull out tray) 16-46 ,17-135

Scan Setting 16-48 , 17-137

Scanner Adjustment 14-14 , 17-50

Scanner Prohibit Setting 17-26

Scanner Send Address 17-80

Screen 16-55

Screen Initial setting 16-57

Screen type

7-41

Secondary (sub) tray 9-10 , 9-37

Secondary (Sub) tray (Finisher) 2-17

Secondary (sub) tray (finisher) 2-9

Secondary (sub) tray (folding unit) 2-13

Secondary (sub) tray (stacker) 2-11

Secondary (sub) tray (stitcher) 2-15

Security Setting 17-141

Security strengthen modeData protected 21-4

Environments 20-4

Machine Administratorauthentication 21-3

Machine Administrator settingmode 21-3

Turn on/off 21-4

Security Strengthen Set 17-146

Send history 11-8

Separate Scan mode 6-23

Service Port Device 16 37

Setting scan transmission function 19-24

Sharpness 7-12 , 7-34

Shift 8-61

Short cut Key Setting 16-33

Side 2 Lens Adjustment mode 16-43 , 17-132

Simplex/Duplex setting 6-33

Size 13-5

Size Setting 17-73

Sorting/stapling copies 9-9

Space requirements 1-55

Speed setting 13-5

Stacker Adjustment 14-55

Stamp/Image Overlay 8-69

Standard/optional equipment 2-20

Staple 9-9 , 9-36

Staple Cartridge Supply indicator 4-33 , 4-36 , 4-38

Staple Center Adj. 14-59

Staple Center Position 14-23

Staple Paper Width Adj 14-62

Staple Pitch Adjustment 14-65 Stapler Position Adj. 14-23

Stapling Output to the Primary(Main) Tray 9-40

Stapling output to the primary (main)tray 9-13

Start key 5-4

Status Hold When Auto Reset 16-18

Stop key 5-4

STOP Key Function 16-43 , 17-132

Stop/Resume the job in process

Bizhub Pro c6500e User Manual

Documents

Transcript of Bizhub Pro c6500e User Manual